JEE Class Companion

Physics
For JEE Main and Advanced

Module-8

Chapter_1 Electrostatics-1

Chapter_2 Electrostatics-2

Chapter_3 Current
Contents_____________________
Chapter_1 Electrostatics-1 1.1 Section E - Equipotential surface
Section A - Coloumb's law, Electrostatic Equipotential Surfaces : 1.34
Equillibrium + Properties of Charge
Section F - Electric field and electric potential
Introduction : 1.1
due to electric dipole, Dipole in electric field
Coulomb's Law : 1.2 (Torque, potential energy), Angular SHM for
Vector forms of Coloumb’s law 1.4 dipole, Force on electric dipole in Non-uniform
electric field
Coloumb's law in a medium 1.9
Electric Dipole 1.36
Section B - Electric field, Questions on constant Dipole in Uniform Electric field 1.38
electric field, Electric field due to uniformly
Potential Energy of a Dipole in
charged Rod, Time period of SHM +
Uniform Electric Field 1.38
Electrostatics, Electric field due to uniformly
charged Ring, disc, sheet Stable and Unstable equilibrium
of a Dipole in Electric Field 1.39
Electric field 1.10
Angular SHM or Dipole 1.39
Graph of electric field due
to binary charge configuration 1.15 Force on an Electric Dipole in
Non-uniform Electric Field 1.40
Electric field Strength at a
General Point due to a Uniformly Exercise 1.41
Charged Rod 1.16 Answer Key 1.64
Electric field due to infinite wire
(l >> r) 1.18 Chapter_2 Electrostatics-2 2.1
Electric field due to semi infinite Section A - Questions Based on electric flux for
wire 1.18 various configuration, Question on solid angle
Electric field due to Uniformly concept, Gauss law Based Questions
Charged Ring 1.19 Electric Flux 2.1
Electric field Strength due to a concept of solid angle 2.4
Uniformly Surface Charged
Gauss’s Law 2.6
Disc 1.21
Electric Field Strength due to a Section B, C - Properties of conductors, Spheres
Uniformly charged Hollow Problem + Electrostatics pressure
Hemispherical Cup 1.22
Conductors 2.11
Section C - Electrostatic potential energy, Electric pressure 2.12
Question Based on energy conservation and Field Energy of Electrostatic Field 2.15
Angular Momentum conservation, Potential
Charge Induction in Metal Cavities 2.18
energy for a system of charged particles
Cavity in a non conducting sphere 2.20
Conservative Force 1.23
Connection of two conducting
Non-conservative forces 1.24
Material 2.26
Electrostatic Potential Energy 1.25
Earthing of Charged or Uncharged
Motion of a Charge Particle and Metal Bodies 2.28
Angular Momentum Conservation 1.27
Conductor and it's properties [For
Potential Energy for a System electrostatic condition] 2.29
of charged Particles 1.27

Section D - Electric Potential, Relation between Section D - Plates

E and V., Potential due to point charge, Rod, Combination of conducting Plates 2.30
Ring, disc, Question Based on Electric field
(a) Total Electrostatic Energy of a
intensity, and electric potential, Questions
System of Charges 2.34
Based on electric field lines
(B) Electrostatic Energy of a
Electric Potential : 1.28
System of Concentric Shells 2.34
Relation between Electric Field
Exercise 2.36
Intensity and Electric Potential 1.31
Answer key 2.60
Electric Lines of Force 1.32
Chapter_3 Current Electricity 3.1 Wheatstone's Bridge 3.17
Section A - Definition of Current, Current Unbalanced Wheatstone's Bridge 3.18
Density, Drift Velocity Symmetrical Circuits 3.19
Introduction 3.1 Combinations of Cells 3.22
Conductor 3.1 Cells in Series 3.22
Insulator 3.1 Cells in Parallel 3.22
Semiconductor 3.1 Cells in Mix Grouping 3.23
Electric Curent and Current Electricity 3.1
Section E - Electrical Power & Energy
Drift Speed 3.2
Electric Power 3.24
Section B - Resistance & resistivity, Ohm's law Joule's Law of Electrical Heating 3.25
+ VI (Volt - Curr.) Characteristics + Colour
Maximum Power Transfer Theorem 3.26
Code + Temp. Dependence
OHM'S Law 3.4 Section F - Electrical Instrument + Exp.
Colour Coding of Resistance 3.6 Verifying ohm's law & Specific Resistance Using
Meter Brige & Post Office + Potentiometer (EMF
Effect of Temperature on Resistance 3.7
& Int. Res.)
Section C, D - Circuit theory, KCL & KVL, Instruments 3.26
Battery, Grouping of cells Ammeter 3.26
Battery and EMF 3.7 Voltmeter 3.27
Kirchhoff's Laws for Circuit Analysis 3.9 Meter-Bridge 3.28
(a) The Kirchhoff's Curent Law 3.10 Potentiometer 3.29
(b) The Kirchhoff's Voltage Law 3.12 Post Office Box 3.32
Combination of Resistances 3.13 Exercise 3.34
Resistance in Series 3.13 Answer Key 3.61
Resistance in Parallel 3.14

SYLLABUS

• Electrostatics–1
Electric charges: Conservation of charge, Coulomb’s law-forces between two point charges,
forces between multiple charges; superposition principle and continuous charge distribution.
Electric field: Electric field due to a point charge, Electric field lines, Electric dipole, Electric field
due to a dipole, Torque on a dipole in a uniform electric field Electric potential and its calculation
for a point charge, electric dipole and system of charges; Equipotential surfaces, Electrical
potential energy of a system of two point charges in an electrostatic field.

• Electrostatics–2
Electric field lines; Flux of electric field; Gauss;s law and its application in simple cases, such as,
to find field due to infinitely ling straight wire, uniformly charged infinite plane sheet and
uniformly charged thin spherical shell.

• Current Electricity
Electric current, Drift velocity, Ohm’s law, Electrical resistance, Resistances of different materials,
V-I characteristics of Ohmic and nonohmic conductors, Electrical energy and power, Electrical
resistivity, Colour code for resistors; Series and parallel combinations of resistors; Temperature
dependence of resistance. Electric Cell and its Internal resistance, potential difference and emf
of a cell, combination of cells in series and in parallel. Kirchhoff’s laws and their applications.
Wheatstone bridge, Metre bridge. Potentiometer - principle and its applications.
 Electrostatics-1 1.1

Section A - Coloumb's law, Electrostatic (d) Types of Charge

Equillibrium + Properties of (i) Positive charge : It is the deficiency of
Charge
electrons compared to protons.
(ii) Negative charge : It is the excess of electrons
1. INTRODUCTION :
compared to protons.
(a) Introduction :
Electromagnetism is a science of the combinatin of
(e) Units of Charge
electrical and magnetic phenomenon.
Charge is a derived physical quantity. Charge is
Electromagnetism can be divided into 2 parts :
measured in coulomb in S.I. unit. In practice we use
(1) Electrostatics : It deals with the study of
mC (10–3C), C (10 –6 C), nC (10–9C) etc.
charges at rest.
C.G.S unit of charge = electrostatic unit = esu.
(2) Electrodynamics : It deals with the study of
1 coulomb = 3 × 109 esu of charge
charges in motion (discusses magnetic phenomenon).
Dimensional formula of charge = [M°L°T1I1]
In this chapter we will be dealing with charges at
rest i.e. electrostatics.
(f) Properties of Charge
(b) Structure of Atom : (I) Charge is a scalar quantity : It adds algebrically
An atom consists of two parts (i) nucleus (ii) extra and represents excess, or deficiency of electrons.
nuclear part. Nucleus consists of neutrons and (II) Charge is transferable : Charging a body implies
protons and extra nuclear part has electrons transfer of charge (electrons) from one body to
revolving around nucleus. another. Positively charged body means loss of
In a neutral atom. electrons, i.e. deficiency of electrons. Negatively
number of electrons = number of protons. charged body means excess of electrons. This also
charge of electrons = charge of protons shows that mass of a negatively charged
= 1.602 × 10–19 coulomb. body > mass of a positively charged identical body.
Normally positive charges are positron, proton and (III) Charge is conserved : In an isolated system, total
positive ions. In nature practically free existing charge (sum of positive and negative) remains
positive charge are positive ions and negative constant whatever change takes place in that system.
charges are electrons. (IV) Charge is quantized : Charge on any body always
exists in integral multiples of a fundamental unit of
(c) Electric Charge
electric charge. This unit is equal to the magnitude
Charge of a material body or particle is the property
of charge on electron (1e = 1.6 × 10–19 coulomb). So
(acquired or natural) due to which it produces and
charge on anybody Q = ± ne, where n is an integer
experiences electrical and magnetic effects. Some
and e is the charge of the electron. Millikan's oil drop
of naturally charged particles are electron, proton,
experiment proved the quantization of charge or
-particle etc.
atomicity of charge.

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
1.2 Theory and Exercise Book

(i) Charging of Conductors :

Conductors can be charged by
2
• Recently, the existence of particles of charge ± e (a) Rubbing or frictional electricity
3
(b) Conduction & Induction (will be studied in later
2 sections)
and ± e has been postulated. These particles are
3 (c) Thermionic emission (will be study the topic
"heat")
called quarks but still this is not considered as the
(d) Photo electric emission (will be studied under
quantum of charge because these are unstable
the topic modern physics)
(They have very short span of life.)
(v) Like point charges repel each other while unlike (ii) Charging of Insulators :
point charges attract each other. Since charge cannot flow through insulators, neither
(vi) Charge is always associated with mass, i.e., conduction nor induction can be used to charge,
charge can not exist without mass though mass can insultators, so in order to charge an insulator friction
is used. Whenever an insulator is rubbed against a
exist without charge. The particle such as photon
body exchange of electrons takes place between the
or neutrino which have no (rest) mass can never
two. This results in apperance of equal and opposite
have a charge.
charges on the insulator and the other body. Thus
(vii) Charge is relativistically invariant : This means
the insulator is charged. For example rubbing of
that charge is independent of frame of reference,
plastic with fur, silk with glass causes charging of
i.e., charge on a body does not change whatever these things.
be its speed. This property is worth mentioning as
To charge the bodies through friction one of them
in contrast to charge, the mass of a body depends
has to be an insultator.
on its speed and increases with increase in speed.
(viii) A charge at rest produces only electric field
around itself; a charge having uniform motion 2. COULOMB'S LAW :
produces electric as well as magnetic field around Coulomb, through his experiments found out that
itself while a charge having accelerated motion the two charges 'q1' and 'q2' kept at distance 'r' in a
emits electromagnetic radiation. medium as shown in figure-1 exert a force 'F' on
(g) Conductors and Insulators : each other. The value of force F is given by
Any object can be broadly classified in either of the Kq1q 2
F
following two categories : r2
(i) Conductors
F r F
(ii) Insulators
(i) Conductors : These are the materials that allow +q 1 +q2
flow of charge through them. This category generally This law gives the net force experienced by q1 and
comprises of metals but may sometimes contain non- q2 taking in account the medium surrounding them.
metals too. (ex. Carbon in form of graphite.) Where F gives the magnitude of electrostatic force q1
(ii) Insulators : These are the materials which do not and q2 are the magnitudes of the two interacting charges.
allow movement of charge through them. K is electrostatic constant which depends upon the
medium surrounding the two charges.
(h) Charging of Bodies :
This force F acts along the line joining the two
An object can be charged by addition or removed
charges and is repulsive if q1 and q2 are of same
of electrons from it. In general an object can either
sign and is attractive if they are of opposite sign.
be a conductor or insulator. Thus we are going to
Let us take some examples on application of
discuss the charging of a conductor and charging
coulomb's Law.
of an insultor in brife.

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
 Electrostatics-1 1.3

EXAMPLE 1 kq1q 2
Charge 5.0 × 10–7 C, –2.5 × 10–7C and 1.0 × 10–7 Sol. a
mx 2
C are fixed at the corners A, B and C of an equilateral
triangle of side 5.0 cm. Find the electric force on v r
kq1q 2 2 dx
the charge at C due to the rest two. 
0
vdv 
m r x2 
1
9 –7 –7
9  10  5  10  1  10
FAC 
(.05) 2
v 2 kq1q 2 1 1 
= 0.18 Nt     
FAC 2 m  r1 r2 

2kq1q 2 1 1 
q3 = 1.0 × 10–7C  v   
C m  r1 r2 
FBC
a = 5 cm EXAMPLE 3
a
Ten charged particles are kept fixed on the X axis at
point x = 10 mm, 20 mm, 30 mm, .......... 100 mm.
A a B The first particle has a charge 10–8 C, the second
q1 = 5 × 10–7C q2 = –2.5 × 10–7C
8 × 10–8 C, the third 27 × 10–8C and so on. The tenth
9  109  –2.5  10 –7  1  10 –7 particle has a charge 1000 × 10 –8 C. Find the
FBC =
(.05)2 magnitude of electric force acting on a 1 C charge
placed at the origin.
= – .09 Nt
Net force on C is
  
F Net  F AC  F BC
q1 q2 q3 q4
 1C
F Net  (FAC )2  (F BC )2  2(FAC )(F BC ) cos 

[ = 120°]
= 0.15588 Nt

Kq1  1
EXAMPLE 2 Sol. Force of 1C charge =
(10  10 –3 ) 2
If charge q1 is fixed and q2 is free to move then find
out the velocity of q2 when it reaches distance r2
Kq 2  1 Kq 3  1
after it is release from a distance of r1 from q1 as + +  .......
(20  10 –3 ) 2 (30  10 –3 )2
shown in figure (Assume friction is absent).

K  10 –8  13 23 33 103 
=     ...... 
q2 10 –4 12 22 32 102 
q1
= 9 × 109 × 10–4 × 55 = 4.95 × 107 Nt
fixed r1
[This example explains that the concept of
r2 superposition holds in the case of electric forces.
Net electric force at the origin is equal to sum of
Find v of q2 when it reaches distance r2 after it is
the individual electric forces on the 1 C charge]
released from rest.

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
1.4 Theory and Exercise Book

EXAMPLE 4 EXAMPLE 5
A block 'A' of charge q1 is fixed and second block Given a cube with point charges q on each of its
of mass m and charge q2 is allowed to free on the vertices. Calculate the force exerted on any of the
floor findout the range of q2 for which the particle charges due to rest of the 7 charges.
Sol. The net force on particle A can be given by vector
is at rest.
sum of force experienced by this particle due to all
the other charges on vertices of the cube.
A,q1 m,q2 For this we use vector form of coulomb's law
fixed   
 Kq1q2
F  3
( r1 – r2 )
 
r r1 – r2

Sol. Maximum friction =  mg

From the figure the different forces acting on A are
kq q given as
mg  12 2
r
 ˆ
Kq 2 (–ak)
F A1  3
mgr 2 a
 q2 
kq1
 Kq 2 (–ajˆ – ak)
ˆ
FA 2  3
( 2a)
mgr 2 mgr 2
– q
kq1 kq1  Kq 2 (–aiˆ – ajˆ – ak)
ˆ
FA 3  3
( 3a)
2.1 Vector forms of Coloumb’s law Z

(a, 0, a) 1
4
(a, a, a) 2 (0, a, a)
3

5 A
(0,0,0)
X (a, 0, 0)

(F21 : force on q2 due to q1) 6 (0, a, 0)

7
(a, a, 0)
Y
 kq q kq q 
F21  12 2 rˆ  13 2 r
r r
 Kq 2 (–aiˆ – ak)
ˆ  ˆ
Kq 2 (–ai)
FA 4  3 , F A 5
 3
 kq q   ( 2a) a
F21   1  2 3  r2  r1 
 r2  r1   Kq 2 (–aiˆ – aj)
ˆ
FA 6 
Head of r points at that position where force has ( 2a) 3

to be calculated.
    ˆ
Kq 2 (–aj)
r2 & r1 depend on origin but r does not. FA 7  3
a
q1 and q2 should be put along with sign.

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
 Electrostatics-1 1.5

The net force experienced by A can be given as r

        x
Fnet  FA1  FA2  FA3  FA4  FA5  FA6  FA7 A B C
Q q Q

–Kq 3  1 1  ˆ  Qq Qq
=    1 (iˆ  ˆj  k)  k.  k.
a  3 3 2 or x2 = (r – x)2
  x2 (r  x)2

r
EXAMPLE 6 or x = r – x or x
2
Two particles, each having a mass of 5 gm and
Since the charge at A is repelled by the similar charge
charge 1.0 × 10–7C, stay in limiting equilirbium on a
at C, so it will be in equilibrium if it is attracted by
horizontal table with a separation of 10 cm between
the charge q at B, i.e., the sign of charge q should
them. The coefficient of friction between each
be opposite to that of charge Q.
particle and the table is the same. Find the value of
 Force of repulsion between charges at A and C
this coefficient.
= Force of attraction between charges at A and B
q = 10–7 c q = 10–7 Q.q Q.Q
k k 2 Q
or q 
(r / 2)2 r 4
FC 5 gm 5 gm Fc
f f

A 10cm B EXAMPLE 8
Two point charges +4e and +e are fixed a distance
Sol. Consider particle A. Forces acting on A are
‘a’ apart. Where should a third point charge q be
coulombic force and frictional force under limiting
placed on the line joining the two charges so that it
condition friction will be limiting and will be equal to
may be in equilibrium ? In which case the equilibrium
coulombic force.
will be stable and in which unstable.
Kq 2 9  109  (10 –7 )2 Sol. Suppose the three charges are placed as shown in fig.
FC = =  9  10 –3 N
r2 (10  10 –2 ) 2 Let the charge q be positive.
+4e +q +e
f =  N = mg = (5 × 10–3 × 10) =  (5 × 10–2 N)
F2 F1
For equilibrium,
x a–x
we have Fc = f
9 × 10–3 =  (5 × 10–2) For the equilibrium of charge +q, we must have
Force of repulsion F1 between + 4e and +q = Force
9  10–3 of repulsion F2 between + e and +q
   0.18
5  10–2
1 4e  q 1 eq
or 
EXAMPLE 7 40 x 2 40 (a  x) 2
Two identical charge, Q each, are kept at a distance
or 4(a – x)2 = x2
r from each other. A third charge q is placed on the
or 2(a – x) = ± x
line joining the above two charges such that all the
three charges are in equilibrium. What is the 2a
 x or 2a.
magnitude, sign and position of the charge q ? 3
Sol. Suppose the three charges be placed in the manner, As the charge q is placed between +4e and +e, so
as shown in fig. only x = 2a/3 is possible. Hence for equilibrium, the
The charge q will be in equilibrium if the forces charge q must be placed at a distance 2a/3 from
exerted on it by the the charge +4e.
charges at A and C are equal and opposite. We have considered the charge q to be positive.

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
1.6 Theory and Exercise Book

If we displace it slightly towards charge e, from the EXAMPLE 10

equilibrium position, then F1 will decrease and F2 A charge Q is to be divided in to two smalll objects.
will increase and a net force (F2 – F1) will act on q What should be the value of the charge on the
towards left i.e., towards the equilibrium position. objects so that the force between the objects will
Hence the equilibrium of position q is stable. Now be maximum.
if we take charge q to be negative, the force F1 and Sol. Let one body have charge q and other hence Q – q
F2 will be attractive, as shown in fig.
–q
Kq(Q – q)
+4e +e Here force between the charges F =
F1 F2 r2
x a–x
dF
The charge –q will still be in equilibrium at x = 2a/3. For F to be maximum 0
dq
However, if we displace charge – q slightly towards
right, then F1 will decrease and F2 will increase. A q Q–q
net force (F2 – F1) will act on –q towards right i.e.,
away from the equilibrium position. So the r
equilibrium of the negative q will be unstable.

EXAMPLE 9 d  KqQ Kq 2 
 – 2 0
Two ‘free’ point charges +4e and +e are placed a dq  r 2 r 
distance ‘a’ apart. Where should a third point charge
KQ 2Kq Q
–q be placed between them such that the entire system – 2 0  q =
may be in equilirbium ? What should be the magnitude r2 r 2
and sign of q ? What type of a equilibrium will it be ? Thus we have to divide charges equally on the objects.
Sol. Suppose the charges are placed as shown in fig.
As the charge +e exerts repulsive force F on charge EXAMPLE 11
+4e, so for the equilibrium of charge + 4e, the Two identical positive point charges Q each are fixed
charge –q must exert attraction F on +4e. This apart at a distance 2a. A point charge q lies mid
requires the charge q to be negative. way between the fixed charges. Show that
For equilibrium of charge +4e, (i) For small displacement (relative to a) along line
F = F joining the fixed charges, the charge q executes
1 4e  e 1 4e  q SHM if it is +ve and
 . (ii) For small lateral displacement, it executes SHM
40 a 2 40 x 2
if it is –ve. Compare the frequencies of oscillation
+4e –q +e in the two cases.
F F' F1 F2 Sol. The two situations are shown in figure
x a–x (i) Let x be the displacement of the charge +q from
a
the mean position. Now net force acting on the charge
q toward its equilirbium position is
ex 2
or q KQq KQq
a2 F –
(a – x)2 (a  x)2
For equilibrium of charge –q,
F1 between +4e and –q
+Q q +q +Q
F2 between + e and – q x
(i)
1 4e  e 1 eq a

40 x 2 4  0 (a  x)2 –q
or x2 = 4(a – x)2  x = 2a/3 +Q x +Q
2 2
ex e 4a 4e
Hence q   2.  a (ii)
a2 a 9 9

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
 Electrostatics-1 1.7

Sol.
4KQqax 4KQqax
= (a 2 – x 2 )2  [As x < < a]
a4 +q –Q +2q
4KQqx
 A C
a3 B
x
F 4KQqx
Restoring acceleration, a = =– d
m ma 3
[– ve sign shows restoring tendency] For the charges to be in equilibrium forces should
a = –2x [where m is the mass of the charge] be balanced on A as well as on B.
As acceleration is directly proportional to displacement, Balancing forces on A
hence the motion is SHM. Its time period T1 is given by
Kq(2q)
2 FAB =
T1 = d2


 ma 3  0 ma 3 +q
FAB
T1 = 2    2 ...(1) FAC
 4QqK  qQ
A
(ii) Restoring force on –q toward Q is given by
KqQ
2KQq x FAC =
x2
F = (a 2  x 2 ) .
(a  x 2 )
2
2q Q
or 
2KQq 2KQqx d2 x 2
= (a 2  x 2 )3/ 2  a 3 [As x << a]
2qx 2
or Q ...(1)
F 2KQq d2
Restoring acceleration a = =– x
m ma 3 Balancing force on B
a = – 2x 2Kq(Q)
Hence the motion is SHM. Its time period T2 is FBC =
(d – x)2
given by
2
T2 = +2q
 F BC
FAB
B
 ma 3  20 ma 3
T2 = 2   = 2 ...(2)
 2QqK  qQ 2Kq(Q) Kq(2q)

or
(d – x) 2 d2
n1 T2
Now, n  T  2 (Q) q
2 1
or 2
 2
(d – x) d

EXAMPLE 12 Solving equation (1) and (2) we get

Two particles A and B having charges q and 2 q 2qx 2 q
respectively are placed on a smooth table with a  2 (d – x) 2
d2 d
separation d. A third particle C is to be clamped on
the table in such a way that the particles A and B or 2x2 = (d – x)2
remain at rest on the table under electrical forces. or 2x2 = d2 + x2 – 2xd
What should be the charge on C and where should or x2 + 2xd – d2 = 0
it be clamped ? or x = ( 2 – 1) d or – d (1 + 2)

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
 1.8 Theory and Exercise Book

The negative value implies that the particle C will

T
lie toward left of A at a distance ( 2 – 1) d from A 
(as x was measured from A)
kq2
For the position x = x1 = ( 2 – 1) d. r2

Q = Q1 = – q(6 – 2)
and for x = x2 = – d ( 2 + 1)
mg
Q = Q2 = – q (6 + 4 2 ) Here for equilibrium of each bob. we have
Thus be two possibilities are shown in figure
Q1 kq 2
T sin  = ...(1)
r2

T cos  = mg ...(2)
A C B
x
kq 2
d or tan  =
r 2 mg
Q1 Q2

or
A B 1 K(2  10 –8 ) 2
or 
or (20)2 – 12 (3  10 –2 )2 m  10
C B x2 b

or m = 7.96 gm
EXAMPLE 13 From equation (2)
Two identical pitch balls are charged by rubbing
against each other. They are suspended from a mg 7.96  10 –3  10  20
horizontal rod through two strings of length 20 cm T= =
cos  (20)2 – 1
each. The separation between the suspension points
being 5 cm. In equilibrium the separation between = 7.72 × 10–2 N
the balls is 3 cm. Find the mass of each ball and the
tension in the string. The charge on each ball has
EXAMPLE 14
magnitude 2 × 10–8 C.
Sol. As the balls are rubbed against each other they will A particle A having a charge q = 5 × 10–7 C is fixed
acquire equal and opposite charges. The FBD of on a vertical wall. A second particle B of mass 100 g
left ball is shown in figure which shows all the forces and having equal charge is suspended by a silk thread
acting on ball in equilibrium position. of length 30 cm from the wall. The point of suspension
5cm is 30 cm above the particle A. Find the angle of thread
with vertical when it stays in equilibrium.
Sol. The situation shown in figure

Here the forces acting on bob B can be shown as
20cm
FBD of B is
Using Lami's theorem, we get

3cm mg F
q = –2 × 10–8C q = 2 × 10–8C 
    sin( – )
sin   
 2 2

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
 Electrostatics-1 1.9


r 
30 0 = relative permittivity of medium with respect
 cm
to free space, also termed as dielectric constant.
30cm

T Kq 2 For free space r = 1

/ 2  / 2

F
( AB) 2
B 1 N – m2
and K  = 9 × 109
r  40 coul2
A
q = 5 × 10–7 C
mg (ii) Force dependency on Medium
We can say that when two charges are placed in
mg Kq 2 vacuum (or air) the force experienced by the

or   charges can be given as
cos 2  0.30  sin  sin 
2 2
1 q1q 2
Fair 
40 r 2
mg Kq 2

or     When these charges are submerged in a medium,
cos 0.60sin  2sin cos
2 2 2 2 having dielectric constant r, the force becomes

1 q1q 2
 Kq 2 Fmed = 4  2
0 r r
2
or sin 
2 2mg(0.60)
Fair
or Fmed = 
r
T  
 as r > 1
2 2 F
 Fmed < Fair
 B

EXAMPLE 15
Two identically charged spheres are suspended by strings
mg
of equal length. The strings make an angle of 30° with
each other. When suspended in a liquid of density
On solving we get  = 17° 0.8 gm/cc the angle remains same. What is the dielectric
constant of liquid. Density of sphere = 1.6 gm/cc
2.2 Coloumb's law in a medium :
(i) Relative Permittivity
When two charges are placed in vacuum or when
the same set of charges are placed in a medium,
the net force experienced by the charges will be 30°
different. The effect of presence of medium is 15°
accounted in the proportionality constant K. This
electrostatic constant K is defined as

1
K= where  = 0 r
4
Sol. When set up shown in figure is in air, we have
where  = absolute permittivity of medium
0 = permittivity of free space. having a constant F
tan 15° = mg
value = 8.85 × 10–12 coul2/N-m2

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
1.10 Theory and Exercise Book

When set up is immersed in the medium as shown a  a 

in figure, the electric force experienced by the ball kq ' .dx  1
force F  dF 
   kq  – 
a
x2  x a
F
will reduce and will be equal to and the effective
r 1 1 
= kq    
a a  
  
gravitational force will become mg 1 –  
 s  Note

30°
Section B - Electric field, Questions on
constant electric field, Electric
field due to uniformly charged
F Rod, Time period of SHM +
r Electrostatics, Electric field due
   to uniformly charged Ring, disc,
mgeff  mg1– e  sheet
 s 
3. ELECTRIC FIELD :
Thus we have tan 15° The figure shown a charge q is lying in free space.

F
= F F
   q q'
mgr 1 – 
 s 
Now a charge q is brought near it.
By columb's law we know that the charge q experiences
1 a force and it exerts an equal force on q.
r  2
 How does q become aware of the presence of q ???
1– 
s (We don't expect q to have sensory organs just as
we have)
EXAMPLE 16
The answer is electric field !!!
Find the total force on charge q due to a charge rod
Electric field is the space surrounding an electric
having linear charge density  C/m placed as shown
charge q in which another charge q experiences a
in figure.
(electrostatic) force of attraction, or repulsion.

c / m
q q
++++++++

l a
Electric field for a positive charge

c / m dx  dq
q kq.dx
dF  –q
dx x2
Sol.
l a
x Electric field for a negative charge

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
 Electrostatics-1 1.11

The direction of electric field is radially outwards for 

E
a positive charge and is radially inwards for a negative
charge as shown in the figure above. There are some p

x
points always to be kept in mind. These are
(1) Electric field can be defined as a space surrounding
a charge in which another static charge experiences q
a force on it.  Kq
(2) In a region electric field is said to exist if an electric E  2 .xˆ
x
force is exerted on a static charge placed at that point.
(3) It is important to note that with every charge particle,  Kq 
there is an electric field associated which extends or E  3 .x ...(3)
x
up to infinity.
(4) No charged particle experiences force due to its It should be noted that the expression in equation (2)
own electric field. and (3) are only valid for point charges. We can not
find electric field strength due to charged extended
F
Ep = N/c bodies by concentrating their whole charge at
q0
geometric centre and using the result of a point charge.
A very small positive charge which does not produce
its significant electric field is called a test charge.
Thus electric field strength at point can be defined EXAMPLE 17

generally as "Electric field strength at only point in Four particles each having a charge q are placed
space to be the electrostatic force per unit charge on the four vertices of a regular pentagon. The
on a test charge." distance of each corner from the centre is 'a'. Find
If a charge q0 placed at a point in electric field, the electric field at the centre of pentagon.

experiences a net force F on it, then electric field Sol. We can calculate the electric field at centre by the
strength at that point can be superposition method i.e., by adding vectorially the
 electric field due to all the 4 charges at centre which
 F
or E ....(1) will come out to be :
q0

[q0  test charge]      Kq

F centre  F 1  F 2  F 3  F 4  2
(a) Electric Field Strength due to Point Charge : a
q
As discussed earlier, if we find electric field due to
a point charge at a distance x from it. Its magnitude

can be given as  F net
q  F2
F1
Kq 
E ...(2)
x2 F3
a 
(b) Vector Form of Electric field due to a Point F4
Charge :
q q
As shown in figure, the direction of electric field

strength at point P is along the direction of x . Thus In the direction of the vector with no charge as shown

the value of E can be written as in figure shown.

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
1.12 Theory and Exercise Book

Alternate : Sol. The situation is shown in figure (a)

Consider pentagon with charges on all vector. P

Now, E.F. at centre must be zero due to symmetry

l
q B C

Q Q

q q a
A
D
a a
Q Q
(a)
q q
(a) F cos θ
F


P F sin 

q – F net 

 a2
2

F net h2
h

A O
a/ 2
(b)
(b)
Thus E.F. due to 4 charge + E. F. due to 1 charge = 0 Force experienced by unit positive charge placed
or E.F. due to 4 charges = – E.F. due to 1 charge at P due to a charge Q at A is given by
Where – sign denotes that both the forces are in K(Q  1)
F
opposite direction.  2 a2 
h  
 2
Thus E.F. dut to 4 charges = – E.F. due to 1 charge
Similarly, equal forces act on unit positive charge at
Kq P due to charge at B, C and D. When these forces
=
a2 are resolved in horizontal and vertical directions,
the horizontal component (F sin ) cancel each other
[Another good example of superposition theorem] and the net vertical force is 4F cos .

4 KQ
Thus net upward force  .cos 
EXAMPLE 18  2 a2 
h  
Four equal positive charges each of value Q are  2 
arranged at the four corners of a square of side a. A For the equilibrium of unit positive charge at P,
unit positive charge mass m is placed at P, at a height Upward force = Weight of unit charge
h above the centre of the square. What should be the 4 KQ
.cos   mg
value of Q in order that this unit charge is in equilibrium.  2 a2 
h  
 2 

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
 Electrostatics-1 1.13

From figure (b) As the electric intensity E is acting in the vertical

direction the horizontal velocity v of the particle
 h  remains same. if y is the displacement of the particle,
cos    
2 2 in upward direction, we have
 (h  a / 2) 
1 2
y= at
2
4K Qh
3/ 2
 mg Here, y = 0.1 cm = 10–3 m, a = 1.77 × 1015 m/sec2
or  2 a2 
h   1
 2 
Thus, 10–3 = × (1.77 × 10–15) (t2)
2
3/ 2 Solving we get t = 1.063 × 10–10 second
mg  2 a 2  component of velocity in the direction of field is
or Q h  
4kh  2 given by
vy = at
= (1.77 × 1015) (1.063 × 10–10)
EXAMPLE 19 = 1.881 × 104 m/s.
A particle of mass 9 × 10–31 kg and a negative
charge of 1.6 × 10–19 coulomb projected horizontally EXAMPLE 20
with a veloicty of 105 m/s into a region between A particle having a charge of 1.6 × 10–19 C enters
two infinite horizontal parallel plates of metal. The midway between the plates of a parallel plate
distance between the plates is 0.3 cm and the condenser. The initial velocity of particle is parallel
particle enter 0.1 cm below the top plate. The top to the plates. A potential difference of 300 volts is
and bottom plates are connected respectively to the applied to the capacitor plates. If the length of the
positive and negative terminals of a 30 volt battery. capacitor plates is 10 cm and they are separated by
Find the component of the velocity of the particle 2cm. Calculate the greatest intial velocity for which
just before it hits one on the plates. the particle will not be able to come out of the plates.
Sol. We known that between two parallel plates electric The mass of the particle is 12 × 10–24 kg.
field can be given as Sol. The situation is shown in figure.
Here we know the electric field can be given as
V
E= V 300
d E =  15000 v / m
d 2 /100
Here V = 30 volt and d = 0.3 cm = 3 × 10–3 m
As the particle does not come out, its maximum
30
Thus we have E = = 104 N/C
3  10 –3 10cm
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+

Force on the particle of negative charge moving

between the plates 
m u 
F = e × E = 1.6 × 10– 19 × 104 = 1.6 × 10–15 newton q E
y=1cm
The direction of force will be towards the positive
plate i.e., upward.
Now acceleration of the particle is
deflection in vertical direction can be
eE
a= y = 1 cm = 10–2 m
m
2
or a = (1.6 × 10–15 ) / (9 × 10–31) 1 2 1 qE  l 
we known that y = at = .  
or a = 1.77 × 1015 m/sec2 2 2 m u

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
1.14 Theory and Exercise Book

qE  EXAMPLE 22
[As a = and t = ]
m u A block of mass m containing a net positive charge q
is placed on a smooth horizontal table which terminates
1 qE 2
or u2  . .x in a vertical wall as shown in figure. The distance of
2 my
the block from the wall is d. A horizontal electric field
2 'E' towards right is switched on. Assuming elastic
1 (1.6  10 –19 )(15000)  1  8
=    10 collision (if any) find the time period of resulting
2 (12  10 –24 )(10 –2 )  10 
oscillatory motion. Is it a simple harmonic motion.
u = 104 m/s
qE
Sol. Here acceleration of block is a =
EXAMPLE 21 m
A uniform electric field E is created between two Time taken by block to reach wall
parallel charged plates as shown in figure shown.
1  qE  2
An electron enter the field symmetrically between d= t
2  m 
the plates with a speed u. The length of each plate
is , find the angle of deviation of the path of the
electron as it comes out of the field. 2dm
t= qE
Sol. The situation is shown in figure. Here we know in
X-direction speed of electron remains uniform
In X direction
uX = u d
In Y direction vy initial = 0
Acceleration in y-direction of electron is
E

+ + + + + + + + +
 m
E

Velocity at the time of impact is

u
2qEd
– – – – – – – – – v= 2ad or v=
m
y When the block will rebound time taken by block in
coming to rest.

2qEd  qE 
0 – t
x
m  m

eE
a= 2qEd
m
m  2md
vyfifnal  uyint ial  at t= qE qE
m
 eE   
vy =   
 m  u  Thus time period of oscillation of block is

vy eE 2md
tan  =  u T = 2t = 2 qE
vx mu

 eE  Since the restoring force is independent of x, the

  tan –1  2  displacement from mean position, this is not a simple
 mu 
harmonic motion

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
 Electrostatics-1 1.15

EXAMPLE 23 but for umin T = 0

Find out the time period of oscillation when the bob is v mv2/R
slightly shift through an angle  from it mean position.

mg+qE
E

m,q
E u
m,q
mv 2
 mg + qE =
R
using energy conservation
wmg + wT + wE.f = k

 1 1
– mg.2R + 0 – qE. 2R = mv2 – mu2
T 2 2

Sol. qE – 4 R (mg + qE) = R (mg + qE) – mu2


 qE 
mg u  5 g  R
 m

geff = TM.D.  (mg) 2  (qE)2 3.1 Graph of electric field due to binary
m charge configuration

2
 qE  E E
 g2   
m

1. q
l q
 T  2
g eff

EXAMPLE 24
Find umin so that particle will complete vertical circle

2. –q
4q

u
m,q

Sol. Applying force balance

3. –q –q
mv 2
T + mg + qE =
R

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
1.16 Theory and Exercise Book

Kdq
or dE x  sin 
(x 2  r 2 )

KQsin 
= dx
4. q –4q L(x 2  r 2 )
Here we have x = r tan 
and dx = r sec2 d

3.2 Electric field Strength at a General Point KQ r sec2 d

Thus we have dE x  sin 
due to a Uniformly Charged Rod : L r 2 sec 2 
As shown in figure, if P is any general point in the
KQ
surrounding of rod, to find electric field strength at Strength = sin d
Lr
P, again we consider an element on rod of length dx
Net electric field strength due to dq at point P in
at a distance x from point O as shown in figure.
x-direction is

P KQ 1
1  2

E x  dE x 
Lr – sin d
2

r
KQ
or Ex   – cos  1
– 2
Lr
O
L KQ
or Ex  cos 2 – cos 1 
Lr
Now if dE be the electric field at P due to the Similarly, electric field strength at point P due to dq
element, then it can be given as in y-direction is
dEy = dE cos 
Kdq
dE 
(x 2  r 2 ) KQdx
or dEy =  cos 
L(r 2  x 2 )
Q Again we have x = r tan 
Here dq = dx
L and dx = r sec2  d
Now we resolve electric field in components. KQ r sec2 
Electric field strength in x-direction due to dq at P is Thus we have dEy = cos   2 d
L r sec2 
dEcos 
dE
KQ
= cos d
Lr

Net electric field strength at P due to dq in
dEsin y-direction is
 
KQ 1
Ey =  dE y 
Lr – cos d
r 2

KQ
or Ey =   sin  1
– 2
Lr
dx
x KQ
dEx = dE sin 
or Ey = sin 1  sin 2 
Lr

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
 Electrostatics-1 1.17

Thus electric field at a general point in the     

Enet  Edue to 1  E due to 2  E due to 3  E due to 4
surrounding of a uniformly charged rod which
subtend angles 1 and 2 at the two corners of rod
 2 2K 4 2K  ˆ  6 2K 8 2K  ˆ
can be given as =  –  i    j
       
in ||-direction Ex

KQ –2 2K ˆ 14 2K ˆ
= L r (cos 2 – cos 1 ) = i j
 

k
= (cos 2 – cos 1 )
r EXAMPLE 26

in  -direction Ey Given an equilateral triangle with side . Find E at

the centroid. The linear charge density is as shown
KQ in figure.
= L r (sin 1  sin 2 ) A

k l l
= (sin 1  sin 2 )  *
r
C
r is the perpendicular distance of the point from the wire
–
1 and 2 should be taken in opposite sense B C
l

EXAMPLE 25 Sol. The electric field strength due to the three rods AB,
In the given arrangement of a charged square BC and CA are as shown in figure
frame find field at centre. The linear charged density  –2K
is as shown in figure E AC  (2sin 30)(cos ˆi  sin ˆj)
/ 3
2K
Sol. E.F. due to 1 = (sin 45  sin 45)iˆ  2K
 E AB  (2sin 30)(cos ˆi – sin ˆj)
/ 3
2 2K
= î  2K
 E BC  (2sin 30)ˆj
/ 3
4 2K y
E.F. due to 2 = – î

A
6 2K ˆ
E.F. due to 3 = j

–3  
3
x
C 30°
  1 2 2

B C
4 –
4    
Enet  E AC  EAB  E BC
8 2K ˆ 
E.F. due to 4 = j – ˆ
 E net  j
20 

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
1.18 Theory and Exercise Book

3.3 Electric field due to infinite wire (l >> r) EXAMPLE 27

Here we have to find the electric field at point p
Consider the system shown below. If the charge is
due to the given infinite wire. Using the formula
slightly displaced perpendicular to the wire from its
learnt in above section which
equilibrium position then find out the time period of SHM.
k
E||   cos 2  cos 1 
r P
q,m
k d
E   sin 2  sin 1 
r


Sol : At equilbrium position weight of the particle is

balanced by the electric force
 P
r  mg  qE

2k
Wire mg  q ....(1)
d
Now if the particle is slightly displaced by a distance
 x (where x << d) net force on the body,
For above case, 1   2 
2
2 k q
Fnet   mg
k 2k dx
 Enet at P  (1  1) 
r r from (1)

3.4 Electric field due to semi infinite wire 2 kq 2 kq  2 kq x
Fnet  
For this case dx d d (d  x)

  2 kqx
1  , 2  0º Fnet 
2 As x << d
d2
k k
 Er  ; E| |   2kqx
r r  a
md 2

for SHM
a = –  2x

2 kq
 2 
md 2
r P
E1
Wire
2 kq
 
Enet md 2
E11

2 k 2 md 2
Enet at P  s T  2
r  2kq

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
 Electrostatics-1 1.19

3.5 Electric field du e to Uniformly The component of this field strength dE sin  which
Charged Ring : is normal to the axis of ring will be cancelled out
Case - I : At its Centre due to the ring section opposite to dl. The component
of electric field strength along the the axis of ring
Here by symmetry we can say that electric field
dE cos due to all the sections will be added up.
strength at centre due to every small segment on
Hence total electric field strength at point P due to
ring is cancelled by the electric field at centre due
the ring is
to the segment exactly opposite to it. As shown in
figure. The electric field strength at centre due to 
Ep  dE cos 
segment AB is cancelled by that due to segment
2 R
CD. This net electric field strength at the centre of Kdq x
=  2 2
(R  x )

R  x2
2
a uniformly charged ring is zero 0

2 R
KQx
B or Ep   d
A + + + + + + 0
2 R(R 2  x 2 )3/ 2
+ +
+
+
+

+
+ + + +

2 R
+ +

KQx
C = 2R(R 2  x 2 ) 3/ 2  d
+ + +

R
0
+ +

+
+

+ +
+ +
+ + + + +
D
C
2kq
3 3R2

Case II : At a Point on the Axis of Ring

For this look at the figure. There we'll find the electric R
–
2
field strength at point P due to the ring which is
R
situated at a distance x from the ring centre. For
2
this we consider a small section of length dl on ring
as shown. The charge on this elemental section is
2KQ
–
Q 3 3 R2
dq = d [Q = total charge of ring]
2R

dl
+ ++
+ KQx
[2 R]
+

=
+

2R(R 2  x 2 )3/ 2
+

+ +
+ + + + +

+ + + + +

 P
dEcos KQx

EP =
(R  x 2 )3 / 2
2
+ +

dE
dEsin
+
+

+
+

+
+ +
Q EXAMPLE 28
Due to the element dq, electric field strength dE at A thin wire ring of radius r carries a charge q. Find the
point P can be given as magnitude of the electric field strength on the axis of
the ring as function of distance l from centre. Investigate
Kdq the obtained function at l >> r. Find the maximum
dE 
(R 2  x 2 ) strength magnitude and the corresponding distance .

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
1.20 Theory and Exercise Book

Sol. See figure (Modify for maximum E) Sol. Let us first find the force on a – q charge placed at
We know due to ring electric field strength at a a distance x from centre of ring along its axis.
distance  from its centre on its axis can be given Figure shows the respective situation.
as +Q+
+

+
(r 2 
 2)

+ +
+ + + + +
R
r

+ + + + +
F P
P E
x –q
O


+ +

+
+
+ +

Kq In this case force on particle P is

E ....(1)
(  r 2 )3/ 2
2
KQx
FP = – qE = – q.
(x  R 2 )3 / 2
2

1 q
For  > > r, we have E 
40 2 For small x, x << R, we can neglect x, compared to
R, we have
Thus the ring behaves like a point charge.
KqQx
dE F –
For Emax  O . From equation we get R3
d
KqQ
Acceleration of particle is a– x
 2 3  mR 3
(r   2 )3 / 2 .1 – (r 2  2 )1/ 2  2 
dE q  2
   0 [Here we have x = 1 cm and R = 1 m hence x << R
d 4 0  (r 2  2 )3  can be used]
 
This shows that particle P excutes SHM, now
comparing this acceleration with a = –2x
3 
or (r2 + 2)3/2 = (r   2 )1/ 2  2 2
2 KqQ
We get  
mR 3
r
Solving we get,  = ....(2) Thus time period of SHM is T
2
Substituting the value of  in equation (1) we get mR 3
2
 2 0.9  10 –3  (1)3
=  2
kq(r / 2 ) 2kq  KqQ 9  109  10 –5  10 –6
E =
(r 2  r 2 / 2)3/ 2 3 3 r2

= seconds
5
EXAMPLE 29
EXAMPLE 30
A thin fixed ring of radius 1 meter has a positive
A system consists of a thin charged wire ring of
charge 1 × 10–5 coulomb uniformly distributed over
radius R and a very long uniformly charged thread
it. a particle of mass 0.9 gm and having a negative
oriented along the axis of the ring with one of its
charge of 1 × 10–6 coulomb is placed on the axis at
ends coinciding with the centre of the ring. The total
distance of 1 cm from the centre of the ring. Shown
charge of the ring is equal to q. The charge of the
that the motion of the negatively charged particle
thread (per unit length) is equal to . Find the
as approximately simple harmonic. Calculate the
interaction force between the ring and the thread.
time period of oscillations.

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
 Electrostatics-1 1.21


Sol. Force df on the wire = dq E 2Kq sin  / 2 2Kq
E= = [Here  = ]
Kqx R 2 R 2
= 2 .dx
(x  R 2 )3 / 2

++

xdx + +
+
F = Kq  2
 x 2 )3/ 2

+
0
(R

+
d


+ + +
q  E
F = 4  R O X

+ +
0

dE

+
+

+
+ +
+  coul / m
+ + +
+
+ dx
+
+ dq  dx
x + q
` =
+ 2 0 R 2
2

+
q + R Substituting the value, we get

7  10 –10

Alternate : 2  (3.14)  (8.85  10 –12 )  (0.2) 2
2

Due to wire electric field on the points of ring in = 100 V/m

y-direction is

K 3.6 Electric field Strength due to a

Ey  Uniformly Surface Charged Disc :
R
If there is a disc of radius R, charged on its surface
Thus force on ring due to wire is
with surface charge density  coul/m2, we wish to
K Kq q find electric field strength due to this disc at a
q  
R R 4 0 R distance x from the centre of disc on its axis at
point P shown in figure.
and Ex = 0 [As cancelled out]
(Here x components of forces on small elements  coul / m2
of rings are cancelled by the x component of
dy
diametrically opposite elements.)

EXAMPLE 31
x
A thin half-ring of radius R = 20 cm is uniformly P dE
charged with a total charge q = 0.70 nC. Find the
magnitude of the electric field strength at the
curvature centre of this half-ring.
Sol. The situation is shown in figure To find electric field at point P due to this disc, we
Here the semicircular wire subtend an angle  at consider an elemental ring of radius y and width dy
the centre, we known that the electric field strength in the disc as shown in figure. Now the charge on
due to a circular arc subtending an angle  at at it this elemental ring dq can be given as
centre can be given as

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
1.22 Theory and Exercise Book

dq =  2 y dy Case (ii) : If x << R

[Area of elemental ring ds = 2y dy]
 
Now we know that electric field strength due to a E [1 – 0] 
2 0 20
ring of radius R. Charge Q at a distance x from its
centre on its axis can be given as i.e. behaviour of the disc is like infinite sheet.

KQx 3.7 Electric Field Strength due to a Uniformly

E [As done earlier]
(x 2  R 2 )3/ 2 charged Hollow Hemispherical Cup :
Here due to the elemental ring electric field strength Figure shows a hollow hemisphere, uniformly
dE at point P can be given as charged with surface charge density  coul/m2. To
find electric field strength at its centre C, we consider
Kdqx an elemental ring on its surface of angular width d
dE 
(x 2  y 2 )3/ 2 at an angle  from its axis as shown. The surface
area of this ring will be
K2ydyx ds = 2R sin  × Rd
=
(x 2  y 2 )3/ 2 Charge on this elemental ring is
dq = ds = . 2R2 sin  d
Net electric field at point P due to this disc is given
Now due to this ring electric field strength
by integrating above expression from O to R as
at centre C can be given as
R
K2 xydy Kdq(R cos )
E  dE    (x
0
2
 y 2 )3 / 2
dE 
(R 2 sin 2   R 2 cos 2 )3/ 2

R y
2y dy R sin 

= Kx (x 2  y 2 )3 / 2 2
0 l/m Rd
ou
c
R
 1 
= 2Kx  – 
 x  y2
2 
0
 d

c x
  x 
E = 2  1 – 
0 
 x 2  R 2  d

Case : (i) If x >> R K.2R 2 sin d.R cos 

=
R3
–1/ 2
 x   R2  = K sin 2 d
E [1 – ] [1 – 1  2  ]
2 0 R 2 2 0  x  Net electric field at centre can be obtained by
x 1
x2 
integrating this expression between limits 0 to as
2
 1 R2 /2
 [1 – 1   higher order terms]
2 0 2 x2 E0 =  dE  K  sin 2d
0
2 2
 R R Q
= /2
2 = 2 =  1 1 
4 0 x 4 0 x 4 0 x 2   cos 2 
=
4 0 
–
2  0
=
4 0 2  2  4
  0
i.e. behaviour of the disc is like a point charge.

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
 Electrostatics-1 1.23

EXAMPLE 32
In the given arrangement find the electric field at C m m m
(f) (f) (f)
in the figure (a). Here the U-shaped wire is uniformly
charged with linear charge density .
(i) m (i) m (i) m

1 2 (a) (b) (c)

K Consider a body of mass m being raised to a height

C C  E x1 K
a a E x2  h vertically upwards as shown in above figure. The
a
K K work done is mgh. Suppose we take the body along
 E y1  Ey 2
a a
(a) 2K the path as in (b). The work done during horizontal
Ey 3 
a motion is zero. Adding up the works done in the
two vertical path of the paths, we get the result
3 mgh once again. Any arbitrary path like the one
(b) shown in (c) can be broken into elementary
horizontal and vertical portions. Work done along
Sol. The electric field due to the three parts of U-shaped
wire are shown in figure (b). Thus we have the horizontal path is zero. The work done along
the vertical parts add up to mgh. Thus we conclude

E net  (E x1  E x 2 )iˆ  (E y1  E y2  E y3 )iˆ that the work done in raising a body against gravity
is independent of the path taken. It only depends
  K K  ˆ  2K K K  ˆ upon the intial and final positions of the body. We
E net   – i – – j0
 a a   a a a  conclude from this discussion that the force of gravity

Thus E.F. due to given arrangement at C = 0 is a conservative force.

Note Examples of Conservative forces.

(i) Gravitational force, not only due to Earth due in its
general form as given by the universal law of
gravitation, is a conservative force.
Section C - Electrostatic potential energy, (ii) Elastic force in a stretched or compressed spring is
Question Based on energy a conservative force.
conservation and Angular
Momentum conservation, (iii) Electrostatic force between two electric charges is
Potential energy for a system a conservative force.
of charged particles
(iv) Magnetic force between two magnetic poles is a
conservative forces.
4. CONSERVATIVE FORCE
Forces acting along the line joining the centres of
A force is said to be conservative if work done by
two bodies are called central forces. Gravitational
or against the force in moving a body depends only
force and Electrosatic forces are two important
on the initial and final positions of the body and not
examples of central forces. Central forces are
on the nature of path followed between the initial
conservative forces.
and final positions.

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
1.24 Theory and Exercise Book

Properties of Conservative forces EXAMPLE 34

• Work done by or against a conservative force An object is displaced from position vector
depends only on the initial and final positions  
of the body. r1  (2 ˆi  3ˆj)m to r2  (4 ˆi  6ˆj)m under a force
• Work done by or against a conservative force does 
F  (3x 2 ˆi  2yˆj)N . Find the work done by this force.
not depend upon the nature of the path between
 
initial and final positions of the body. rfr2

If the work done by a force in moving a body from Sol. W  [Link]  (3 x 2 î  2yĵ)  (dx î  dyĵ  dzk̂ )
 

an initial location to a final location is independent ri r1
of the path taken between the two points, then the

force is conservative. r2
2 3
• Work done by or against a conservative force in a =  (3x dx  2ydy)  [x  y 2 ](4,6)
(2,3)  83J

round trip is zero. r1

If a body moves under the action of a force that

IIIrd format (perfect differential format)
does no total work during any round trip, then the
force is conservative; otherwise it is non- EXAMPLE 35
conservative. 
If F  yiˆ  xjˆ then find out the work done in moving
The concept of potential energy exists only in the
case of conservative forces. the particle from position (2, 3) to (5, 6)

• The work done by a conservative force is completely Sol. dw = [Link]
recoverable.
dw = (yiˆ  xj).(dxi
ˆ ˆ  dyj)
ˆ
Complete recoverability is an important aspect of
the work of a conservative force. dw = ydx + xdy
• Work done by conservative forces Now ydx + xdy = d(xy) (perfect differential equation)
 dw = d(xy)
Ist format : (When constant force is given) for total work done we integrate both side
EXAMPLE 33
Calculate the work done to displace the particle from  dw   d(xy)

(1, 2) to (4, 5). if F  4 ˆi  3ˆj Put xy = k
   then at (2, 3) ki = 2 × 3 = 6
Sol. dw = F.d r ( dr  dxi  dyj  dzk ) at (5, 6) kf = 5 × 6 = 30
dw = (4 î  3 ĵ ).(dx î  dyĵ  dzk̂ ) 30
30
 dw = 4dx + 3dy then w=  dk  k 
6
6

w 4 5
 w = (30 – 6) = 24 Joule

0
dw = 
1
4dx +  3dy
2
4.1 NON-CONSERVATIVE FORCES :
4 5
 w = 4 x1  3 y2 A force is said to be non-conservative if work done
w = (16 – 4) + (15 – 6) by or against the force in moving a body depends
 w = 12 + 9 = 21 Joule upon the path between the initial and final positions.
The frictional forces are non-conservative forces.
II format : (When F is given as a function of x, y, z) This is because the work done against friction
 depends on the length of the path along which a
If F  Fx iˆ  Fy ˆj  Fz kˆ
body is moved. It does not depend only on the initial
then and final positions. Note that the work done by
fricitional force in a round trip is not zero.
dw = (Fx iˆ  Fy ˆj  Fz k).(dxi
ˆ ˆ  dyjˆ  dzk)
ˆ
The velocity-dependent forces such as air
 dw = Fxdx + Fydy + FZdz resistance, viscous force, magnetic force etc., are
non conservative forces.

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
 Electrostatics-1 1.25

EXAMPLE 36 5. ELECTR OS TATIC P OTENTIAL

 ENERGY :
Calculate the work done by the force F  yiˆ to
(a) Electrostatic Potential Energy :
move the particle from (0, 0) to (1, 1) in the following Potential energy of a system of particles is defined
condition only in conservative fields. As electric field is also
(a) y = x (b) y = x2 conservative, we define potential energy in it. Before
Sol. We know that proceeding further, we should keep in mind the

dw = [Link]  dw = (yi) ˆ .(dx i ) following points, which are useful in understanding
dw = ydx ...(1) potential energy in electric fields.
In equation (1) we can calculate work done only (i) Doing work implies supply of energy
when we know the path taken by the particle. (ii) Energy can neither be transferred nor be
either transformed into any other form without doing work
y = x or y = x2 so now (iii) Kinetic energy implies utilization of energy where
(a) when y = x as potential energy implies storage of energy
1 (iv) Whenever work is done on a system of bodies,
 dw   xdx0 the supplied energy to the system is either used in
form of KE of its particles or it will be stored in the
1
 w= Joule system in some form, increases the potential energy
2
of system.
(b) when y = x2 (v) When all particles of a system are separated
1
2 far apart by infinite distance there will be no
 dw   x dx
0
interaction between them. This state we take as
reference of zero potential energy.
1 Now potential energy of a system of particles we
 w= Joule
3 define as the work done in assembling the system
Difference between conservative and Non- in a given configuration against the interaction forces
conservative forces of particles.
S. Conservative Non-Conservative • Electrostatic potential energy is defined in two ways.
No. forces forces
(i) Interaction energy of charged particles of a system.
Work done does not Work done depends
1 (ii) Self energy of a charged object (will be discussed later)
depend upon path on path.
Work done in a (b) Electrostatic Interaction Energy :
Work done in round
2 round trip is not Electrostatic interaction energy of a system of
trip is zero.
zero.
charged particles is defined as the external work
Forces are velocity-
3 Central in nature. dependent and required to assemble the particles from infinity to a
retarding in nature. given configuration.
When only a When some charged particles are at infinite
conservative force separation, their potential energy is taken zero as
acts within a system,
no interaction is there between them. When these
the kinetic energy Work done against a
charges are brought close to a given configuration,
and potential energy non-c onservative
4 can change. force may be external work is required if the force between these
However their sum, dissipated as heat particles is repulsive and energy is supplied to the
the mechanical energy. system hence final potential energy of system will
energy of the be positive. If the force between the particles is
system, does not
attractive work will be done by the system and final
change.
Work done is Work done is not
potential energy of system will be negative.
5 completely completely Let us take some illustrations to understand this
rec overable. recoverable. concept in detail.

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
1.26 Theory and Exercise Book

(c) Interaction Energy of a System of Two Charged Sol. As here the particle at rest is free to move, when one
Particles : particle approaches the other, due to electrostatic
x repulsion other will also start moving and so the velocity
of first particle will decrease while of other will
q1 r q2 dx F
increase and at closest approach both will move with
Figure shows two +ve charges q1 and q2 separated same velocity. So if v is the common velocity of each
by a distance r. The electrostatic interaction energy particle at closest approach, then by 'conservation of
of this system can be given as work done in bringing momentum' of the two protons system.
q2 from infinity to the given separation from q1. If 1
can be calculated as mu = mv + mv i.e., v u
2
r  r
Kq1q 2 And by conservation of energy
W  F .dx  –  x2
dx
  1 1 1 1 e2
mu 2  mv 2  mv 2 
2 2 2 4 0 r
[–ve sign shows that x is decreasing]

Kq1q 2 1 u
2
1 e2
W= =U  mu 2 – m   
r 2  2 4 0 r
[Interaction energy]
If the two charges here are of opposite sign, the u
[as v = ]
potential energy will be negative as 2

Kq1q 2 1 e2
U=–  mu 2 
r 4 40 r
EXAMPLE 37
e2
Find out speed of particles when separation between  r
m0 u 2
them is r.

Released
+q –q EXAMPLE 39
m 2m
Two fixed equal positive charges, each of magnitude
2r 5 × 10–5 C are located at points A and B, separated
Sol. Energy conservation : by a distance of 6 m. An equal and opposite charge
moves towards them along the line COD, the
kq1q 2 1 1 kq q perpendicular bisector of the line AB. The moving
0  mv12  2mv 22  1 2
2r 2 2 r charge, when it reaches the point C at a distance of
Momentum conservation 4 m from O, has a kinetic energy of 4 joules. Calculate
(as E.F is action-reaction pair) the distance of the farthest point D which the negative
charge will reach before returning towards C.
v1
mv1 = 2mv2  v 2 
2
+q A

EXAMPLE 38 3m
–q
A proton moves from a large distance with a speed u D x O 4m C
m/s directly towards a free proton originally at rest. 3m
Find the distance of closest approach for the two
+q B
protons in terms of mass of proton m and its charge e.

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
 Electrostatics-1 1.27

Sol. The kinetic energy is lost and converted to Sol.

electrostatic potential energy of the system as the F
negative charge goes from C to D and comes to +
rest at D instantaneously. F v
Loss of K.E. = Gain in potential energy + rmin
q,m
4 = Uf – Ui
d
 q.q  +
2q(–q) q.q 2q(–q)
or, 4 2
 – 
 4  0 (6) 4 0 9  x 2  40 (6)2 Here we can see that as +q moves toward +Q, a
repulsive force acts on –q radially outward +Q. Here
as the line of action of force passes through the fix
 q.q 2q(–q)   q.q 2q(–q)  charge, no torque act on +q relative to the fix point
4 2
 – 2
 
 4  0 (6) 4 2
9 x   4  0 (6) 40 9  16  charge +Q, thus here we can say that with respect
to +Q, the angular momentum of +q must remain
constant. Here we can say that +q will be closest
2q 2 1 1  to +Q when it is moving perpendicularly to the line
or, 4  – 
4 0  5 9  x 2  joining the two charges as shown.
If the closest separation in the two charges is rmin,
from conservation of angular momentum we can write
1 1 
mvd = mv0 rmin ...(1)
or, 4 = 2 × (5 × 10–5)2 × (9 × 109)  5 – 
 9  x2  Now from energy conservation, we have
1 1 KqQ
45 mv 2  mv 20 
or, 49– 2 2 rmin
9  x2
vd
 x  72  8.48m Here we use from equation (1) v0 = r
min

5.1 Motion of a Charge Particle and Angular 1 1 d 2 KqQ

Momentum Conservation : or mv 2  mv 2 2  ...(2)
2 2 rmin rmin
We know that a system of particles when no
Solving equation (2) we'll get the value of rmin.
external torque acts, the total angular momentum
of system remains conserved. Consider following
5.2 Potential Energy for a System of
examples which explains the concept for moving charged Particles :
charged particles.
q1

EXAMPLE 40
Figure shows a charge +Q fixed at a position in space. r3 r2
From a large distance another charge particle of
charge +q and mass m is thrown toward +Q with an
impact parameter d as shown with speed v. find the q2 r1 q3
distance of closest approach of the two particles. When more than two charged particles are there in
a system, the interaction energy can be given by sum
V of interaction energy of all the pairs of particles. For
+
example if a system of three particles having charges
q,m
d q1, q2 and q3 is given as shown in figure. The total
interaction energy of this system can be given as
+ Kq1q 2 Kq1q 3 Kq 2 q 3
U  
Q r3 r2 r1
fixed

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
1.28 Theory and Exercise Book

• Derivation for a system of point charges :

U
(i) Keep all the charges at infinity. Now bring the V = q joule/coulomb
0
charges one by one to its corresponding position
and find work required. PE of the system is algebric As potential energy of a charge in electric field is
sum of all the works. defined as work done in bringing the charge from
Let W1 = work done in bringing first charge infinity to the given point in electric field. Similarly
W2 = work done in bringing second charge against we can define electric potential as "work done in
force due to 1st charge bringing a unit positive charge from infinity to the
W3 = work done in bringing third charge against given point against the electric forces."
force due to 1st and 2nd charge. • Properties :
PE = W1 + W 2 + W3 + .................. (This will (i) Potential is a scalar quantity, its value may be
n(n – 1) n positive, negative or zero.
contain = C2 terms)
2 joule
(ii) Method of calculation (to be used in problems) (ii) S.I. Unit of potential is volt = and its
coulomb
U = sum of the interaction energies of the charges.
dimensional formula is [M1L2T–3I–1].
= (U 12 + U 13 + ........+ U 1n ) + (U 23 + U 24 +
(iii) Electric potential at a point is also equal to the
..............+U2n) + (U34 + U35 + .........U3n) ........
negative of the work done by the electric field in
(iii) Method of calculation useful for symmetrical point
taking the point charge from reference point (i.e.
charge systems.
infinity) to that point.
Find PE of each charge due to rest of the charges.
(iv) Electric potential due to a positive charge is always
If U1 = PE of first charge due to all other charges.
= (U12 + U13 + .........+ U1n) positive and due to negative charge it is always
U2 = PE of second charges due to all other charges. negativeexcept at infinity. (taking V =0)
= (U21 + U23 + ..........+U2n) (v) Potential decreases in the direction of electric field.

U1  U 2  ..... (a) Electric Potential due to a Point Charge in its

U = PE of the system = Surrounding :
2
We know the region surrounding a charge is electric
field. Thus we can also define electric potential in the
Note
surrounding of a point charge. The potential at a point
P at a distance x from the charge q can be given as

Section D - Electric Potential, Relation P

between E and V, Potential due
to point charge, Rod, Ring, disc, x
Question Based on Electric field
intensity, and electric potential,
Questions Based on electric q
field lines

6. ELECTRIC POTENTIAL :
Electric potential is a scalar property of every point U
Vp = q
in the region of electric field. At a point in electric 0

field, electric potential is defined as the interaction Where U is the potential energy of charge q0, if
energy of a unit positive charge. placed at point P, which can be given as
If at a point in electric field a charge q0 has potential
energy U, then electric potential at that point can Kqq 0
U=
be given as x

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
 Electrostatics-1 1.29

Thus potential at point P is

Kdq
dV 
Kq R
VP 
x
Q
The above result is valid only for electric potential in + + +
+ + +
the surrounding of a point charge. If we wish to find + +

+
electric potential in the surrounding of a charged

+ +
+ + +
extended body, we first find the potential due to an R

+ + +
elemental charge dq on body by using the above result dq
C

+ +
and then integrate the expression for the whole body.

+
+
+
+ +
(b) Electric Potential due to a Charge Rod : + +
+ +
+
Figure shows a charged rod of length L, uniformly
charged with a charge Q. Due to this we will find Total potential at C is V  dV 
electric potential at a point P at a distance r from
one end of the rod shown in figure shown. Kdq KQ
=  R

R
x As all dq's of the ring are situated at same distance
dx
Q + + + + + + + + ++ ++ R from the ring centre C, simply the potential due
r P
L to all is added as being a scalar quantity, we can
For this we consider an element of width dx at a distance directly say that the electric potential at ring centre
x from the point P. Charge on this element is
KQ
Q is . Here we can also state that even if charge
dq = dx R
L
Q is non-uniformly distributed on ring, the electric
The potential dV due to this element at point P can
be given by using the result of a point charge as potential at C will remain same.

Kdq KQ
dV = = dx Case II : At a Point on Axis of Ring
x Lx
If we wish to find the electric potential at a point P
Net electric potential at point P can be given as
on the axis of ring as shown, we can directly state
rL
KQ the result as here also all points of ring are at same
V=  dV   Lx
dx
distance
r x 2  R 2 from the point P, thus the

KQ potential at P can be given as

= [n x]rr  L
L + +
+
+

KQ  r  L 
+ +
+ + + + +

= n  
L  r 
+ + + + +

R
x P
(c) Electric Potential due to a Charged Ring :
+ +

Case I : At its centre

+
+

To find potential at the centre C of the ring, we first + +

find potential dV at centre due to an elemental charge
dq on ring which is given as KQ
VP =
R  x2
2

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
1.30 Theory and Exercise Book

GRAPH EXAMPLE 41
Consider the following rod & find the potential due
v to it at P
OP = d, x = d tan , dx = d sec2 d

kdx
dV 
d sec 
x
/ 4
kd sec 2 d
  dV  
–/ 4
d sec 

(d) Electric Potential due to a Uniformly Charged Disc

Figure shows a uniformly charged disc of radius R
dx
with surface charge density  coul/m2. To find x  45°
electric potential at point P we consider an elemental O P
d 45°
ring of radius y and width dy, charge on this c / m
elemental ring is
dq = . 2y dy
Due to this ring, the electric potential at point P can / 4

be given as V  k  sec  d
–/ 4

Kdq K..2ydy
dV  = V = k [l n(sec   tan )]– /4/ 4
2 2
x y x 2  y2
V = k [ln ( 2 + 1)] – k [ln ( 2 – 1)]

 2 1
 coul / m2
V = k l n   = k ln( 2  1)2
 2 –1

R
y x P EXAMPLE 42
Find min velocity v0 such that particle cross the ring.
dy

R
v0 P
qin
Net electric potential at point P due to whole disc R
can be given as
R
 ydy kQ
V=  dV =  2 .
0 0
2
x y 2 Sol. Potential at P =
2R

Applying energy conservation

 R
= 2   x  y 
2 2
1 kQq kqQ
0   0 mv 20  0
2 2R R
 2 2
VP = 2  [ x  R – x]
0 2kQq  1 
 v0  1  
mR  2

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
 Electrostatics-1 1.31

EXAMPLE 43
From  APB, we have
P
A ring of radius R is having two charges q and 2q
distributed on its two half parts. Find the electric r

A 
potential at a point on its axis at a distance 2 2 R B

from its centre.

Sol.
Q
q
+ + r = 2R cos 
+
or, dr = – 2R sin  d
+

+
+ +

Hence
+ + + + +

R
+ + + + +

–4R sin d

dV 
2 2R P 4 0
+ +

0
R sin 
+
+

+ + V– 
/2
 0
d
2q
Distance of P from periphery of ring is
R R
– | – θ cos   sin  |0 / 2  ....(19C)
R 2  (2 2R) 2  3R  0  0

Electric potential = Potential due to upper half 7. RELATION BETWEEN ELECTRIC

+ Potential due to lower half FIELD INTENSITY AND ELECTRIC
POTENTIAL :
Kq 2Kq 3Kq Kq
=    (a) For uniform electric field :
3R 3R 3R R
B

(e) Electric potential due to a closed disc at a point

A
on the edge
Let us calculate the potential at the edge of a thin (i) Potential difference between two points A and B
disc of radius 'R' carrying a uniformly distributed  
VB – VA = – [Link]
charge with surface density .
(b) Non uniform electric field
Let AB be a diameter and A be a point where the
potential is to be calculated. From A as centre, we V V V
(i) Ex  – , Ey  – , Ez  –
draw two arcs of radii r and r + dr as shown. The x y z
infinitesimal region between these two arcs is an 
 E  E x ˆi  E y ˆj  E z kˆ
element whose area is dA = (2r) dr, where 2 is
the angle subtended by this element PQ at the point
    
A. Potential at A due to the element PQ is  – iˆ V  ˆj V  kˆ V
  x  y  z 

dA 2rdr 2dr

dV      ˆ  ˆ  
4 0 r 4 0 r 40  – ˆi j  k  V = –  V = – grad V
 x y z

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
1.32 Theory and Exercise Book

V EXAMPLE 45
Where  x = derivative of V with respect to x

For given E  2xiˆ  3yjˆ find the potential at (x, y)
(keeping y and z constant)
if V at origin is 5 volts.
V
 y = derivative of V with respect to y (keeping z v
 x y

and x constant)
Sol. 
5
 
0

dV  – [Link]  – E x dx – E y dy
0

V
 z = derivative of V with respect to z (keeping x 2x 2 3y 2
 V–5= – –
2 2
and y constant)

(c) If electric potential and electric field depends 2x 2 3y 2

 V– – 5
only on one coordinate, say r : 2 2

 V
(i) E– rˆ
r EXAMPLE 46

where r̂ is a unit vector along increasing r.. The electric potential in a region is represented as
  V = 2x + 3y – z. Obtain expression for the electric
(ii)  
dV  – [Link]
field strength.
rB
Sol. We know
 
 
VB – VA = – [Link]
rA   V ˆ V ˆ V ˆ 
E  – i j k
  x y z 
dr is along the increasing direction of r..
(iii) The potential of a point
V 
Here,  [2x  3y – z]  2
 
r x x

V  – [Link]

V 
 [2x  3y – z]  3
Area under E - x curve gives negative of change in y y
potential.
Negative of slope of V - x curve gives the electric
V 
field at that point.  [2x  3y – z]  –1
z z

EXAMPLE 44 
 E  –(2iˆ  3jˆ – k)
ˆ

V = x2 + y, Find E .

V V V 8. ELECTRIC LINES OF FORCE

Sol.  2x ,  1 and 0
x y z
The idea of electric lines of force or the electric
field lines introduced by Michael Faraday is a way
  V ˆ V ˆ V 
E  –  ˆi j k ˆ ˆ
  –(2xi  j) to visualize electrostatic field geometrically. The
 x y z 
properties of electric lines of force are the following
Electric field is nonuniform.

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
 Electrostatics-1 1.33

(i) The electric lines of force are continous curves in (v) The number of electric lines of force that originate
an electric field starting from a positively charged from or terminate on a charge is proportional to the
body and ending on a negatively charged body. magnitude of the charge.
(vi) As number of lines of force per unit area normal to
the area at point represents magnitude of intensity,
crowded lines represent strong field while distant
+ lines weak field. Further, if the lines of force are
equidistant straight lines, the field is uniform

Electric lines of force due

to positive charge

Magnitude is Direction is
not constant not constant

Electric lines of force due

Both magnitude and Both magnitude and
to negative charge direction not constant direction constant
(ii) The tangent to the curve at any point gives the
direction of the electric field intensity at that point.
(iii) Electric lines of force never intersect since if they
cross at a point, electric field intensity at the point
will have two directions, which is not possible. +Q
O Q+
(iv) Electric lines of force do not pass but leave or end
on a charged conductor normally. Suppose the lines
of force are not perpendicular to the conductor
surface. In this situation, the component of electric
field parallel to the surface would cause the
Electric lines of force due to two equal positive
electrons to move and hence conductor will not
charges (field is zero at O). O is a null point
remain equipotential which is an absurd as in
A charge particle need not follow an ELOF.
electrostatics conductor is an equipotential surface.
Electric lines of force produced by static charges
do not form close loop.

EXAMPLE 47
If number of electric lines of force from charge q
+
are 10 then find out number of electric lines of force
from 2q charge.
Sol. No. of ELOF  charge

q ' N' 2q
  N =  10  20
q 10 q
Fixed point charge near
infinite metal plate So number of ELOF will be 20.

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
1.34 Theory and Exercise Book

EXAMPLE 48 (ii) Electric lines of force start and end normally on the
surface of a conductor.
A solid metallic sphere is placed in a uniform electric
(iii) Electric lines of force do not exist inside a conductor,
field. Which of the lines A, B, C and D shows the
correct representation of lines of force and why ? the lines of force are shown in the adjacent figure.

Note
A

C
Section E - Equipotential surface
D
9. EQUIPOTENTIAL SURFACES :
Sol. (D)
As shown in figure if a charge is shifted from a
The line (A) is wrong as lines of force start or end
point A to B on a surface. M which is perpendicular
normally on the surface of a conductor and here it is
to the direction of electric field, the work done in
not so. Line (B) and (C) are wrong as lines of force
shifting will obviously, be zero as electric force is
does not exist inside a conductor and here it is not so.
normal to the direction of displacement. As no work
Also lines of force are not normal to the surface of the
is done in moving from A to B, we can say that A
conductor. Line (D) represents the correct situation,
and B are at same potetials or we can say that all
as here line of force does not exist inside the conductor
the points of surface M are at same potential or
and start and end normally on its surface.
here we call surface M as equipotential surface.

EXAMPLE 49
M
A metallic slab is introduced between the two
charged parallel plates as shown below. Sketch the
B
electric lines of force between the plates.

+ –
A
+ – E

+ –

+ –
Following figures show equipotential surfaces in the
+ – surrounding of point charge and a long charged wire

Sol. Keeping in mind that

(i) Electric lines of force start from positive charge
and end on negative charge.
+ – + –
– q
+ – +
– –
+ – + –
– –
+ +

– + – Point charge
+
– Spherical equipotential surfaces
– +

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
 Electrostatics-1 1.35

+ r2 r2
2K
+
+
Vx – Vy  Edx = r1

r1
x
dx
+
+
+  r2 
+ VX – VY = 2K n  r 
+  1
+
+ EXAMPLE 50
+
+ Write down the Electric field in vector form ?
+
+ 40
Line charge 20
Cylindrical equipotential surfaces
A 0
Every surface in electric field in which at every 60°
point direction of electric field is normal to the 10cm
surface can be regarded as equipotential surface. B
Figure shows two equipotential surfaces in a
uniform electric field E. If we wish to find the
potential difference between two points A and B
shown in figure, we simply find the potential Sol. vA – vB = E × 0.1 × cos 30°
difference between the two equipotential surfaces
3 400
on which the points lie, given as 20 = E × 0.1 ×  E=
2 3
VA – VB = Ed

d M1 M2
400
cos 30  200
r2 3
+
+ Y
B + 30°
+ x 200 400
 sin 30 
+ E 3 3
+ 400
A X
+ r1 3
E +
200 ˆ
M1 M2 E.F. = 200iˆ  j
 coul / m 3
Figure shows a line charge with linear charge density
 coul/m. Here we wish to find potential difference
EXAMPLE 51
between two points X and Y which lie on
Find out equipotential surface where potential is zero ?
equipotential surfaces M1 & M2. To find the potential
difference between these surfaces, we consider a (x,y,z)
point P at a distance x from wire as shown. The
electric field at point P is (–a,0) (a,0)
2K –2q +q
E
x
Now the potential difference between surface M1
and M2 can be given as

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
1.36 Theory and Exercise Book

Here we wish to find the electric field at point P

–2kq kq
Sol.  0 having coordinates (r, o) (where r >> 2a). Due to
(x  a)2  y 2  z 2 (x  a)2  y 2  z 2 positive charge of dipole electric field at P is in
outward direction & due to negative charge it is in
kq 2kq inward direction.


2 2 2
(x  a)  y  z (x  a) 2  y 2  z 2 kq kq 4kqar
Enet at P = 2
– 2 = 2
squaring both sides (r – a) (r  a) (r – a 2 )2
1 4 
 As P  2aq
2 2 2 2 2 2
(x  a)  y  z (x  a)  y  z
2kpr
 Enet at P =
Note (r 2 – a 2 )2
As r >> 2a
 we can neglect a w.r.t. r

2kp
Section F - Electric field and electric Enet at P =
r3
potential due to electric dipole,
Dipole in electric field (Torque, As we can observe that for axial point direction of
potential energy), Angular SHM field is in direction of dipole moment
for dipole, Force on electric
dipole in Non-uniform electric

 2k p
field Vectorially, E  3
r
10. ELECTRIC DIPOLE : (2) At an equatorial point.
Again we consider the dipole placed along the x-axis
A system of two equal and opposite charges separated & we wish to find, electric field at point P which is
by a small distance is called electric dipole, shown in situated equatorially at a distance r (where r >> 2a)
figure. Every dipole has a characteristic property called from origin. Vertical component of the electric field
dipole moment. It is defined as the product of vectors cancel out each other.
magnitude of either charge and the separation between
the charges is given as. kq
 Enet at P = 2 E cos  [where E = ]
r2  a2
p=qd
2kq a
Enet at P = r 2  a 2 . 2
d r  a2
p
–q +q  a 
cos   2 
Dipole moment is a vector quantity and convensionally 
2
r  a 
its direction is given from negative pole to positive pole.
(a) Electric field due to a Dipole kq
(1) At an axial point r 2  a2
Figure shows an electric dipole placed on x-axis at origin

kq 
kq Enet P
(r  a)2 (r – a)2 kq
r 2  a2
–q +q
P
r
O
(–a, 0) (a, 0)
r q
–q 
2a O
(–a,0) (a,0)

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
 Electrostatics-1 1.37

(c) Electric potential due to a dipole.

2kqa kp
E net  2 = 2 (As p = 2aq) 1. At an axial point
(r  a 2 )3/ 2 (r  a 2 )3/ 2

As we have already stated that r > > 2a (–a,0) (a,0)

O P
kp –q q
 Enet at P = 3
r
r
We can observe that the direction of dipole moment &
(r >> 2a)
electric field due to dipole at P are in opposite direction.
We wish to find out potential at P due to dipole
 Vectorially
(with p = 2aq)

 –k P kq kq
E 3 Vnet  
r (r – a) (r  a)

(b) Electric field at a general Point due to a dipole

Figure shows a electric dipole place on x-axis at 2akq
Vnet 
origin & we wish to find out the electric field at (r 2  a 2 )
point P with coordinate (r, )
kp
KP sin Vnet = (As P = 2aq)
r 3 r2
2KP cos 
3 2. At a point on perpendicular bisector
P (r, ) r
At an equatorial point, electric potential due to dipole
Pcos  is always zero because potential due to +ve charge

–q

+q is cancelled by –ve charge.
P sin
P

v=0
Enet at r

2 2
 2KP cos    KP sin   –q +q
Enet =    
 r3   r
3


kP (3) Potential due to dipole at a general Point

 1  3cos2 
r3

P
kpsin 
r
r3
tan = 2kp cos  Pcos

r3 Enet –q q

KP sin 
tan  p Psin
tan = 3
r 2KP cos
2
 r3

 tan   kpcos 
  tan –1   Potential at P due to dipole =
 2  r2

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
1.38 Theory and Exercise Book

• BASIC TORQUE CONCEPT Sol. A  2Fl 

  
  rF C  2Fl 
 If the net transational force on the body is zero then the
torque of the forces may or may not be zero but net B  Fl  Fl  2Fl 
torque of the forces about each point of universe is same
 If we have to prove that a body is in equilibrium then 11.1 Potential Energy of a Dipole in
 Uniform Electric Field
first we will prove Fnet is equal to zero & after that
When a dipole in an electric field at an angle , the
we will show net about any point is equal to zero.
torque on it due to electric field is
 If the body is free to rotate then it will rotate about
the axis passing through centre of mass & parallel   p sin 
to torque vector direction & of the body is hinged In the figure shown, the torque is in clockwise
then it will rotate about hinged axis. direction. If we rotate the dipole in anticlockwise
direction from an angle 1 and 2 slowly, we have
11. DIPOLE IN UNIFORM ELECTRIC to apply an anticlockwise equal torque, then the work
FIELD : done in process will be given as
Figure shows a dipole of dipole moment p placed at
an angle  to the direction of electric field. Here the 
W  dW  d 
charges of dipole experience forces q in opposite
direction as shown. 2

+q
 =  p sin d
1
q

d  d sin 
+q
q

q 2
–q q
+q
thus we can state that when a dipole is placed in a 1
uniform electric field, net forces on the dipole is q
–q
zero. But as equal and opposite forces act with a
separation in their line of action, they produce a q
couple which tend to align the dipole along the –q
direction of electric field. The torque due to this
couple can be given as  = Force × separation
between lines of action of forces  p[ cos ]12
= q × d sin  = psin 
 p (cos 1  cos 2 )
or vectorially we can write the torque on dipole is
   Wexternal foce = –Welectricforce
  p 
 Welectric field = – pE (cos 1 – cos 2)
As we know that for conservative forces
EXAMPLE 52 W.D. = – U
Write down torque about A, B, C U = pE (cos1 – cos 2)
C F U 2 – U 1  (–pE cos 2 – pE cos 1 )
A.O.R  We can generalise that
U = – pE cos 
B 2l In vector notation we can write potential energy of
dipole in electric field is

F U = –p.E
A
[where potential energy at  = 90° = 0]

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
 Electrostatics-1 1.39

11.2 Stable and Unstable equilibrium of a Here at   0 , potential energy of dipole in electric
Dipole in Electric Field : field is minimum which favours the position of stable
We’ve discussed that when a dipole in an electric equilibrium.
field E, the potential energy of dipole can be given as Similarly when  = 180º, net torque on dipole is zero
U   p cos  and potential energy of dipole in this state is given as
We also know that the net torque on a dipole in U  p (maximum)
electric field can be given as Thus at  = 180º, dipole is in unstable equilibrium.
  p sin 
This can also be shown by figure(b). From equilibrium
position if dipole is slightly displaced in anticlockwise
It shows that net torque on dipole in electric field is
direction, we can see that torque on dipole also acts
zero in two situations when   0 º and   180 º in anticlockise direction away from equilirbium
as shown in figure position. Thus here dipole is in unstable equilibrium.

11.3 Angular SHM or Dipole

qE When a dipole is suspended in a uniform electric
+
field, it will align itself parallel to the field.
Now if it is given a small angular displacement 
– + about its equilibrium, the (restoring) couple will be
C = – pE sin
qE – or, C = – pE  [as sin  , for small ]

d2
or, I  pE
(a) dt 2

d 2 pE
or, 2
 
dt I

qE d 2
– or,  2 
dt 2
+ – 2 pE
where  
I
+ qE
This is standard equation of angular simple harmonic

 2 
motion with time-period T    . So the dipole
(b)  
will execute angular SHM with time-period
We can see that when   0 as shown in figure(a) I
when torque on dipole is zero, the dipole is in T  2 ...(33)
pE
equilibrium. We can verify that here equilibrium is
stable. If we slightly tilt the dipole from its equilibrium EXAMPLE 53
position in anticlockwise direction as shown by dotted Find out the angular frequency of the dipole when
position. The dipole experiences a clockwise torque it crosses the mean position.
which tend the dipole to rotate back to its equilibrium
position. This shows that at   0 , dipole is in stable +q
equilibrium. We can also find the potential energy of 2l 
37°
dipole at   0 , it can by given as E

U  p (minimum) –q

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
1.40 Theory and Exercise Book

1 2
Sol. 0 – PE cos 37° = I d
2

1 2 PE 
I 
2 5
d

2ml 2 2 2ql .E 2qE

.   
2 5 5ml Here that dipole moment of system is
Pnet = 2 qd cos /2
Now
11.4 Force on an Electric Dipole in Non-
  d
uniform Electric Field : F  Pnet .
If in a non-uniform electric field dipole is placed at dx

a point where electric field is , the interaction energy For maximum force, the angle between Pnet and
of dipole at this point can be given as 
  d
U   p.  is 0º
dx
Now the force on dipole due to electric field can be
given as
+
F  – U +
+
For unidirectional variation in electric field, we have +
 + Pnet  2qd cos  / 2
d   +
F – (p.  )
dx +
+
If dipole is placed in the direction of electric field, +
we have +

d
F –p
dx
 d  2k 
Fmax  2qd cos  
2 dx  x 
EXAMPLE 54
A water molecule is placed at a distance  from the   1 
or Fmax  2qd cos  2 k    2 
line carrying linear charge density . Find the 2  x 
maximum force exerted on the water molecule. The
 4K q d  cos  / 2
shape of water molecule and the partial charges on 
x2
H and O atoms as shown in figure.
 4 K q d  cos  / 2
| Fmax | 
+q x2
H
 4 K q d  cos  / 2
Fmax 
–2q 2
 O

d
Note
H

+q

Sol. The figure can be resolved as combination of 2

dipoles. Dipole moments of eachp = qd.

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
 Electrostatics-1 1.41

Exercise - 1 Objective Problems | JEE Main

Section A - Coloumb's law, Electrostatic 5. When the distance between two charged particle is
Equillibrium + Properties of halved, the force between them becomes -
Charge
1. One quantum of charge should be at least be equal (A) One fourth (B) One half
to the charge in coloumb: (C) Double (D) Four times
(A) 1.6 × 10–17 c. (B) 1.6 × 10–19 c.
(C) 1.6 × 10 –10 c. (D). 4.8 × 10–10 c. 6. Two small balls having equal positive charge Q
(Coulomb) on each are suspended by two insulating
2. An electron at rest has a charge of 1.6 × 10–19 C. It strings of equal length 'L' metre, from a hook fixed to a
starts moving with a velocity v = c/2, where c is the stand. The whole set up is taken in a satellite in to space
speed of light, then the new charge on it is -
where there is no gravity (state of weight lessness) Then
(A) 1.6 × 10–19 Coulomb
the angle () between the two strings is -
2 (A) 0º (B) 90º
1
(B) 1.6 × 10–19 1    Coulomb
(C) 180º (D) 0º <  < 180º
2

2
 2 7. Two point charges in air at a distance of 20 cm.
(C) 1.6 × 10–19    1 Coulomb
1 from each other interact with a certain force. At
what distance from each other should these charges
1.6  1019 be placed in oil of relative permittivity 5 to obtain
(D) Coulomb the same force of interaction –
2
1
1  (A) 8.94 × 10–2 m (B) 0.894 × 10–2 m
2 –2
(C) 89.4 × 10 m (D) 8.94 × 102 m

3. Which one of the following statement regarding 8. A certain charge Q is divided at first into two parts,
electrostatics is wrong ? (q) and (Q-q). Later on the charges are placed at a
(A) Charge is quantized certain distance. If the force of interaction between
(B) Charge is conserved
the two charges is maximum then-
(C) There is an electric field near an isolated charge
(A) (Q/q) = (4/1) (B) (Q/q) = (2/1)
at rest
(D) A stationary charge produces both electric and (C)(Q/q) = (3/1) (D) (Q/q) = (5/1)
magnetic fields
9. Three equal charges (q) are placed at corners of a
4. Two similar charge of +Q , as shown in figure are equilateral triangle. The force on any charge is-
placed at A and B. –q charge is placed at point C Kq 2
midway between A and B. –q charge will oscillate if (A) Zero (B) 3
a2
Kq 2 Kq 2
(C) 2 (D) 3 3
3a a2

10. Four charges are arranged at the corners of a square

ABCD, as shown. The force on +ve charge kept
at the centre of the square is B +q –q C
(A) zero
(A) It is moved towards A.
(B) It is moved towards B. (B) along diagonal AC
(C) along diagonal BD –2q +2q
(C) It is moved upwards AB. A D
(D) Distance between A and B is reduced. (D) perpendicular to the side AB

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
1.42 Theory and Exercise Book
Section B - Electric field, Questions on 15. A particle of mass m and charge Q is placed in an
constant electric field, Electric electric field E which varies with time t ass E = E0
field due to uniformly charged
Rod, Time period of SHM + sint. It will undergo simple harmonic motion of
Electrostatics, Electric field due amplitude
to uniformly charged Ring, disc,
sheet QE 02 QE 0
(A) (B)
11. Two charges 4q and q are placed 30 cm. apart. At m2 m2
what point the value of electric field will be zero
(A) 10 cm. away from q and between the charge QE 0 QE 0
(B) 20 cm. away from q and between the charge (C) (D)
m2 m
(C) 10 cm. away from q and out side the line joining
the charge.
(D) 10 cm. away from 4q and out side the line joining 16. A small circular ring has a uniform charge distribution.
them. On a far-off axial point distance x from the centre of
the ring, the electric field is proportional to-
12. A point charge 50C is located in the XY plane at (A) x–1 (B) x–3/2

the point of position vector r0  2iˆ  3jˆ . What is (C) x–2 (D) x5/4
the electric field at the point of position vector
 17. A nonconducting ring of radius R has uniformly
r  8iˆ  5j
ˆ
distributed positive charge Q. A small part of the
(A) 1200 V/m (B) 0.04 V/m
ring, of length d, is removed (d<<R). The electric
(C) 900 V/m (D) 4500 V/m
field at the centre of the ring will now be -
  (A) directed towards the gap, inversely proportional
13. A point charge q is placed at origin. Let E A , E B and
to R3.

E C be the electric field at three points A(1, 2, 3), (B) directed towards the gap, inversely proportional
B(1, 1, –1) and C(2, 2, 2) due to charge q. Then to R2.
    (C) directed away from the gap, inversely proportional
[i] E A  E B [ii] | E B |  4 |E C |
to R3.
select the correct alternative
(A) only [i] is correct (B) only [ii] is correct (D) directed away from the gap, inversely proportional
(C) both [i] and [ii] are correct to R2.
(D) both [i] and [ii] are wrong
18. Six charges three positive and three negative of equal
14. Two identical point charges are placed at a separation magnitude are to be placed at the vertices of a regular
of l.P is a point on the line joining the charges, at a hexagon such that the electric field at O is double
distance x from any one charge. The field at P is E. the electric field when only one positive charge of
E is plotted against x for values of x from close to
same magnitude is placed at R. Which of the
zero to slightly less than l. Which of the following
following arrangements of charges is possible for
best represents the resulting curve ?
P,Q,R,S,T and U respectively?
E E
P Q

(A) (B) U R
x x O
O L O L
E E
T S
(A) +, –,+, –,–, +, (B) +, –,+, –,+, –,
L L x
(C) O x (D) O (C) +, +,–, +,–, –, (D) –, +,+, –,+, –,

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
 Electrostatics-1 1.43
19. The charge per unit length of the four quadrant of 23. Three charges are placed as shown in fig if the electric
the ring is 2, –2,  and – respectively. The electric potential energy of system is zero, then Q : q-
field at the centre is -

(A) – 2 R î
0

 ˆ
(B) 2 R j Q 2 Q 2
0 (A) q  1 (B) q  1

2 Q 1 Q 1 1
(C) î (C) q  2 (D) q  2
20 R 4
(D) None
24. Four equal charges +q are placed at four corners
20. A uniform horizontal electric field E is established in of a square with its centre of origin and lying in yz
the space between two large vertical parallel plates. plane. The electrostatic potential energy of a fifth
A small conducting sphere of mass m is suspended charge +q varies or x-axis as
in the field from a string of lengt L. If the sphere is
U U
given charge + q, then te period of oscillation of the
pendulum is (A) (B)
–x x –x x
L
(A) 2 L / g (B) 2 g  qE / m U U

(C) (D)
L –x x –x x
(C) 2 g  qE / m
25. Two particles X and Y, of equal mass and with
L unequal positive charges, are free to move and are
(D) 2 initially far away from each other. With Y at rest, X
g  (qE / m)2
2
begins to move towards it with initial velocity u.
After a long time, finally.
Section C - Electrostatic potential energy, (A) X will stop, Y will move with velocity u
Question Based on energy (B) X and Y will both move with velocities u/2 each
conservation and Angular
Momentum conservation,
(C) X will stop, Y will move with velocity < u
Potential energy for a system (D) both will move with velocities <u/2
of charged particles
21. When a negative charge is released and moves in 26. Three charges Q, + q and + q are placed at the
electric field, it moves toward a position of vertices of a right angled isosceles triangle as shown
(A) lower electric potential and lower potential energy in figure. The net electrostatic energy of the
(B) lower electric potential and higher potential energy configuartion is zero if Q equal to
(C) higher electric potential and lower potential energy
(D) higher electric potential and higher potential energy Q

22. Two identical particles of mass m carry a charge Q

each. Initially one is at rest on a smooth horizontal
plane and the other is projected along the plane
directly towards first particle from a large distance
+q +q
with speed v. The closed distance of approach be
a
1 Q2 1 4Q 2
(A) (B)
40 mv 40 mv 2 q 2q
(A) (B)
1 2 2 2
1 2Q 2 1 3Q 2
(C) (D) (C) –2q (D) +q
40 mv 2 40 mv 2

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
1.44 Theory and Exercise Book
27. Three point charges q, –2 q and –2 q are placed at 31. If mass of the electron = 9.1 × 10–31 Kg. Charge on the
the vertices of an equilateral triangle of side a. The electron = 1.6 × 10–19 coulomb and g = 9.8 m/s2. Then
work done by some external force to increase their the intensity of the electric field required to balance
separation to 2 a will be the weight of an electron is-
1 2q 2 (A) 5.6 × 10-9 N/C (B) 5.6 × 10–11 N/C
(A) . (B) negative –8
(C) 5.6 × 10 N/C (D) 5.6 × 10–7 N/C
40 a

1 3q 2 32. When charge of 3 coulomb is placed in a Uniform

(C) zero (D) .
40 a electric field, it experiences a force of 3000 newton,
within this field, potential difference between two
28. A particle of mass m and charge q is projected points separated by a distance of 1 cm is-
 (A) 10 Volt (B) 90 Volt
vertically upwards. A uniform electric field E is acted
(C) 1000 Volt (D) 3000 Volt.
vertically downwards. The most appropriate graph
between potential energy U (gravitational plus
electrostatic) and height h (<< radius of earth) is 33. Three equal charges are placed at the three corners
(assume U to be zero on surface of earth.) of an isosceles triangle as shown in the figure. The
U U statement which is true for electric potential V and
the field intensity E at the centre of the triangle is-

(A) (B)
h h

U U

(A) V = 0, E = 0 (B) V = 0, E  0
(C) (D) (C) V  0 , E =0 (D) V  0, E  0
h h
34. Electric potential is a -
(A) Vector quantity
Section D - Electric Potential, Relation
(B) Scalar quantity
between E and V., Potential due
to point charge, Rod, Ring, disc, (C) Neither vector Nor scalar
Question Based on Electric field (D) Fictious quantity
intensity, and electric potential,
Questions Based on electric
field lines 35. ABC is equilateral triangle of side 1m. Charges are
29. If Q =2 coloumb and force on it is F=100 newtons, placed at its corners as shown in fig. O is the mid-
Then the value of field intensity will be - point of side BC the potential at point (O) is-
(A) 100 N/C (B) 50 N/C
(C) 200 N/C (D) 10 N/C

30. Four equal but like charge are placed at four corners of
a square. The electric field intensity at the center of the
square due to any one charge is E, then the resultant
electric field intensity at centre of square will be :
(A) Zero (B) 4E
(C) E (D) 1/2E (A) 2.7 × 103 V (B) 1.52 × 105 V
(C) 1.3 × 103 V (D) – 1.52 × 105 V

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
 Electrostatics-1 1.45

36. Uniform electric field of magnitude 100 V/m in space 41. If the given figure shows equipotential surfaces, then
is directed along the line y = 3 + x. Find the potential the magnitude of electric field is
difference between point A(3, 1) & B(1, 3) 80V
60V
(A) 100 V (B) 200 2 V 40V
20V
(C) 200 V (D) 0
30°
Section E - Equipotential surface 10cm

37. An equipotential surface and a line of force :

(A) never intersect each other
(A) 50 N/C (B) 100 N/C
(B) intersect at 45°
(C) 200 M/C (D) 400 N/C
(C) intersect at 60°
(D) intersect at 90° 42. An equipotential surface is that surface -
(A) On which each and every point has the same
38. The equation of an equipotential line in an electric potential
field is y = 2x, then the electric field strength vector (B) Which has negative potential
at (1, 2) may be (C) Which has positive potential
(D) Which has zero potential
(A) 4iˆ  3ˆj (B) 4iˆ  8ˆj

(C) 8iˆ  4ˆj (D) –8iˆ  4ˆj Section F - Electric field and electric
potential due to electric dipole,
Dipole in electric field (Torque,
39. The electric field in region is given by : potential energy), Angular SHM
for dipole, Force on electric
E = (4axy z ) i + (2ax2 z ) j + (ax2y / z ) k , dipole in Non-uniform electric
field
where a is a positive constant. The equation of an 43. A and B are two points on the axis and the perpendicular
equipotential surface will be of the form - bisector respectively of an electric dipole. A and B are
(A) z = constant / [x3y2] far away from the dipole and at equal distance from it.
(B) z = constant / [xy2]  
The field at A and B are E A and E B .
(C) z = constant / [x4y2]
(D) None  
(A) E A  E B
 
40. Figure shows three spherical and equipotential (B) E A  2 E B
surfaces 1, 2 and 3 around a point charge q. The  
(C) E A  –2 E B
potential difference V! – V2 = V2 – V3. If t1 and t2
be the distance between them, then 1  
(D) | E B | = |EA|, and E B is perpendicular to E A
3 2
2
1
q 44. If an electric dipole is kept in a unifrom electric field,
t2 t1
Then it will experience
(A) a force
(B) a couple and mover
(C) a couple and rotates
(A) t1 = t2 (B) t1>t2 (D) a force and moves.
(C) t1 < t2 (D) t1  t2

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
1.46 Theory and Exercise Book

45. An electric dipole consists of two opposite charges each 49. The electric potential at a point due to an electric
of magnitude 1 × 10–6 C separated by a distance 2cm. dipole will be.
The dipole is placed in an external field of    
10 × 105N/C. The maximum torque on the dipole is - p.r p.r
(A) k (B) k
(A) 0.2 × 10–3 N-m (B) 1.0 × 10–3 N-m r3 r2
(C) 2 × 10-2 N-m (D) 4 × 10–3 N-m
   
k(p  r ) k(p  r )
(C) (D)
46. The ratio of the electric field due to an electric dipole r r2
on its axis and on the perpendicular bisector of the
50. A dipole consists of two particles one with charge
dipole is-
+1 C and mass 1kg and the other with charge
(A) 1 : 2 (B) 2 : 1
–1C and mass 2kg separated by a distance of 3m.
(C) 1 : 4 (D) 4 : 1
For small oscillations about its equilibrium position,
the angular frequency, when placed in a uniform
47. 4 charges are placed each at a distance ‘a’ from
electric field of 20kV/m is
origin. The dipole moment of configuration is
(A) 0.1 rad/s (B) 1.1 rad/s
y
3q
(C) 10 rad/s (D) 2.5 rad/s
x
–2q –2q 51. Two short electric dipoles are placed as shown. The
q
energy of electric interaction between these dipoles
(A) 2qajˆ (B) 3qajˆ will be
P1
(C) 2aq[iˆ  ˆj] (D) none
r

48. The region surrounding a stationary electric dipole has- P2

(A) electric field only 2 kP1P2 cos  2 kP1P2 cos 

(A) (B)
(B) magnetic field only r3 r3
(C) both electric and magnetic fields
2 kP1P2 sin  4 kP1P2 cos 
(D) neither electric nor magnetic field (C) (D)
r3 r3

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
 Electrostatics-1 1.47

Exercise - 2 (Level-I) Objective Problems | JEE Main

Section A - Coloumb's law, Electrostatic 5. Two free positive charges 4q and q are a distance l
Equillibrium + Properties of apart. What charge Q is needed to achieve
Charge equilibrium for the entire system and where should
1. A charged particle having some mass is resting in it be placed form charge q ?
equilibrium at a height H above the centre of a 4 l
uniformly charged non-conducting horizontal ring (A) Q  q (negative)at
9 3
of radius R. The force of gravity acts downwards.
The equilibrium of the particle will be stable - 4 l
(B) Q  q (positive) at
9 3
(A) for all values of H (B) only if H > R / 2
l
(C) only if H < R / 2 (D) only if H = R / 2 (C) Q = q (positive) at
3
l
2. Find the force experienced by the (D) Q = q (negative) at
3
semicircular rod charged with a
charge q, placed as shown in figure. 6. Two identical positive charges are fixed on the y-axis,
Radius of the wire is R and the R
at equal distances from the origin O. A particle with a
infinitely long line of charge with linear negative charge starts on the x-axis at a large distance
density  is passing through its centre from O, moves along the +x-axis, passes through O
and perpendicular to the plane of wire. and moves far away from O. Its acceleration a is taken
as positive along its direction of motion. The particle’s
q q acceleration a is plotted against its x-coordinate. Which
(A) (B)
22  0 R 2
 0R of the following best represents the plot ?
a a
q q
(C) (D) 4 R x x
42  0 R 0 (A) O (B) O

3. Two fixed charges 4Q (positive) and Q (negative) a

a
are located at A and B, the distance AB being 3 m.
x
+4Q –Q (C) O x (D) O
A 3m B
(A) The point P where the resultant field due to
both is zero is on AB outside AB. Section B - Electric field, Questions on
(B) The point P where the resultant field due to constant electric field, Electric
both is zero is on AB inside AB. field due to uniformly charged
(C) If a positive charge is placed at P and displaced Rod, Time period of SHM +
Electrostatics, Electric field due
slightly along AB it will execute oscillations.
to uniformly charged Ring, disc,
(D) If a negative charge is placed at P and displaced sheet
slightly along AB it will execute oscillation. 7. A wheel having mass m has charges +q and –q on
diametrically opposite points. It remains in
4. Select the correct statement : (Only force on a equilibrium on a rough inclined plane in the presence
particle is due to electric field) of uniform vertical electric field E =
(A) A charged particle always moves along the mg +q
electric line of force. (A) q E
(B) A charged particle may move along the line of –q

force mg
(C) A charge particle never moves along the line of (B) 2q
force
(D) A charged particle moves along the line of force mg tan 
(C) 2q (D) none
only if released from rest.

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
1.48 Theory and Exercise Book

8. An electric charge 10–8 C is placed at the point E E

(4m, 7m, 2m). At the point (1m, 3m, 2m), the electric
(A) potential will be 18 V
(B) field has no Y-component (A) (B)
(C) field will be along Z-axis Z
O Z O L
(D) potential will be 1.8 V 2 L 2
E E

9. An equilateral triangle wire frame of side L having

3 point charges at its vertices is kept in x-y plane as
shown. Component of electric field due to the (C) (D)
configuration in z direction at (0, 0, L) is [origin is Z O L Z
O L 2
centroid of triangle]
13. The given diagram shows two infinite line of charges
q y
having equal (in magnitude) linear charge density but
with opposite sign. The direction of electric field at
x any point on x-axis for (x>0) is given by the unit vector
q –2q
y

9 3 kq
(A) (B) zero
8L2
x
O
9 kq
(C) (D) None
8 L2

10. Two equal negative charges are fixed at the points

[0, a] and [0, –a] on the y-axis. A positive charge Q (A) cos iˆ  sin ˆj (B) î
is released from rest at the points [2a, 0] on the
(C) ĵ (D)  sin iˆ  sin ˆj
x-axis. The charge Q will -
(A) execute simple harmonic motion about the origin
(B) move to the origin and remain at rest 14. A small sphere of mass m and carrying a charge q
is attached to one end of an insulating thread of
(C) move to infinity
length a, the other end of which is fixed at (0,0) as
(D) execute oscillatory but not simple harmonic motion.
showing in figure. There exists a uniform electric
 
11. A particle of charge 1C & mass 1 gm moving with field E  E0 ˆj in the region. The minimum velocity
a velocity of 4m/s is subjected to a uniform electric which should be given to the sphere at (a, 0) in the
field of magnitude 300 V/m for 10 sec. Then it’s direction shown so that it is able to complete the
final speed cannot be : circle around the origin is (There is no gravity)
(A) 0.5 m/s (B) 4 m/s 5qE 0 a
(C) 3 m/s (D) 6 m/s (A)
m
Y
12. Four equal positive charges are fixed at the vertices 3qE 0 a
(B) v
a square of side L. z-axis is perpendicular to the m
plane of the square. The point z = 0 is the point x
qE0 a O
where the diagonals of the square intersect each (C)
m
other. The plot of electric field due to the four
charges, as one moves on the z-axis is qE0 a
(D) 2
m

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
 Electrostatics-1 1.49

Section C - Electrostatic potential energy, 19. Two point charges of +Q each have been placed at
Question Based on energy the positions (–a/2, 0, 0) and (a/2, 0, 0). The locus
conservation and Angular of the points in YZ plane where –Q charge can be
Momentum conservation, placed such the that total electrostatic potential
Potential energy for a system
energy of the system can become equal to zero, is
of charged particles
represented by which of the following equations ?
15. Two positively charged particles X and Y are initially (A) Z2 + (Y – a)2 = 2a
far away from each other and at rest. X begins to (B) Z2 + (Y – a)2 = 27a2/4
move towards Y with some initial velocity. The total (C) Z2 + Y2 = 15a2 / 4
momentum and energy of the system are p and E. (D) None
(A) If Y is fixed, both p and E are conserved
(B) If Y is fixed, E is conserved, but not p 20. Two identical particles of charge q each are
(C) If both are free to move, p is conserved but not E connected by a massless spring of force constant
(D) If both are free, E is conserved, but not p k. They are placed over a smooth horizontal surface.
They are released when the separation between
16. Mid way between the two equal and similar charges, them is r and spring is unstretched. If maximum
we placed the third equal and similar charge. Which extension of the spring is r, value of k is (neglect
of the following statements is correct, concerned to gravitational effect)
the equilibrium along the line joining the charges ? q q
(A) The third charge experienced a net force inclined k
to the line joining the charges
(B) The third charge is in stable equilibrium
(C) The third charge is in unstable equilibrium q 1 q 1
(D) The third charge experiences a net force (A) 4r  r (B) 2r  r
0 0
perpendicular to the line joining the charges
2q 1
17. A charged particle of charge Q is held fixed and (C) r  r (D) none of these
another charged particle of mass m and charge q (of 0

the same sign) is released from a distance r. The

impulse of the force exerted by the external agent Section D - Electric Potential, Relation
on the fixed charge by the time distance between Q between E and V., Potential due
and q becomes 2r is - to point charge, Rod, Ring, disc,
Question Based on Electric field
Qq Qqm intensity, and electric potential,
(A) 4 mr (B) 4 0 r
0 Questions Based on electric
field lines
Qqm Qqm
(C)  0 r (D) 20 r 21. The diagram shows a small bead of mass m carrying
charge q. The bead can freely move on the smooth
fixed ring placed on a smooth horizontal plane. In the
18. Two particles of same mass and charge are thrown in
same plane a charge +Q has also been fixed as
the same direction along the horizontal with same velocity
shown. The potential at the point P due to +Q is V.
v from two different heights h1 and h2 (h1 < h2). Initially
they were located on the same vertical line. Choose the The velocity with which the bead should projected
correct alternative. from the point P so that it can complete a circle should
(A) Both the particles will lie on a vertical line until be greater than
either of the ball hits the ground g
6qV X
(B) Acceleration of the centre of mass of two (A)
m +Q
P
particles will be g downwards a 4a
(C) Horizontal displacement of the particle lying at qV
h1 is less and the particle lying at h2 is more than the (B)
value, which would had been in the absence of m
charges on them.
3qV
(D) All of these (C) (D) none
m

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
1.50 Theory and Exercise Book
22. The diagram shows three infinitely long uniform line 26. The electric potential decreases uniformly from V
charges placed on the X, Y and Z axis. The work to –V along X-axis in a coordinate system as we
done in moving a unit positive charge from (1, 1, 1) moves from a point (–x0, 0) to (x0, 0), then the
to (0, 1, 1) is equal to - electric field at the origin.
Y (A) must be equal to V/x0
(B) may be equal to V/x0
(C) must be greater than V/x0
X (D) may be less than V/x0

Z
Section E - Equipotential surface
(A) ( ln 2) / 20 (B) ( ln 2) / 0 27. Figure shows two equipotential lines in XY plane for an
(C) (3 ln 2) / 20 (D) None electric field. The scales are marked. The X-component
Ex and Y-component Ey of the electric field in the space
23. Let V be electric potential and E the magnitude of between these equipotential lines are respectively.
the electric field. At a given position, which of the
statement is true ? 3
(A) E is always zero where V is zero

Y(in cm)
(B) V is always zero where E is zero 2
lt
(C) E can be zero where V is non zero vo
2 lt
1 vo
(D) E is always nonzero where V is nonzero 4
0
24. Variation of electrostatic potential along x-direction 2 4 6 8
is shown in the graph. The correct statement about X(in cm)
electric field is
(A) +100 Vm-1, –200 Vm-1
(B) +200 Vm-1, +100 Vm-1
v
(C) –100 Vm-1, +200 Vm-1
(D) –200 Vm-1, –100 Vm-1
A B C
x Section F - Electric field and electric
(A) x component at point B is maximum potential due to electric dipole,
(B) x component at point A is towards positive x axis Dipole in electric field (Torque,
potential energy), Angular SHM
(C) x component at poin C is along negative x-axis
for dipole, Force on electric
(D) x component at point C is along positive x-axis dipole in Non-uniform electric
field
25. The figure shows a nonconducting ring which has 28. An electric dipole is kept on the axis of a uniformly charged
positive and negative charge non uniformly ring at distance R / 2 from the centre of the ring. The
distributed on it such that the total charge is zero.
direction of the dipole moment is along the axis. The dipole
Which of the following statements is true ?
-- moment is P, charge of the ring is Q and radius of the ring
+ --
is R. The force on the dipole is nearly
+
+++ + +++ +

-
--
-- 4kPQ 4 kPQ
-- (A) (B)
O
--- 3 3R 2
3 3 R3
--
++

-- axis
++ -- 2 kPQ
(C) (D) zero
(A) The potential at all the points on the axis will be zero. 3 3 R3
(B) The electric field at all the points on the axis
will be zero. 29. Point P lies on the axis of a dipole. If the dipole is
(C) The direction of electric field at all points on rotated by 90º anticlock wise, the electric field vector
the axis will be along the axis 
E at P will rotate by
(D) If the ring is placed inside a uniform external
(A) 90º clock wise (B) 180º clock wise
electric field then net torque and force acting on
(C) 90º anti clock wise (D) none
the ring would be zero.

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
 Electrostatics-1 1.51

30. The dipole moment of a system of charge +q 34. In space of horizontal EF(E = (mg)/q) exist as
distributed uniformly on an arc of radius R shown in figure and a mass m attached at the end
subtending an angle /2 at its centre where another of a light rod. If mass m is released from the position
charge –q is placed is. shown in figure find the angular velocity of the rod
when it passes through the bottom most position.
2 2qR 2qR
(A) (B)
 
=45º mg
E= q
qR 2qR
(C) (D) m
  m
+q

31. A large sheet carries uniform surface charge density

. A rod of length 2l has a linear charge density  on g 2g
(A) (B)
one half and – on the second half. The rod is hinged l l
at mid point O and makes an angle  with the normal
to the sheet. The torque experienced by the rod is 3g 5g
(C) (D)
(A) 0 l l

l 2
(B) sin  35. A particle of mass 1 kg & charge 1/3  C is projected
20 + towards a non conducting fixed spherical shell having
+
+ the same charge uniformly distributed on its surface.
l 2 +
Find the minimum initial velocity of projection required
(C) sin  +
0 +
if the particle just grazes the shell.
+
+
l + V
from
(D) 2 0.5 mm
0 1 mm

32. A circular ring of radius R with uniform positive 2 2

(A) m/s (B) 2 m /s
charge density  per unit length is located in the y- 3 3
z plane with its centre at the origin O. A particle of
mass m and positive charge q is projected from the 2
(C) m/s (D) none
point P(R 3 , O, O) on the positive x-axis directly 3
q
towards O, with an initial kinetic energy 4 . 36. A simple pendulum has a length , mass of bob m.
0
(A) The particle crosses O and goes to infinity The bob is given a charge q coulomb. The pendulum
(B) The particle returns to P is suspended in a uniform horizontal electric field of
(C) The particle will just reach O strength E as shown in figure, then calculate the
time period of oscillation when the bob is slightly
(D) The particle crosses O and goes to R 3 .
displace from its mean position is
E
33. A small particle of mass m and Q
R
charge –q is placed at point P on P
x

the axis of uniformly charged ring
and released. If R >> x, the particle q,m
will undergo oscillations along the axis of symmetry
with an angular frequency that is equal to -  
   
2  
qQ qQx (A) 2 g (B)
(A) (B)  g  qE 
40 mR 3 4 0 mR 4  m 

qQ qQx   
   2
(C) (D) 2
40 mR 3 40 mR 4 (C)
2   (D)  qE 
 g – qE  g2   
 m   m

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
1.52 Theory and Exercise Book

Exercise - 2 (Level-II) Multiple Correct | JEE Advanced

Section A - Coloumb's law, Electrostatic Section B - Electric field, Questions on
Equillibrium + Properties of constant electric field, Electric
Charge field due to uniformly charged
1. Select the correct alternative : Rod, Time period of SHM +
(A) The charge gained by the uncharged body from Electrostatics, Electric field due
to uniformly charged Ring, disc,
a charged body due to conduction is equal to half of
sheet
the total charge initially present. 5. If we use permittivity , resistance R, gravitational
(B) The magnitude of charge increases with the
constant G and voltage V as fundamental physical
increase in velocity of charge
quantities, then -
(C) Charge can not exist without matter although
(A) [angular displacement] = 0R0G0V0
matter can exist without charge
(B) [Velocity] = –1R–1G0V0
(D) Between two non-magnetic substances repulsion
(C) [dipole moment] = 1R0G0V1
is the true test of electrification (electrification means
body has net charge) (D) [force] = 1R0G0V2

2. Two point charges Q and –Q/4 are separated by a 6. A particle of mass m and charge q is thrown in a
distance x. Then region where uniform gravitational field and electric
Q x –Q/4 field are present. The path of particle
(A) may be a straight line
(A) potential is zero at a point on the axis which is
(B) may be a circle
x/3 on the right side of the charge –Q/4
(B) potential is zero at a point on the axis which is x/5 (C) may be a parabola
on the left side of the charge –Q/4 (D) may be a hyperbola
(C) electric field is zero at a point on the axis which is
at a distance x on the right side of the charge –Q/4 Section C - Electrostatic potential energy,
Question Based on energy
(D) there exist two points on the axis where electric
conservation and Angular
field is zero. Momentum conservation,
Potential energy for a system
3. A negative point charge placed at the point A is of charged particles
7. Particle A having positive charge is moving directly
a a head-on towards initially stationary positively
+2q A +2q charged particle B. At the instant when A and B are
(A) in stable equilibrium along x-axis closest together.
(B) in unstable equilibrium along y-axis (A) the momenta of A and B must be equal
(C) in stable equilibrium along y-axis (B) the velocities of A and B must be equal
(D) in unstable equilibrium along x-axis (C) B would have gained less kinetic energy than A
would have lost.
4. Three point charges Q, 4Q and 16Q are placed on a (D) B would have gained the same momentum as A
straight line 9cm long. Charges are placed in such a would have lost.
way that the system has minimum potential energy.
Then 8. Which of the following is true for the figure showing
(A) 4Q and 16Q must be at the ends and Q at a electric lines of force ? (E is electrical field, V is
distance of 3 cm from the 16Q potential)
(B) 4Q and 16Q must be at the ends and Q at a (A) EA > EB B
A
distance of 6 cm from the 16Q (B) EB > EA
(C) Electric field at the position of Q is zero (C) VA > VB
Q (D) VB > VA
(D) Electric field at the position of Q is 4
0

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
 Electrostatics-1 1.53

Section D - Electric Potential, Relation 13. Which of the following statements is/are not true
between E and V., Potential due regarding a conductor?
to point charge, Rod, Ring, disc, (A) The surface of any charged conductor is an
Question Based on Electric field equipotential surface.
intensity, and electric potential, (B) when a conductor is earthed, charge always flows
Questions Based on electric field from conductor to earth.
lines
(C) Electrostatic field inside te conductor is zero.
9. Potential at a point A is 3 volt and at a point B is 7
(D) Electrostatic potential throughout the volume of
volt, an electron is moving towards A from B.
conductor is constant.
(A) It must have some K.E. at B to reach A
(B) It need not have any K.E. at B to reach A 14. Referring to the spherical equipotential lines in figure.
(C) to reach A it must have more than or equal to  
then E =f(r). and E – pattern, which of the following
4eV K.E. at B. correct option?
(D) when it will reach A, it will have K.E. more
10V
then or at least equal to 4eV if it was released from
rest at B. 30V
m
V E-lines
c
60V 60
10. Four identical charges are placed at the points r
10 V-lines
(1, 0, 0), (0, 1, 0), (–1, 0, 0) and (0, –1, 0). cm 20cm

(A) The potential at the origin is zero.

(B) The field at the origin is zero.
(C) The potential at all points on the z-axis, other Equipotential surface Equipotential surface
than the origin, is zero. (a) (b) (c)

(D) The field at all points on the z-axis, other than  6  6

the origin acts along the z-axis. (A) E  r Vm-1
ˆ (B) E  Vm-1
r2 r2
(C) E must be outward (D) E inward
Section E - Equipotential surface
11. Two infinite sheets of uniform 15. In a uniform electric field, equipotential surfaces must –
charge density +  and –  are (A) be plane surface
parallele to each other as shown (B) be normal to the direction of the field
in the figure. Electric field at the (C) be spaced such that surfaces having equal differ-
(A) points to the left or to the right of the sheets is zero ences in potential are separated by equal distance
(B) midpoint between the sheets is zero (D) have increasing potentials in the direction of the field
(C) midpoint of the sheets is /0 and is directed
towards right
Section F - Electric field and electric
potential due to electric dipole,
(D) midpoint of the sheets is 2/0 and is directed
Dipole in electric field (Torque,
towards right potential energy), Angular SHM
for dipole, Force on electric dipole
12. Figure shows a set of equipotential surfaces. There in Non-uniform electric field
are a few points marked on them. An electron is 16. For the situation shown in the figure below (assume r
being moved from one point to other. Which of the >> lenth of dipole) mark out the correct statement(s).
following statements is/are correct? 
p (Small dipole)
5V 10V 15V 20V 25V

B E
Q
D
A r
C (A) Force acting on the dipole is zero
x-axis
(B) Force acting on the dipole is approximately
pQ
(A) The electric field is directed along + x-axis. & is acting upward.
4 0 r 3
(B) Work done by the electric field, in moving the pQ
electron form B to C, is positive. (C) Torque acting on the dipole is in
40 r 2
(C) Work done by the electric field, in moving the clockwise direction
electron form C to D is same as from D to E. pQ
(D) As the electron moves from E to A, the potential (D) Torque acting on the dipole is in
40 r 2
energy increases. anti-clockwise direction

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
1.54 Theory and Exercise Book

Exercise - 3 | Level-I Subjective | JEE Advanced

Section A - Coloumb's law, Electrostatic Section B - Electric field, Questions on

Equillibrium + Properties of constant electric field, Electric
Charge field due to uniformly charged
Rod, Time period of SHM +
1. A negative point charge 2q and a positive charge q Electrostatics, Electric field due
are fixed at a distance l apart. Where should a positive to uniformly charged Ring, disc,
test charge Q be placed on the line connecting the sheet
charge for it to be in equilibrium? What is the nature 8. Six charges are placed at the vertices of a regular
of the equilibrium with respect to longitudinal hexagon as shown in the figure. Find the electric
motions? field on the line passing through O and perpendicular
to plane of the figure as a function of distance x
from point O.
2. The distance between two fixed positive charges 4e
and e is . How should a third charge 'q' be arranged +Q –Q

for it to be in equilibrium ? Under what condition

will equilibrium of the charge 'q' be stable (for –Q +Q
O
displacement on the line joining 4e and e) or will it
+Q –Q
be unstable ? a

3. Two particles A and B, each having a charge Q are 9. A charge + 10–9 C is located at the origin in free space
placed a distance d apart. Where should a particle & another charge Q at (2, 0, 0). If the X-component
of charge q be placed on the perpendicular bisector of the electric field at (3, 1, 1) is zero, calculate the
of AB so that it experiences maximum force ? What value of Q. Is the Y-component zero at (3, 1, 1) ?
is the magnitude of the maximum force ?
10. A charge of 8 mC is located at the origin. Calculate
the work done by external agent in taking a small
4. A thin circular wire of radius r has a charge Q. If a
charge of –2 × 10–9 C from a point A (0, 0, 0.03 m)
point charge q is placed at the centre of the ring, to a point B(0, 0.04m, 0) via a point C(0, 0.06m,
then find the increase in tension in the wire. 0.09m).

5. Two small identical balls P and Q, each of mass (Question 11to12)

0.866 g, carry identical charges and are suspended An electron is projected as shown, with kinetic energy
by two threads of equal length 50 cm each from the K, at an angle  = 45° between two charged plates.
same point. At equilibrium, they are separated by a Ignore gravity.
distance of 50 cm. Find the charge on each ball
(in nearest integer in C).

6. Two identicaly charged spheres are suspended by

strings of equal length. The strings make and angle 45°
+ + + + + + + + + + +
of 30° with each other. When suspednded in a liquid
of density 0.8 g/cc, the angle remains same. What is 11. The magnitude of the electric field, so that the electron
te dielectric constant of the liquid? (The density of just fails to strike the upper plate, should be greater than
the material of the spheres is 1.6 g/c.c.)
12. At what distance from the starting point will the
electron strike the lower plate?
7. Two point charges + 4C and –10 C are placed 10
cm apart in air. A dielectric slab of large length and 13. A circular ring carries a uniformly distributed positive
breadth but of thickeness 5 cm is placed between charge and lies in X-Y plane with center at origin of
them. Calculate the force of attraction between the coordinate system. If at a point (0,0,z) the electric field
charges, if the relative permittivity of dielectric is 9. is E, then draw the graph.

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
 Electrostatics-1 1.55

(Questions 14 to 15.) 19. Three charges 0.1 coulomb each are placed on the
A charged cork ball of mass m = 16 g is suspended corners of an equilateral triangle of side 1 m. If the
from a light string in the presence of a uniform electric energy is supplied to this system at the rate of 1 kW,
field as shown in the figure. When how much time would be required to move one of
1  the charges onto the midpoint of the line joining the
E   ˆi  2ˆj  N / C, the ball is in equiligrium at the
2  other two ?
angle of 37°. find W if
Section D - Electric Potential, Relation
between E and V, Potential due
to point charge, Rod, Ring, disc,
y Question Based on Electric field
E intensity, and electric potential,
Questions Based on electric
field lines
x
20. Consider the configuration of a system of four
charges each of value +q. Find the work done by
q external agent in changing the configuration of the
system from figure (i) to fig (ii).
14. The charge on the ball is W×10-2 C.
+q +q +q
15. The tension in the string is W×10-2 N.
a
a
+q +q
Section C - Electrostatic potential energy, +q +q
Question Based on energy
a +q
conservation and Angular fig(i) fig(ii)
Momentum conservation,
Potential energy for a system
of charged particles
16. A charge +Q is uniformly distributed over a thin 21. Eight equal point charges each of charge 'q' and
ring with radius R. A negative point charge –Q and mass 'm' are placed at eight corners of a cube of
mass m starts from rest at a point far away from the side 'a'.
centre of the ring and moves towards the centre. q a
q
Find the velocity of this particle at the moment it
passes through the centre of the ring. q
q
17. A particle of mass m, charge q > 0 and initial kinetic
q
energy K is projected from infinity toward a heavy q
nucleus of charge Q assumed to have a fixed position. q
A q
(a) If the aim is perfect, how close to the centre of
the nucleus is the particle when it comes (i) Find out potential energy of charge system
instantaneously to rest ? (ii) Find out work done by external agent against
electrostatic forces and by electrostatic forces to
(b) With a particular imperfect aim the particle's increase all sides of cube from a to 2a
closest approach to nucleus is twice the distance (iii) If all the charges are released at rest then find out
determined in (a) Determine speed of particle at the their speed when they are at the corners of cube of
closest distance of approach.
side 2a.
(iv) If keeping all other charges fix, charge of corner
18. Two identical particles of mass m carry charge Q each.
Initially one is at rest on a smooth horizontal plane and 'A' is released then find out its speed when it is at
the other is projected along the plane directly towards infinite distance ?
the first from a large distance with an initial speed V. (v) If all charges are released at rest then find out
Find the closest distance of approach. their speed when they are at a very large distance
from each other.

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
1.56 Theory and Exercise Book
Questions No. 22 to 23 27. A charge 'q' is carried from
A nonconducting disk of a radius a and uniform a point A (r, 135°) to point A B
positive surface charge density  is placed on the B(r, 45°) following a path
r 90° r
ground, with its axis vertical. A particle of mass m which is a quadrant of
and positive charge q is dropped, along the axis of circle of radius 'r'. If the
 P
the disk, from a height H with zero initial velocity. dipole moment is P . then find out the work done by
The particle has q / m  40g / . external agent ?
22. Find the value of H if the particle just reaches the disk.

28. Find out force experienced by short dipole P0 is following
23. find its equilibrium position. different arrangements as shown in figures. [Assume
 
point charge is Q, P0  q 0 (2a) and P  q(2a) ]
Section E - Equipotential surface
y
24. The figure shows three infinite non-conducting plates
P0 Q
of charge perpendicular to the plane of the paper with
(i)
charge per unit area +, +2 and –. Find the ratio of r axis x
the net electric field at that point A to that at point B.
+ + P0 Q
+ +
+ + (ii)
+ A + B r
+ +
equitorial
+ +
+ + P0 P
+
(iii)
r axial for P0
5m 5m
P0
P
25. A particle of mass m and negative charge q is thrown (iv)
in a gravity free space with speed u from the point A r equitorial for P0
on the large non conducting charged sheet with
surface charge density , as shown in figure. Find 29. A dipole is placed at origin of coordinate system as
the maximum distance from A on sheet where the shown in figure, find the electric field at point P(0, y).
particle can strike. y

P (0, y)

u P 45° x

A 30. Electric field given by the Y

 (0, L)
ˆ ˆ
vector E  xi  yj is present
in the XY plane. A small ring
Section F - Electric field and electric carrying charge +Q, which X
(L, 0)
potential due to electric dipole, can freely slide on a smooth
Dipole in electric field (Torque, non conducting rod, is projected along the rod from
potential energy), Angular SHM the point (0, L) such that it can reach the other end
for dipole, Force on electric of the rod. What minimum velocity should be given
dipole in Non-uniform electric to the ring ? (Assume zero gravity)
field
31. Two dipoles p1 and p2 are placed along the same axis
26. Find out the magnitude of electric field intensity at at a distance x apart as shown in figure. What is the
point (2, 0, 0) due to a dipole of dipole moment, magnitude of the force of interaction? What is the
 nature of force, attractive or repulsive?
P  iˆ  3ˆj kept at origin ? Also find out the
P1 P2
potential at that point.
x

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
 Electrostatics-1 1.57

Exercise - 3 | Level-II Subjective | JEE Advanced

Section A - Coloumb's law, Electrostatic Section B - Electric field, Questions on

Equillibrium + Properties of constant electric field, Electric
Charge field due to uniformly charged
1. A rigid insulated wire frame in the form of a right angled Rod, Time period of SHM +
Electrostatics, Electric field due
triangle ABC, is set in a vertical plane as shown. Two
to uniformly charged Ring, disc,
bead of equal masses m each and carrying charges q1 sheet
& q2 are connected by a cord of length l & slide without
friction on the wires. Considering the case when the
5. A clock face has negative charges –q, –2q, –3q,
beads are stationary, determine.
..........., –12q fixed at the position of the
(a) The angle . corresponding numerals on the dial. The clock hands
(b) The tension in the cord & do not disturb the net field due to point charges. At
(c) The normal reaction on the beads. If the cord is what time does the hour hand point in the same
now cut, what are the values of the charges for direction is electric field at the centre of the dial.
which the beads continue to remain stationary.
6. Find the electric field at Y
A
–q– – + +
centre of semicircular ring – ++q
P ––
q1 shown in figure ––
– +
+ X
l q Q –
2 R
30° 60°
B C 7. A uniform electric field E exists between two metal
Horizon
plates one negative and other positive. the plate length
is  and the separation of the plates is d.
Question No. (2 to 3) (i) An electron and a proton start from the negative
Two identical He-filled spherical balloons each plate and positive plate, respectively, and go to
carrying a charge q are tied to a weight W with opposite plates. Which one of them wins this race?
strings and float in equilibrium, as shown in Figure. (ii) An electron and a proton start moving parallel to
the plates toward the other end form the midpoint
of the separtion of plates at one end of the plates.,
Which of the two will have greater deviation when
they come out of the plates if they start with the
(a) same initial velocity,
(b) same initial kinetic energy, and
(c) same initial momentum.

2. Find the magnitude of q, assuming that the charge Section C - Electrostatic potential energy,
on each balloon acts as if it were concentrated at Question Based on energy
the center. conservation and Angular
Momentum conservation,
3. Find the volume of each balloon. Take the density Potential energy for a system
of He as He and density of air as a. Ignore the of charged particles
weight of the unfilled balloons.
8. 2 small balls having the same mass & charge &
4. Three particles, each of mass m and carrying a charge located on the same vertical at heights h1 & h2 are
q each, are suspended from a common point by thrown in the same direction along the horizontal at
insulating massless strings, each of length L. If the the same velocity v. The 1st ball touches the ground
particles are in equilibrium and are located at the at a distance l from the initial vertical. At what height
corners of an equilateral triangle of side a, calculate will the 2nd ball be at this instant? The air drag & the
the charge q on each particle. Assume L>>a. charges induced should be neglected.

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
1.58 Theory and Exercise Book
9. Small identical balls with equal charges are fixed at Section E - Equipotential surface
vertices of regular 2004 - gon with side a. At a certain 14. Two spherical bobs of same mass & radius having
instant, one of the balls is released & a sufficiently long equal charges are suspended from the same point
time interval later, the ball adjacent to the first released by strings of same length. The bobs are immersed
ball is freed. The kinetic energies of the released balls in a liquid of relative permittivity r & density 0.
are found to differ by K at a sufficiently long distance Find the density  of the bob for which the angle of
from the polygon. Determine the charge q of each part. divergence of the strings to be the same in the air &
 E0x  in the liquid ?
10. The electric field in a region is given by E  i.
l
Find the charge contained inside a cubical volume Section F - Electric field and electric
potential due to electric dipole,
bounded by the surfaces x = 0, x = a, y = 0, y = a, z = 0 Dipole in electric field (Torque,
and z = a. Take E0 = 5 × 103 N/C, l = 2cm and a = 1 potential energy), Angular SHM
cm. for dipole, Force on electric dipole
in Non-uniform electric field
11. 2 small metallic balls of radii R1 & R2 are kept in 15. A nonconducting ring of mass m and radius R is
vacuum at a large distance compared to the radii. Find charged as shown. The charged density i.e. charge
the ratio between the charges on the 2 balls at which per unit length is . It is then placed on a rough
electrostatic energy of the system is minimum. Total nonconducting horizontal surface plane.
charge of balls is constant. y
+
++
+
+
Section D - Electric Potential, Relation -- x
between E and V, Potential due - --
-
to point charge, Rod, Ring, disc,

Question Based on Electric field At time t = 0, a uniform electric field E  E0i is
intensity, and electric potential,
Questions Based on electric switched on and the ring start rolling without sliding.
field lines Determine the friction force (magnitude and
direction) acting on the ring, when it starts moving.
12. Two concentric rings of radii r and 2r are placed
with centre at origin. Two charges +q each are fixed 16. Figure shows two dipole moments parallel to each
at the diametrically opposite points of the rings as other and placed at a distance x apart. What is the
magnitude of force of interaction? What is the nature
shown in figure. Smaller ring is now rotated now
of force, attractive or repulsive?
rotated by an angle 90° about Z-axis then it is again
rotated by 90° about Y-axis. Find the work done by
electrostatic forces in each step. If finally larger ring P1 P2
is rotated by 90° about X-axis, find the total work x
required to perform all three steps.
y 17. Four charge the particles ewach having charge Q are
+q fixed at the conrners of the base (at A,B, C, and D) of
+q a square pyramid with slant length a (AP = BP = DP =
x PC = a). A charge –Q is fixed at point P. A dipole with
dipole moment P is placed at the center of base and
+q perpendicular to its plane as shown in figure.
z +q
P
13. Two identical balls of charges q1 & q2 initially have
D a
equal velocity of the same magnitude and direction. C
After a uniform electric field is applied for some 2
time, the direction of the velocity of the first ball a
changes by 60° and the magnitude is reduced by O
half. The direction of the velocity of the second ball B
A a
changes there by 90°. In what proportion will the
(a) the force on dipole due to charge particles, and
velocity of the second ball changes ?
(b) the potential energy of the system.

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
 Electrostatics-1 1.59

Exercise - 4 | Level-I Previous Year | JEE Main

1. Two point charges +8 q and –2q are located at x = 0
and x = L respectively. The location of a point on the
Y
x-axis at which the net electric field due to these two
0.1 m
point charges is zero, is: (AIEEE 2005)
(A) 2L (B) L/4 X
(C) 8L (D) 4L
1 2
2. Two thin wire rings each having a radius R are (A) 2.65 × 106 ms–1 (B) 7.02 × 1012 ms–1
placed at a distance d apart with their axes (C) 1.87 × 106 ms–1 (D) 32 × 10–19 ms–1
coinciding. The charges on the two rings are +q
and –q. The potential difference between the 5. An electric dipole is placed at an angle of 30° to a
centres of the two rings is : (AIEEE 2005) non-uniform electric field. The dipole will experience
qR (AIEEE 2006)
(A) (A) a translational force only in the direction of the field.
4 0 d 2
(B) a translational force only in a direction normal
to the direction of the field.
q 1 1  (C) a torque as well as a translational force
(B)   
2 0 R R2  d 2  (D) a torque only
(C) zero
6. The potential at a point x(measured in m ) due to
q 1 1  some charges situated on the x-axis is given by
(D)   
4 0 R
2 2
R d  V ( x)  20 /( x 2  4) volt. (AIEEE 2007)
The electric field E at x = 4m is given by
3. A charged ball B hangs from a silk thread S. which 5
(A) V / m and in the -ve x direction
makes an angle  with a large charged conducting 3
sheet P, as shown in the figure. The surface charge 5
density  of the sheet is proportional to : (B) V / m and in the +ve x direction
3
+ (AIEEE 2005)
+
10
(C) V / m and in the -ve x direction
P +
S
9
+
+ 10
(D) V / m and in the +ve x direction
+ 9
+ B

(A) cos (B) cot  7. Charges are placed on the vertices of a square as

(C) sin  (D) tan  shown. Let E be the electric field and V the
potential at the centre. If the charges on A and B
4. Two insulating plates are both uniformly charged in are interchanged with those on D and C
such a way that the potential difference between them respectively, then (AIEEE 2007)

is V2  V1  20V . (ie, plate 2 is at a higher potential). q q

A B
The plates are separated by d = 0.1 m and can be
treated as infinitely large. An electron is released from
rest on the inner surface of plate 1. What is its speed
when it hits plate 2? (AIEEE 2006) C
D
(e = 1.6 × 10–19 C, m0 = 9.11 × 10–31 kg) –q –q

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
1.60 Theory and Exercise Book

(A) E remains unchanged, V changes 12. A charge Q is placed at each of the opposite corners
of a square. A charge q is placed at each of the

(B) both E and V change other two corners. If the net electrical force on Q

(C) E and V remain unchanged Q
is zero, then the equals (AIEEE 2009)

q
(D) E change, V remains unchanged (A) 2 2 (B) –1
1
8. An electric charge 103 C is placed at the origin (C) 1 (D) 
2
(0, 0) of X-Y coordinate system. Two points A and
13. A thin semi-circular ring of radius r has a positive
B are situated at ( 2, 2) and (2, 0) the
charge q distributed uniformly over it. The net field
respectively. The potential difference between the

points A and B will be (AIEEE 2007) E at the centre O is (AIEEE 2010)
(A) 9 V (B) zero
(C) 2 V (D) 4.5 V
ĵ

9. V measured between B and C is

[AIEEE 2008]
î
I I I I O
(A)      b (B)      b  q q ˆj
  (A) ĵ (B) 
4  0 r 2
2
4  0 r 2
2

I I I q q
(C) 2  2    b  ˆ
(D) 2    b  (C)  2 2 j (D) ĵ
2  0 r 2  0 r 2
2

10. The questions contains Statements I and Statement 14. Two identical charged spheres are suspended
by strings of equal lengths. The strings make
II. of the four choice given after the statements, choose an angle of 30° with each other. When
the one that best describes the two statements. suspended in a liquid of density 0.8 g cm–3,
Statements I For a charged particle moving from the angle remains the same. If density of
point P to point Q, the net work done by an the material of the sphere is 16 g cm–3, the
electrostatic field on the paticle is independent of dielectric constant of the liquid is
[AIEEE-2010]
the path connecting point P to point Q.
(A) 4 (B) 3 (C) 2 (D) 1
Statements II The net work done by a conservative
force on an object moving along a closed loop is 15. Two positive charges of magnitude q are placed at
zero (AIEEE 2009) the ends of a side 1 of a square of side 2a. Two
(A) Statement I is true, Statement II is true. negative charges of the same magnitude are kept
(B) Statement I is true, Statement II is true; at the other corners. Starting from rest , if a charge
Statement II is not the correct explanation of Q moves from the middle of side 1 to the centre of
Statement I. square, its kinetic energy at the centre of square is
(C) Statement I is true, Statement II is true; (AIEEE 2011)
Statement II is not the correct explanation of 1 2qQ  1 
Statement I. (A) 1
40 a  
5
(D) Statement I is false, Statement II is true.
(B) zero
11. Two points P and Q are maintained at the potentials 1 2qQ  1 
of 10 V and –4V respectively. The work done in (C)  1 
40 a  5
moving 100 electrons from P to Q is (AIEEE 2009)
(A) 19  1017 J (B) 9.60  10 17 J 1 2qQ  2 
(D)  1 
(C) 2.24  1016 J (D) 2.24  1016 J 40 a  5

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
 Electrostatics-1 1.61

16. Two identical charged spheres suspended from a 20. A long cylindrical shell carries positive surface
common point by two massless strings of length l are charge  in the upper half and negative surface
initially a distance d(d << l) apart because of their charge – in the lower half. The electric field lines
mutual repulsion. The charge begins to leak from both around the cylinder will look like figure given in:
the spheres at a constant rate. As a result charges (figures are schematic and not drawn to scale)
approach each other with a velocity v. Then as fuctions [JEE Main 2015]
of distance x between them, (AIEEE 2011)
(A) v  x 1 (B) v  x 1/ 2 ++++
+

++

++ ––
(C) v  x (D) v  x 1/ 2

––
(A) ––
––––

17. Two charges, each equal to q, are kept at x = – a

and x = a on the x-axis. A particle of mass m and
q
chargeq0 = is placed at the origin. If charges q0 ++++
2 +

++

++ ––
is given a small displacement y(y<<a) along the (B)

––
––
––––
y-axis, the net force acting on the particle is
proportional to [JEE Main 2013]
(A) y (B) -y
1 1
(C) (D)  +++ +
y y +

–– +

++ –
+
(C)
–
––
––––

18. Assume that an electric field E  30x2ˆi exists in
space. Then the potential difference V A – VO,
where VO is the potential at the origin and VA the
potential at x = 2 m is : [JEE MAIN 2014]
++++
(A) – 80 J (B) 80 J +
–– +

++ – –
+

(C) 120 J (D) – 120 J

(D)
––
––––

19. A uniformly charged solid sphere of radius R has

potential V0 9measured with respect to ) on its
surface. For this sphere the equipotential surfaces 
21. An electric dipole has a fixed dipole moment P ,
3V0 5V0 3V0 V which makes angle  with respect to x-axis. When
with potentials , , and 0 have 
2 4 4 4 subjected to an electric field E1  E î , it experiences
radius R1, R2, R3 and R4 respectively. Then 
[JEE Main 2015] torque T1  k̂ . When subjected to another
(A) R1 = 0 and R2 < (R4 – R3) 
electric field E2  3E1 ĵ it experiences a torque
(B) 2R < R4  
(C) R1 = 0 and R2 > (R4 – R3) T2   T1 . The angle  is - [JEE Main 2017]
(D) R1  0 and (R2 – R1) > (R4 – R3) (A) 90° (B) 30°
(C) 45° (D) 60°

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
1.62 Theory and Exercise Book

Exercise - 4 | Level-II Previous Year | JEE Advanced

1. Positive and negative point charges of equal 4. Under the influence of the Coulomb field of
 a  a charge +Q, a charge –q is moving around it in an
magnitude are kept at  0, 0,  and  0, 0,–  ,
 2  2 elliptical orbit. Find out the correct statement(s)
respectively. The work done by the electric field [JEE 2010]
when another positive point charge is moved from (A) The angular momentum of the charge –q is
(–a, 0, 0) to (0, a, 0) is - [JEE 2007]
constant
(A) positive
(B) negative (B) The linear momentum of the charge –q is
(C) zero constant
(D) depends on the path connecting the initial and (C) The angular velocity of the charge –q is
final positions constant
(D) The linear speed of the charge –q is constant
q q 2q
2. Consider a system of three charges , and –
3 3 3
placed at points A, B and C, respectively, as shown 5. A tiny spherical oil drop carrying a net charge q is
in the figure. Take O to be the centre of the circle balanced in still air with a vertical uniform electric
of radius R and angle CAB = 60° [JEE 2008]
81
B field of strength  105 Vm 1 . When the field is
7
C
x
switched off, the drop is observed to fall with
O
60°
terminal velocity 2 × 10–3 ms–1 Given g = 9.8 ms–2,
A
viscosity of the air = 1.8 × 10–5 Ns m–2 and the
q
density of oil = 900 kg m–5, the magnitude of q is :
(A) The electric field at point O is 8  R 2 directed [JEE 2010]
0
along the negative x-axis (A) 1.6 × 10–19C
(B) The potential energy of the system is zero (B) 3.2 × 10–19C
(C) The magnitude of the force between the (C) 4.8 × 10–19C
q2 (D) 8.0 × 10–19C
charges at C and B is
54 0R2
q 6. Four point charges, each of +q are rigidly fixed at
(D) the potential at point O is 12   R the four corners of a square planar soap film of
0
side 'a'. The surface tension of the soap film is  .
3. A few electric field lines for a system of two charges the system of charges and planar film are in
Q1 and Q2 fixed at two different points on the x - axis 1 /N
are shown in the figure. These lines suggest that  q2 
equilibrium, and a = k   , where 'k' is a
  

constant. Then N is [JEE 2011]

Q1 Q2
7. A wooden block performs SHM on a frictionless
surface with frequency, v0. The block carries a
charge +Q on its surface. If now a uniform electric
(A) |Q1| > |Q2| field E is switched-on as shown, then the SHM of
(B) |Q1| < |Q2|
the block will be
(C) at a finite distance to the left of Q1 the electric
field is zero. [JEE 2011]
(D) at a finite distance to the right of Q2 the electric
field is zero. [JEE 2010]

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
 Electrostatics-1 1.63

E r  V(r)

E
+Q
(C)

0 R r

E r  V(r)

(A) of the same frequency and with shifted mean

position
(B) of the same frequency and with the same mean (D)

position 0 r
R
(C) of changed frequency and with shifted mean
position 10. Six point charges are kept at the vertices of a regular
(D) of changed frequency and with the same mean hexagon of side L. and centtre O, as shown in the
position 1 q
figure. Given that K  4 L2 , which of the
0
following statement(s) is(are) correct?
8. Two large vertical and parallel metal plates having [JEE Advance 2012]
a separation of 1 cm are connected to a DC voltage F L E
+q -q
source of potential difference X. A proton is released
P
at rest midway between the two plates. It is found
A S D
to move at 45° to the vertical JUST after release. +2q O T
-2q

Then X is nearly [JEE 2012]

R
(A) 1 × 10–5 V (B) 1 × 10–7 V
B C
+q -q
(C) 1 × 10–9 V (D) 1 × 10–10 V
(A) The electric field at O is 6K along OD.
9. Consider a thin spherical shell of radius R with its (B) The potential at O is zero.
centre at the origin, carrying uniform positive surface (C) The potential at all points on the line PR is same.
charge density. The variation of the magnitude of (D) The potential at all points on the line ST is same.

the electric field E r  and the electric potential V(r) 11. For charges Q1, Q2, Q3 and Q4 of same magnitude
with the distance r from the centre, is best are fixed along the x axis at x = -2a, -a, +a and +2a,
respectively. A positive charge q is placed on the
represented by which graph ? [JEE 2012]
 positive y axis at a distance b > 0. Four potions of
E r  V(r) the signs of these charges are given in List I. The
direction of the forces on the charge q is given in
List II. Match List I with List II and select the
(A) correct answer using the code given below the lists.
[JEE 2014]
0 R r


E r  V(r)

(B)

0 R r

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
1.64 Theory and Exercise Book

List I List II 12. The electric field E is measured at a point

P(0,0,d) generated due to various charge
P. Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4 all positive 1. +x
distributions and the dependence of E on d
Q. Q1, Q2 positive; Q3, Q4 negative 2. -x is found to be different for different charge
distributions. List-I contains different relations
R. Q1, Q4 positive; Q2, Q3 negative 3. +y
between E and d. List-II describes different
S. Q1, Q3 positive; Q2, Q4 negative 4. -y electric charge distributions, along with their
locations. Match the functions in List-I with
Code : the related charge distributions in List-II.
(A) P-3, Q-1, R-4, S-2 List – I [JEE 2018]
P. E is indpendent of d
(B) P-4, Q-2, R-3, S-1
1
(C) P-3, Q-1, R-2, S-4 Q. E
d
(D) P-4, Q-2, R-1, S-3 1
R. E
d2
1
S. E
d3
List – II
1. A point charge Q at the origin
2. A small dipole with point charges Q at
(0,0,) and –Q at (0,0,–). Take 2 << d
3. An infinite line charge coincident with the
x-axis, with uniform linear charge density .
4. Two infinite wires carrying uniform linear
Charge density parallel to the x - axis. The
one along (y = 0, z = ) has a charge density
+ and the one along (y = 0, z = – ) has a
charge density –. Take 2 << d
5. Infinite plane charge coincident with the
xy-plane with uniform surface charge density
(A) P  5 ; Q  3, 4 ; R  1 ; S  2
(B) P  5 ; Q  3, ; R  1,4 ; S  2
(C) P  5 ; Q  3, ; R  1,2 ; S  4
(D) P  4 ; Q  2, 3 ; R  1 ; S  5

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
 Electrostatics-1 1.65

Exercise - 1 Objective Problems | JEE Main

1. B 2. A 3. D 4. C 5. D 6. C 7. A
8. B 9. B 10. D 11. A 12. D 13. C 14. D
15. B 16. C 17. A 18. D 19. A 20. D 21. C
22. B 23. D 24. B 25. A 26. B 27. C 28. A
29. B 30. A 31. B 32. A 33. C 34. B 35. B
36. D 37. D 38. D 39. C 40. C 41. D 42. A
43. C 44. C 45. C 46. B 47. A 48. A 49. A
50. A 51. B

Exercise - 2 (Level-I) Objective Problems | JEE Main

1. B 2. B 3. A 4. B 5. A 6. B 7. B
8. A 9. B 10. D 11. A 12. D 13. C 14. B
15. B 16. B 17. B 18. D 19. C 20. D 21. A
22. B 23. C 24. D 25. A 26. B 27. C 28. D
29. A 30. A 31. B 32. C 33. A 34. B 35. B
36. D

Exercise - 2 (Level-II) Multiple Correct | JEE Advanced

1. C,D 2. A,B,C 3. C,D 4. B,C 5. A,B,D
6. A,C 7. B,C,D 8. A,D 9. A,C 10. B,D
11. A,C 12. B,C,D 13. A,C,D 14. A,C 15. A, B,C
16. B,C

Exercise - 3 | Level-I Subjective | JEE Advanced

1. a = l (1 +2 ), the equilibrium will be stable

2
2. from charge 4e (If q is positive stable, If q is negative unstable)
3
d 4 Qq qQ
3. , , 4. 5. 1 6. 2 7. 9 8. 0
2 2 3 3 πε0d2 8  2  0r 2
3/2
3 1 1
9. –   3 × 10–9C 10. W = Kqq0  r – r  = 1.2 J 11. K/2qD 12. 4d
 11 B A

13. Following two arguments shall lead us to the right choice.

i. Electric field at the center of the ring is zero.
ii. Electric field is directed away from the ring.
2kQ 2 Qq K Q2
14. 6 15. 5 16. 17. (a) 4  K (b) 18.
mR 0 m m 0 V 2

kq2 4Kq2  3 1 
19. 1.8 × 105 sec 20. – (3 – 2 ) 21. (i) 3   
a a  2 3

2Kq2  3 1  Kq2  3 1  2Kq2  3 1  Kq2  3 1 

(ii) Wel  a
3    (iii) 3 
2ma 
  (iv)
ma
3    (v)
ma
3   
 2 3 2 3  2 3  2 3

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
1.66 Theory and Exercise Book

4a 2 0 u 2m
22. 23. x = a/ 3 24. 0 25.
3 q

7K K 2qp
26. |E| = ,V= [where K = 1/4 0] 27.
8 4 4  0 r 2
2KP0 Q KP0 Q  6KP0P  3KP0P
28. (i) (– i ) (ii) j (iii) i (iv) (  ĵ )
r3 r3 r4 r4
kP 3 P1P2
(– i – 2j ) (QL2/2m)1/.2 
29. 2y 3
30. 31. 2 0 x 4 , attaractive

Exercise - 3 | Level-II Subjective | JEE Advanced

kq1q2
1. (a) 60° (b) mg + (c) 3 mg, mg. q 1 & q 2 should have unlike charges for the beads to
2
remain stationaly & q2q2 = – mgl2/k
1/ 2
W  40a3mg 
2. q  8W tan 0x2 3. v , i.e., q  
4.  5. 9.30
2(a  He )g  3L 

4kq  2
– i  
6. 7. Electron, ye> yp, ye= yp, ye< yp, 8. H2 = h1 + h2 – g  
R 2  V
Q1 R1
9. 4  0Ka 10. 2.2× 10 -12 C 11. 
Q 2 R2

8 4  Kq2 v  r 0
12. Wfirst step=  –  , Wsecond step=0, Wtotal=0 13. 14. =
3 5 r 3 r – 1
3 p1p2 3 2Qp Q2 pQ
15.  R E0 i 16. 40 x 4 , Repulsive 17. 3 (upward), U =
 2
0a 2 20a 20a

Exercise - 4 | Level-I Previous Year | JEE Main

1. A 2. B 3. D 4. A 5. C
6. D 7. D 8. B 9. C 10. B
11. D 12. A 13. C 15. C 15. A
16. D 17. A 18. A 19. A or B 20. C
21. D

Exercise - 4 | Level-II Previous Year | JEE Advanced

1. C 2. C 3. A,D 4. A 5. D
6. 3 7. A 8. C 9. D 10. A,B,C
11. A 12. B

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
 Electrostatics-2 2.1

Electrostatics-II
CHAPTER
2
Section A - Questions Based on electric flux • Electric Field Strength in Terms of Electric Flux :
for various configuration, Earlier we’ve defined that the density of electric lines
Question on solid angle concept, gives the magnitude of electric field strength.
Gauss law Based Questions Mathematically the numerical value of electric field
1. ELECTRIC FLUX : strength at a point in the region of electric field can
Any group of electric lines of forces passing through a be give as the electric flux passing through a unit
given surface, we call electric flux and it is denoted by . normal area at that point.
    
• Area as a Vector : 
Flux    [Link] , If E is constant,   E.A
Till now we have considered area of a surface as a In a uniform electric field shown in figure. If  be
scalar quantity but for further analysis we treat area of the flux passing through an area S which is normal
a surface as a vector quantity whose direction is along to the electric field lines, the value of electric field
 strength at this surface can be given as
the normal to the surface. The area vector S of a
surface which has surface area S can be written as 
 E
S  Snˆ S
Where n̂ is the unit vector in the direction along E
normal to the surface.

 
S n
area = S
or flux through the surface can be given as
  ES

If a surface is three dimensional we consider a small If in an electric field, surface is not normal as shown
elemental area dS on this surface and direction of in figure. Here the are ABCD is inclined at an angle
this elemental area vector is along the local normal  from the normal to electric field. Here we resolve
of the surface at the point where elemental area is the area ABCD in two perpendicular components
chosen as shown. Thus as shown in figure. One is S cos , which is area
ABCD normal to electric field direction and other

dS  dSaˆ is S sin , which is area CDCDalong the direction
of electric field.
Here â is the unit vector in the direction along the
A B
normal at elemental area dS.
a 
dS
C'
C D D'
area = S

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
2.2 Theory and Exercise Book

Here the total flux passing through the given area (b) Electric Flux Through a circular Disc :
ABCD is same which is passing through its normal
component S cos , thus here the flux  through the
area can be given as
  EScos  [S cos  = area of ABCD]
If we consider the direction of area vector normal
to the area surface, as shown in figure,  would be 
  
the angle between S and E . Thus flux through the
surface ABCD can be given as
 
  E.S

A
B
Figure shows a point charge q placed at a distance
  from a disc of radius R. Here we wish to find the
E electric flux through the disc surface due to the point

charge q. We know a point charge q originates
 electric flux in radially outward direction. The flux
S
D of q which is originated in cone shown in figure
C
passes through the disc surface.
(a) Electric Flux in Non-uniform Electric
Field
R E
In non-uniform electric field, we can calculate electric  
dS
flux through a given surface by integrating the above
x
expression for elemental surface area of the given 
q 
surface. For this consider the situation shown in figure.
If we wish to calculate electric flux through the surface
M shown in figure. For this we consider an elemental
area dS on the surface M as shown. At this position if
electric field is E then the electric flux through this
To calculate this flux, we consider an elemental ring
elemental area dS can be given as
on disc surface of radius x and width dx as shown.
d  EdScos 
Area of this ring (strip) is
dS = 2x dx
The electric field due to q at this elemental ring is
 given as
E dS
 Kq
E
(x 2   2 )
If d is the flux passing through this elemental ring,
we have
d  EdS cos 
M
Kq 
 2 2
 2x dx 
(x   ) x  2
2
Total flux through the surface M can be given as
2kql xdx
=

  d   EdScos  (l 2  x 2 )3 / 2
M

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
 Electrostatics-2 2.3

Total flux through the disc surface can be given by

Kq R
integrating this expression over the whole area of  2 2
 2 Rdx 
(x  R ) x  R2
2
disc thus total flux can be given as
R dx
q x dx  2 KqR 2 

  d   2
O 0 (  x 2 )3/ 2
2 (x 2  R 2 )3/ 2
Total flux through the lateral surface of cylinder can
R
q x dx be given by integrating the above result for the

2 0 
O
(  x 2 )3/ 2
2 complete lateral surface, which can be given as
L/ 2
qR 2 dx
q  1 
R

  d 
2 0  (x  R 2 ) 3/ 2
2
  2  L/ 2
2 0    x 2  O
q 
or  .
q  1 1  0   4R 2
2
   2 
2 0   2
  R  The solution of above integration is left for students
as exercise. This situation can also be easily handled
The above result can be obtained in a much simpler
by using the concepts of Gauss’s Law, we’ll discuss
way by using the concept of solid angle and Gauss’s
in next section.
Law, shortly we’ll discuss it.

(c) Electric Flux Through the Lateral (d) Electric flux Produced by a Point Charge
Surface of a Cylinder due to a Point The figure. shows a point charge placed at the centre
Charge : of a spherical surface of radius R from which electric
Figure. shows a cylindrical surface of length L and lines are originated and coming out of the surface of
radius R. On its axis at its centre a point charge q is sphere. For clarity and convenience only lower half
placed. Here we wish to find the flux coming out of sphere is drawn in the picture. As the charge q is
from the lateral surface of this cylinder due to the inside the sphere, whatever flux it originates will come
point charge q. For this we consider an elemental out from the spherical surface. To find the total flux,
strip of width dx on the surface of cylinder as shown. we consider an elemental area dS on surface. The
The area of this strip is electric field on the points on surface of sphere can
dS = 2R . dx be given as
The electric field due to the point charge on the Kq
strip can be given as E
R2
Kq
E
(x 2  R 2 )
If d is the electric flux through the strip, we can write
d  E dS cos 


dS

 E


x C
q dx 
R  E
dS

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
2.4 Theory and Exercise Book

The electric flux coming out from the surface dS is (e) Flux Calculation in the Region of
  Varying Electric field :
d  [Link]  EdS In a region electric field depends on x dierection as
[As  = 0 shown in figure] E= E0x2
In the cube of edge a shown in figure from front
Kq
Thus d  dS face electric
R2 flux goes in which can be given as
Total flux coming out from the spherical surface is y
Kq

  d   R2
dS

At every point of spherical surface, magnitude of E = E0x2

electric field remains same hence we have in out
a
Kq
  2 dS
R  O
2a x
a
a
Kq
or   4R 2 in = E0 (2a)2 . a2 = 4E0a4
R2
From the other surface flux coming out can be given as
2
out = E0(3a)2 . a2 = 9 E0a4

[As dS  4R ]

q Here out > in for the cubical surface hence net

0 flux =out – in = 5E0a4

q 2. CONCEPT OF SOLID ANGLE :

Thus total flux, the charge q originates is  . Similarly
0 Solid angle is the three dimensional angle enclosed
by the lateral surface of a cone at its vertex as shown
q in figure shown. Solid angle can also be defined as
a charge –q absorbs  electric lines (flux) into it.
0 the three dimensional angle subtended by a spherical
Figure shows a charge q enclosed in a closed surface section at its centre of curvature. As in the figure
S of random shape. Here we can say that the total shown point a is the centre of curvature of a spherical
electric flux emerging out from the surface S is the section S of radius R which subtend a solid angle 
complete flux which charge q is originating, hence (omega) at point A
flux emerging from surface is S

q
S 
0

R Solid angle 

S
q A

(a) Relation in Half Angle of cone and

Solid Angle at Vertex :
The above result is independent of the shape of Consider a spherical section M of radius R, which
surface it only depends on the amount of charge subtend a half angle  (radian) at the centre of
enclosed by the surface. curvature. To find the area of this section, we
consider an elemental strop on this section of radius

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
 Electrostatics-2 2.5

R sin  and angular width d as shown in figure.

q
The surface area of this strip can be given as charge q,  flux is originated is 4 solid angle.
dS = 2R sin  × Rd 0

Here the solid angle enclosed by cone subtended by

R d
Rsin disc at the point charge can be given as
M
 = 2(1 – cos )

  
= 2 1 – 2 
   R2 
d
 Now we can easily calculate the flux of q which as
R
passing through the disc surface as

 q / 0
disc = 
4
O
The total area of spherical section can be given by q / 0   
=  2  1 – 
integrating the area of this elemental strip within limits 4  2 2
  R 
from O to . Total area of spherical section is
 q   
2R 2 sin d or disc = 2   1 – 
S=  dS =  0
0  2  R 2 


= 2R 2  – cos 0 EXAMPLE 1
= 2R2 (1 – cos ) Find the electric flux coming out from one face of a cube
If solid angle subtended by this section at its centre of edge a, centre of which a point charge q is placed.
O is  then its area can be given as Sol. Here the total solid angle subtended by cube surface
S = R2 at the point charge q is 4. As q is at centre of cube,
From equation (1) we have we can say the each face of cube subtend equal
 R2 = 2R2 (1 – cos) solid angle at the centre, thus solid angle subtended
 = 2 (1 – cos) by each force at point charge is
Equation (2) gives the relation in half angle of a
4
cone  and the solid angle enclosed by the lateral face  steradian
6
surface of cone at its vertex.
Thus electric flux through each face is
(b) Electric Flux Calculation due to a Point
Charge Using solid Angle :
Figure shows a point charge q placed at a distance 
from the centre of a circular disc of radius R. Now
we wish to find the electric flux passing through the q
disc surface due to the charge q.
 2  R2
R

 q / 0
q face =  face
 4

q / 0 4 q
We know from a point charge q, total flux originated =  = 6
4 6 0
q
is  in all directions or we can say that from a point
0

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
2.6 Theory and Exercise Book

EXAMPLE 2 Here the sign  represents the integration over a closed

A point light source of 100 W is placed at a distance
surface M which encloses a total charge  q encl
x from the centre of a hole of radius R in a sheet as
Let us consider a surface M shown in figure which
shown in figure. Find the power passing through the
encloses three charges q 1 – q 2 and q 5. For the
hole in sheet.
surface M if we find surface integral of electric

field  E .dS , it gives the total electric flux coming
M
R
out from the surface, which can be given as
x
 q1  q 5 – q 3
100°W bulb  E .dS 
M
0
Sol. [Gauss’s Law]
From figure, the solid angle of cone shown in figure
can be given as q4
q2
 x  q1
 = 2 (1– cos )  2  1 – 2

2
 R x 
q5
Power in hole = power given in solid angle 
–q3

q7
  –q6
M


Here electric field E is the net electric field at the
100 points on the surface of M. Remember that the electric
P= 
4 field we use to find the flux must be the net electric
field of the system due to all the charges but the total
100  x  flux coming out from the surface is the flux originated
= 4   2 1 – 
by the charges enclosed in the closed surface.
 R  x2
2

Using Gauss law we can find electric field strength
 x  due to some symmetrical distribution of charges.
= 50 1 – 2
 watt For appllication of Gauss’s Law, we choose a closed
 R  x2  surface over which we apply Gauss law, called
Gaussian surface.
3. GAUSS’S LAW : Gauss Law can be used to calculate electric field
This law is the mathematical analysis of the relation strength, for this we first choose a proper Gaussian
between the electric flux from a closed surface and surface on which the electric field strength is to be
its enclosed charge. This law states that the total calculated. Some times a random Gaussion surface
flux emerging out from a closed surface is equal to 
the product of sum of enclosed charge by the surface is chosen then the integral 
E .dS involves

1 complex calculations. To make these calculations

and the constant  easier, we choose a Gaussian surface keeping
0
following points in mind.
Mathematically Gauss’s law is written as
(i) The Gaussion surface should be chosen in such
  q encl a way that at every point of surface the magnitude
 E .dS 
M
0 of electric field is either uniform or zero.

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
 Electrostatics-2 2.7

(ii) The surface should be chosen in such a way spherical surface shown in figure. at every point of
that at every point of surface electric field strength this surface electric field due to the charge q is
is either parallel or perpendicular to the surface.
kq
Following example will illustrate the applications of E
x2
Gauss’s Law in calculation of electric field in the
surrounding of some charge configurations. Here if we use Gauss Law for the spherical surface,
Gauss Law is a very helpful tool in finding the electric we have
field strength due to various distribution of charges.  q
We start with a very simple example. Now we try to  E .dS   0
find the electric field strength due to a point charge
q at a distance x, using Gauss’s law. q
P  
E dS 
0
q x
q
To find electric field strength at P, we first consider a E . 4x2 = 
0
Gaussian surface so that point P will be on its surface.
But the question is what should be the shape of 1 q Kq
Gaussion surface. Look at the following figure shown. or E 
40 x 2 x 2
Here we can see that at every point of sphere electric

field vector is parallel to dS and also the magnitude
P
x 
q of E is uniform at every point, thus the integral

 E .dS can be easily evaluted.

Note

p I. Basically flux is the count of number of lines of

q x
electric field crosing an area.
II. For open surface we choose one direction as a area
vector & stick to it for the whole problem

dS EXAMPLE 3
E In figure (a) a charge q is pla ed just outside the
centre of a closed hemisphere. In figure (b) the same
charge q is placed just inside the centre of the closed
hemisphere and in figure (c) the charge is plced at
q x
the centre of hemisphere open from the base. Find
the electric flux passing through the hemisphere in
all the three cases.

If we apply Gauss’s Law to the above two cases, it

 q

will require laborious calculations to find E .dS .
q q
The Gaussion surface should be chosen in such a
way to minimize the calculations. Now consider a (a) (a) (b)

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
2.8 Theory and Exercise Book

q
 E(4r 2 ) 
0
q
q 1 q
 E .
40 r 2
(b) (c)
(ii) Electric Field Strength due to a Long Charged Wire
Sol. In figure (a)  = 0
If we wish to find electric field strength due to a long
In figure (b)  = q/0
charged wire having a linear charge density  coul/m
In figure (c)  = q/20
at a point P situated at a distance x from the wire.
For this application of Gauss’s Law we consider a
EXAMPLE 4
cylindrical Gaussian surface of length  and radius x
A charge q is placed at point D of the cube. Find the as shown in figure. If we apply Gauss’s Law on this
electric flux passing through the face EFGH and face surface, we have
AEHD.
 q
B F  E .dS  encl ...(1)
0

E
A
G
C

D H
Sol.  = q/60 I
(i) Electric field due to a point charge II
The electric field due to a point charge is every where
 P
radial. We wish to find the electric field at a distance
r from the charge q. We select Gaussain surface, a
sphere at distance r from the charge. At every point
III
of this sphere the electric field has the same
magnitude E and it is perpendicular to the surface
itself. Hence we can apply the simplified form of
Gauss law,
 coul / m
q
ES  in
0
Here, S = area of sphere = 4 r2 and Here the closed Gaussian surface is made of three
qin = net charge enclosing the Gaussian surface = q parts, I, II and III, two flat circular faces and one
cylindrical lateral surface. Here we split the closed
surfae integration in three parts as
   
 E .dS   E .dS   E .dS   E .dS
I II III
q
E Here we know for part I and III, electric field
r strength vector is perpendicular to the area vector
as shown in figure hence no flux will come out of
these parts. Thus we have
 
 E .dS   E .dS  0
I III

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
 Electrostatics-2 2.9

Now from equation (1) we have Here also similar to previous case the electric flux
through the circular faces is zero, hence according


E dS 
II
0
to Gauss law, we have
  .2R
[As enclosed charged is qencl =  l ]  E .dS 
0
  II
For lateral surface as E is parallel to ds is parallel
.2R
l or 
E dS 
0
II

E ds 
0
II

R
or E
 0 x
or E.2x 
0 Case II : Uniformly Charged Non-conducting Cylinder
Figure shows a long cylinder of radius R, charged
 2k
or E = 2 x = uniformly with volume charge density  coul/m3.
0 x To find electric field strength at a distance x from
(iii) Electric Field Strength due to a Long Uniformly the cylinder axis we again consider a cylindrical
Charged Cylinder : Gaussian surface shown in figure.
If we apply Gauss Law on this surface, we have
 q
 coul / m2 E .dS  encl
 0

  .R 2 
I
II
or 
II
E .dS 
0
[As qencl = .R2 ]
 x
R 2 
or 
E dS 
0
III
R 2 
R or E.2x 
0
To find electric field inside the cylinder at a distance
x from the axis, we consider a small cylindrical
Case - I : Conducting Cylinder
Gaussian surface of radius x and length . If we
Figure shows a long cylinder of radius R which is
apply Gauss Law for this surface, we have
uniformly charged on its surface with surface charge
density  coul/m2  q encl
 E .dS  0
We know at interior points of a metal body electric
field strength is zero. For finding electric field strength x 2 
at outer points at a distance x from the axis of the
or 
E dS 
II
0 I
cylinder, we consider a cylindrical Gaussian surface
of radius x and length  as shown in figure. Now we x 2  
E.2x  x II
apply Gauss’s Law on this surface we have or
0
  q III
 E .dS  encl R2
0 or E
2 0 x
Here enclosed charge in the cylindrical Gaussian
surface can be given x
or E
qencl =  . 2 R 2 0

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
2.10 Theory and Exercise Book

(iv) Electric field Strength due to a Non-conducting coul/m2. As we know in the metal sheet there is no
Uniformly Charged Sheet : charge within the volume of the sheet and also the
To find the electric field strength at a point P infront electric field inside the metal sheet is zero. To find
of the charged sheet we consider a cylindrical electric field strength at a point P in front of the sheet
Gaussian surface as shown in figure of face area S. we consider a cylindrical Gaussian surface having one
If we apply Gauss law for this surface, we have face at point P where electric field is required and
  other face is within the volume of sheet. If we apply
q encl
 E .dS  0
Gauss’s Law on this surface, we have
  qencl
    S  E dS  0
or  
E .dS  E .dS  E .dS 
0 
I II III       S
[As here qencl = S] or  E .dS   E .dS  
I II III
E .dS 
0
[As here qencl = S]
2 Here on surface I of the Gaussian surface E = 0
 coul / m
   
hence  E .dS  0 and  E .dS  0 as no electric
I II

flux is coming out from the lateral surface of cylinder


area S ( E is perpendicular to area vector of curved surface).
Hence we have total flux coming out is
E II E
x
P  coul / m2
I III

I area S
II
P
E


In this case  E .dS  0
II
as the lateral surface of

cylinder is parallel to the direction of electric field

strength, no flux is coming out from the lateral
surface, hence we have   S
S  E .dS 
II 0
I
EdS  EdS 
II
2 
0
S
or ES 
0
S
or 2ES 
0 
or E
[As electric field is uniform on both sides] 0


or E
2 0
Note
(v) Electric field Stength due to a Charged
Conducting Sheet :
Figure show a large charged conducting sheet, charged
on both the surfaces with surface charge density 

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
 Electrostatics-2 2.11

Section B,C - Properties of conductors, All the charge given to the conductor reside
Spheres Problem, Electrostatics on the surface of the conductor
pressure
Q
CONDUCTOR + +
+ + +
+
Type of Materials

+
+

+ + +++
• Conductors (All electrons are free)

+ +
• Semi-Conductors (Some electrons are free)

+
+ +
• Insulators (All electrons are bounded)

+
+
+ ++
4. CONDUCTORS : + + +
A conductors contains free electrons, which can
move freely in the material, but cannot leave it. Till now we have only discussed the case of uniform
On applying an external electric field on a conductor shaped bodies on which the charge distribute itself
charges of a conductor adjust themselves in such a uniformly.
fashion that the net electric field inside the conductor But what about the charge distribution on irregular
is zero under electrostatics conditions. shaped bodies ?
Does in this case also uniform charge distribution
– + take place ? .............. NO
+
– +
+
– + 1
+ 
– +
In this case rC
– E E + charge per radius of
– inside outside + unit area curvature
– +
– +
– ++
++
++ +
+
+ +
 +
Net E  0  Potential is constant + ++
+
+ +
Q +
+ +
 Conductor behaves as an equipotential surface +
+
+
Being an equipotential surface, electric field lines +
will terminate or originate perpendicularly
+
+ + ++
+ + + +
• Let us now consider the interior of a charged
conducting object. Since it is a conductor, the electric
field in the interior is everywhere zero. Let we analyse • Let us consider a random shaped body and find
a Gaussian surface inside the conductor as close as Electric field due to a small portion of this body.
possible to the surface of the conductor. Since the However the  is not uniform everywhere but for a

electric intensity E is zero everywhere inside the small area dA, we can assume that  is constant.
conductor, it must be zero for every point of the Considering a cylindrical gaussian surface, we will
Gaussian surface. Hence the flux through the surface. calculate flux pasing through the cross section dA.
 
 [Link] will be zero. Therefore, according to Gauss's
+
+ +
++
+
+
+ +
+ ++
  q +
+

law ( [Link]   ) , the net charge inside the
0 +
+ +
+
+
+
Gaussian surface and hence inside the conductor +
+
must be zero. Since there can be no charge in the +
+ + ++
+ + + +
interior of the conductor charge given to the E

conductor will reside on the surface of the conductor.

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
2.12 Theory and Exercise Book

  q AB from the body then due to removing body ACB,

net   [Link]  in if E2 be the electric field strength at point M and N,
0
the direction of E2 can be given as shown in figure.
net = curved surface outer flat surface +  inner flat surface
curved surface = 0 E2
AM B
because no flux is passing through lateral surface
E1 N E2
(electric field lines are perpendicular to area vector.)
  M
[Link]  0 A B
inner flat surface = 0 N
 E1 C
because E inside conductor = 0
(a) (b)
q in
  outer flat surface
0 Due to complete body we know net electric fields at
just outside and inside points can be given as
dA    
 [Link]  E  
0 0 EM = E1 + E2 =  ...(1)
0

and EN = E1 – E2 = 0 ...(2)
5. ELECTRIC PRESSURE : Solving equations (1) and (2) we get
(a) Electric pressure on a Charged Metal
E1 = E2
Surface :
We know when some charge is given to a metal 
and E1 = E2 = 2 
body it will spread on the outer surface of the body 0

due to mutual repulsion in the charge. When on Thus electric field at the location of section AB due
surface every charge experiences an outward
repulsive force due to remaining charges, every part 
to remaining body ACB is 2  , using which we
of body experiences an outward pressure. This 0

pressure which acts on every part of charged metal can find the outward force on section AB, due to
body surface due to remaining charges on the body the rest of the body ACB as
is called electric pressure.

dS Force on AB is dF = dq E2 =  dS × 2 
M 0
A B
Thus pressure experienced by the section AB can
N
be given as

df  2
Pe  
ds 20
C

To calculate this we consider a small segment AB As net electric field outside the surface is
on body surface of area dS as shown. If  be the 
surface charge density on AB, charge on it is Enet 
0
dq =  dS
Now we consider two points M and N just outside (E net )2
and inside of section AB as shown in figure. At the Thus we have Pe =
20
two point if E1 be the electric field due to section.
AB then direction of the electric fields at M and N 1 2
Pe = 0 E net
can be given as shown in figure. If we remove section 2

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
 Electrostatics-2 2.13

ELECTRIC FIELD DUE TO SPHERICAL BODIES Q

or E. 4x2 = 
0
Conducting Conducting Non Non
hollow Solid Conducting Conducting 1 Q
sphere sphere Hollow Solid E = 4 . 2
0 x
sphere sphere
Simlarly for surface points we can consider a
 spherical Gaussian surface of radius R which gives
Will behave in the same fashion because E & electric field strength on the sphere surface as
potential depends on charge distribution & all the
above three spheres have same charge distribution 1 Q
ES 
 4 0 x 2
(b) E due to conducting hollow sphere,
conducting solid sphere & non To find electric field strength at an interior point of
conducting hollow sphere. the sphere, we consider an inner spherical Gaussian
For the above mentioned bodies, any excess charge surface of radius x(x < R). Here if we apply Gauss
given to body gets distributed uniformly over its outer Law for this surface, we have
surface. Since the charge lines must point radially +
+ + Q
outward & also the field strength will have the same + +
value at all points on any imaginary spherical surface +

+
+
concentric with the charged conducting sphere or

+
the shell this is the symmetry which leads us to + C

+
choose the gaussian surface to be a sphere. Any P
+
x

+
arbitrary element of area ds is parallel to the local
+

 

+

E so [Link]  Eds at all points on the surface.
+

+
+ +
(c) Electric field Strength due to a
+ + + +
Conducting (solid and hollow) Sphere,
Non conducting hollow sphere  q encl
Case I : x > R  E .dS  0 = 0 [As all charge is on surface]
To find electric field at an outer point at a distance x
from the centre of sphere, we cosider a spherical Thus, E = 0 [As dS  0]
Gaussian surface of radius x. If electric field strength
at every point of this surface is E, using Gauss’s law For points outside the sphere, the field is same as
we have that of a point charge at the centre of sphere.
 q Case II x < R
 E .dS  encl
0
E
Q
Here we have 
E dS 
0
1 Q
4  0 R2
E dS

r=R
P

+ + +Q Non-conducting Uniformly Charged Sphere

+
+

For outer and surface points the electric field strength

+ + +

+ + +

can be calculated by using Gauss Law similar to the

R
previous case of conducting sphere.
+

+
++ +
For interior points of sphere, we consider a spherical
Gaussian surface of radius x as shown. If we apply
Gauss Law for this surface, we have

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
2.14 Theory and Exercise Book

 q to a metal body, it is distributed on its outer surface in

 E .dS  encl such a way that net electric field at every interior
0
point of body is zero. Thus if inside a metal body, a
Here enclosed charge can be given as charge is displaced, no work is done in the process as
4 electric field at every point is zero. Hence we can say
q encl    x 3 that the whole metal body is equipotential
3
On the basis of above explanation we can state that
coul / m 3 a region in which at every point electric field is zero,
can be regarded as equipotential region.
+ + + + +
+ + + + + + + +
+ + + + + + + + + + • Electric Potential due to a Charged Sphere :
+ + + + + + + + + + Case I : Conducting Sphere
+ + + + + + + + + + + As we know for outer points of a charged sphere
+ + + + + + C + + + + ++
+ + + + + + + + + + + we can assume whole charge is concentrated at its
+ + + + + + + + + + + centre thus electric potential at a distance x from the
+ + + + + + + + + + centre of sphere outside can be given as
+ +R+ + + + + + +
+ + + + + + + Q
+ + +
+ + +
+

+
4

+
 x 3

+ + +

+ + + + +
Thus E. 4 x2 = 3
KQ R
0 V=
x
x + +

+
or E = 3 + +
0 + + +
++ + +

Case II : At an external point (r > R) At the points on surface of sphere, the potential can
To find the electric field outside the charged sphere, be given as
we use a spherical Gaussian surface of radius r(r > KQ
R). This surface encloses the entire charged sphere. Vs =
R
So, from Gauss's law, we have
At the interior points of sphere as at every point electric
Q field is zero, we can state that this is an equipotential
E(4r 2 ) 
0 region thus at every interior point potential is same as
that of its surface. Thus we have
1 Q
or, E ...(13F) KQ
40 r 2 Vin =
R
The field at points outside the sphere is the same as
that of a point charge at the centre. • Variation of Potential with Distance from centre
of Sphere :
Variation of E with the distance from the centre (r)
V
E

1 Q KQ 1
4  0 R2 R V
x
O r
r=R
x
• Electric Potential Inside a Metal Body : O
As we've already discussed whenever charge is given

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
 Electrostatics-2 2.15

3KQ 3
Note Vc = = Vs
2R 2
Above results are also valid for a uniformly Thus at centre, potential is maximum and is equal
charged hollow sphere. to 3/2 times that on the surface.
• Variation of Potential in a Uniformly Charged
Sphere with Distance :
Case II : Non-conducting Uniformly Charged Sphere
For outer and surface points here also we can say
3 kQ v
that the potnetial remains same as that of a conducting
sphere as 2 R

KQ
Vout = (for x > R)
x
V KQ 1
KQ R V
VS = (for x = R) x
R
For an interior point unlike to a conducting sphere,
potential will not remain uniform as electric field O x=R x
exists inside region. We known inside a uniformly
charged sphere electric field is in radially outward
direction thus as we move away from centre, in the 6. FIELD ENERGY OF ELECTROSTATIC
direction of electric field potential decreases. FIELD

S E
+ + + + +
+ + + + + + + +
+ + + + P+ + + + + +
+ + + + + + + + + + qE
+ + + + + + + + + + + m,q
+ + + + + + + + + + ++
+ + + + + + + + +R+ + + Q
+ + + + + + + + + + +
+ + + + + + + + + + + Consider a situation shown in figure. A small body
+ + + + + + + + +
+ + + + + + + + of mass m and charge q placed in an electric field E.
+ + + + + +
When the body is released it starts moving in the
direction of electric field due to the electric field qE
As shown in figure if there is a point P at a distance acting on it. The body will gain some kinetic energy
x from the centre of sphere, the potential difference due to its motion. Who is giving energy to this particle
between points P and S can be given as ? Answer is simple-electric field. This shows that
R electric field must posses some energy in the region
KQx where field exist due to which it can do work on
Vp – VS = 
x
R3
dx
any charged body placed in it. This energy we call
field energy of electric field. Wherever electric field
KQ KQ 2 exist, field energy also exsit in space. Let us calculate
or VP – = (R – x 2 )
R 2R 3 the amount of energy stored in the space where
electric field exist.
KQ 2 KQ
or VP = 3
(R – x 2 ) 
2R R
(a) Field Energy Density of Electric field :
KQ As discussed in previous section in every region
Vp = (3R 2 – x 2 ) where electric field is present, energy must exist.
2R 3
This field energy we can calculate by an example
Here at x = 0, we have potential at centre of sphere is
given here.

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
2.16 Theory and Exercise Book

Consider a charged conducting body shown in figure.

2 1
Its surface M is having a charge distributed on it. u=
2
= 0 E joul / m
3

We know the electric field just outside the surface 2 0 2

M at a point can be given as
dU
Here u = is the field energy stored per unit
 dV
E= 
0 volume in the space where electric field E exist and
is called field energy density of electric field.
M'
If in a region electric field is uniform, the total field
+ + + + energy stored in a given volume V of space can be
+ + + +
+ M + given as
+ +
+ 1
+ U= 0 E 2  V
+ + 2
+ + + + + +
If electric field in a region is non-uniform, the total
We also know that on the surface of metal body field energy stored in a given volume of space can
experience an outward electric pressure which is be calulated by integrating the field energy in an
given as elemental volume dV of space as

2 1 1
Pe   0 E 2 dU  0 E 2  dV
2 0 2 2
And total field energy in a given volume can be given
Now if we consider that the metal surface M is
as
flexible and allowed to expand due to electric pressure
upto a small limit to M. Here if we check electric 1

U  dU  2 0 E 2 dV
field associated with the body, we known inside the
body there is no electric field. Initially electric field
only exist from surface M to infinity. Hence the field (b) Self energy of a Hollow, conducting,
energy also exist from the surface M to infinity. When solid conducting & hollow non
the surface expand to M then in the final stage the conducting sphere.
electric field as well as field energy exist from surfaec We’ve dicussed whenever a system of charges is
M to infinity. This implies that during expansion of assembled, some work is done and this work is stored
surface field energy in the shaded volume (say dV) in the form of electrical potential energy of the
vanishes as before expansion there was electric field system. Now we consider an example of charging a
in this region and after expansion electric field conducting sphere of radius R.
becomes zero in the region as there is no electric
field inside the body. dq
We also know that the expansion is done by electric
q
force in the body (electric pressure) hence the work
done by electric field during expansion is equal to
the loss in field energy in the shaded volume dv.
If Pe is the electric pressure on the body surface
then in the small expansion in body volume dV, work
R
done can be given as
dW = PedV
And if dU the field energy stored in this volume dV In the process of charging we bring charge to the
then we can use sphere from infinity in steps of elemental charges
dU = dW = PedV dq. The charge on sphere opposes the elemental
dU charge being brough to it. Let us assume that at an
or  Pe instant sphere has charge q, due to which it has a
dV
potential given as

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
 Electrostatics-2 2.17

Kq 1
V dU =  E2 . dV
R 2 0
If now a charge dq is brought to its surface from 2
1  KQ  KQ 2
infinity work done in this process can be given as = 0  2   4 x 2 dx = dx
2 x  2x 2
Kq
dW = dqV = dq Thus total field energy associated with the sphere
R can be calculated by integrating this expression from
Total work done in charging the sphere can be given as surface of sphere to infinity as electric field inside the
Q
sphere is zero. Total field energy in the surrounding
Kq of sphere is

W  dW  R
0
dq

KQ2
KQ 2

U  dU  
R
2x 2
dx
W= ...(1)
2R 
KQ 2  1 KQ 2
Equation (1) gives the total work done in charging = –
 x = ...(2)
the sphere of radius R. 2  R 2R
We’ve discussed that in space wherever electric field Here we can see that this result is same as equation
exist, there must be some field energy stored which (1). We can conclude by this total whatever work is
has energy density, given as done in charging a body is stored in its surrounding
in the form of its field energy and can be regarded
1
u  0 E 2 J / m3 as self energy of that body. Once a body is charged
2 in a given configuration, its self energy is fixed, if
Here we can see that when the sphere was the body is now displaced or moved in any manner
uncharged, there was no electric field in its keeping its shape and charge distribution constant,
surroundings. But when the sphere is fully charged, its self energy does not charge. as discussed above
electtric field exist in its surrounding from its surface we can say that
to infinity. Let us calculate the field energy associated “Self energy of a charged body is the total
with this charged conducting sphere. We know field energy, associated with the electric field due to
electric field due to a sphere at outer points varies this body in its surrounding.
with distance from centre as
(c) Self Energy of a Uniformly Charged
dx Non-conducting Sphere :
We know in outside region of a non-conducting
+
Q + uniformly charged sphere, every point is same as
that of a conducting sphere of same radius. Thus
+
+

field energy in the surrounding of this sphere from

+

R
+

+
+ surface to infinity can be given as
KQ2
U R  
2R

KQ + + + + + Q
E + + + + + + + +
x2 + + + + + + + + + +
To find the total field energy due to this sphere, we + + + + + + + + + +
+ + +dx + + + + + + + +
consider an elemental spherical shell of radius x and + + + + + + + + + + ++
width dx as shown in figure. The volume enclosed + + + + + + + + + +R+ +
+ + + + + + + + + + +
in this shell is + + + + + + + + + + +
dV = 4x2. dx + + + + + + + + +
+ + + + + + + +
Thus the field energy stored in the volume of this
elemental shell is

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
2.18 Theory and Exercise Book

Unlike to the case of conducting sphere, in at A due to the point charge +q is nullified by the
nonconducting sphere at interior point E  0. Thus electric field due to the negative induced charges on
field energy also exist in the interior region. This the inner surface of cavity and the positive charge
can be calculated by considering an elemental shell induced on outer surface is automatically distributed
inside the sphere as shown. on the surface in such a way that it does not produce
Here field energy in the volume of this elemental any electric field with in the metal body.
shell can be given as
+ + + + + + +
2 +

+
1  KQx 
dU  0  3   4x 2 dx A

+
+
2  R  – – ––
––

+
–

+
KQx – – +q
–

+
[As Ein = ] –
R3 +q ––

+
–
–

+
– –
–– –

+
KQ 2 4 ––

+
= x dx

+
2R 6

+
+ + + + + + + +
Total field energy inside the sphere can be given as
R
KQ2 From the above analysis we can conclude some
U  dU  x 4 dx
 points about the charge induction when a charge is
2R 6 0
placed inside the cavity of a metal body. These are.
R (1) Whenever a charge is placed inside a metal cavity,
KQ2  x5  an equal and opposite charge is induced on the inner
 U  
2R 6  5 0 surface of cavity.
(2) A similar charge is induced on the outer surface of
KQ2 body with surface charge density inversely
U 0R 
10 R proportional to radius of curvature of body
(3) When the charge inside is displaced, the induced
Thus total self energy of this sphere can be given as
charge distribution on inner surface of body changes
Uself = U0  R + UR
in such a way that its centre of charge can be assumed
KQ2 KQ 2 to be at the point charge so as to nullify the electric
U self  
10R 2R field in outer region.
(4) Due to movement in the point charge inside the body.
3 KQ2 The charge distribution on outer surface of body
 Uself 
5 R does not change as shown in figure.

+ + + +
7. CHARGE INDUCTION IN METAL + +
+
+

CAVITIES : + –
– –
+ + +

We've discussed that there can never be any electric + – +q ––

+
field inside a conductor due to static charges. Hence + – – –
+
no electric line of force can enter into a conducting + + +
+
body. Consider a point charge +q inside a spherical
cavity at centre within a metal body shown in figure.
+ + + +
q + +
The total electric flux originated by +q is  . Due +
+

0 + – –
–
+ + +

––
to this charge at the inner surface of cavity a charge – –
+q –––
+ +
+ – ––
– q is induced on which this complete flux will +
+ +
terminate and no electric line of force exists into the + +
metal body. A point, A inside the metal volume we
know net electric field is zero. Thus the electric field

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
 Electrostatics-2 2.19

(5) If another charge is brought to the body from

outside, it will only affect the outer distribution of + +
+ + Q
charges not on the charge distribution inside the

+
+
cavity as shown in figure R1

+
+
+

+
+ + +

+
+ R2
+ +

+
– –
+
+

+ + +
+ +
– ––
+

+ – –
–
++ +q
– – ––
–
+ 
+
+ + Let us find E at a point distanced r
++ + +
+ Case I
where r < R1

+ + E = 0[because net charge within this region = 0]
+
Case II
+

+
+ – – When R1 < r < R2
– ––
– –
+ +q ––– q in
– –– 
+

E = 0 [qnet = 0,  = =0E=0]
+
+
0
Case III
Now consider the situation shown in figure. Inside a When r > R2
conducting spherical shell of inner radius R1 and outer  kQ
radius R2, a point charge q is placed at a distance x E  2 [It is similar to case of hollow charged sphere]
r
from the centre as shown. The electric potential at
centre due to this system can be given as Now we consider a case when charge is placed inside
a conductor. For such case charge distribution will
kq Kq Kq be as follows
VC = r – R  R
1 2
+ +
+ + +
+ +
+
+

+
+
+

QA B C
+
+
+

q
+

R1
S1
+
+

C
+

S2
r
+
+

+ +
+
q R2
+

+
+

+ + For simplicity in the calculation, we could bifurgate

+ + the above system as
If we find electric field and potential at a distance r • A point charge
from the centre outside the shell, it will be only due • A hollow sphere S1 with charge –Q
to the charge on outer surface as induced charge on • A hollow sphere S2 with charge +Q
inner surface of cavity always nullifies the effect of electric field at A
point charge inside it. Thus it can be given as KQ
Due to Q =
kq kq r2
Eout =
2 and VP = Due to S1 = 0 [ Point lies inside the hollow sphere]
r r
Cavity in a conducting Material consider the system Due to S2 = 0 [ Point lies inside the hollow sphere]
shown in figure. As we know that when a charge is Electric field at B
given to a conductor it resides on its outer surface. KQ
Due to Q = 
r2

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
2.20 Theory and Exercise Book

Potential at B
KQ
Due to S1 =  kq
r2 Due to Q =
Due to S2 = 0 r
 –kQ
Enet at B = 0 Due to S1 =
r
Electric field at C
kQ
kq Due to S2 = R
Due to Q = 2  2
r

kq  Vnet = kQ
Due to S1 = 2  R2
r
Potential at C
kq kQ
Due to S2 = 2  Due to Q =
r r
 kq –kQ
E net at C = 2  Due to S1 = –
r r
 
At point C, net E due to S1 & q is zero. E at C is kQ
Due to S2 =
only due to outside charge (S2 ). If we place an r
external charge at point C, then effect of S1 & Q on kQ
external charge is zero or we can say that effect of Vnet =
r
external charge on S1 & Q is zero.
Or we can say charge placed inside the conductor Note
& the charge induced on the inner surface of the
conductor does not get affected by any external While writing potential at various points is case of
electric field this is known as electrostatic shielding cavity in a conducting material first distribute
charge on various surfaces & then the potential due
that is why, equipment sensitive towards electric field
to induced charges is also considered.
are placed inside a conductor. External electric field
only affects the charge distributed on the surface of
conductor. 8. CAVITY IN A NON CONDUCTING
We again go back to the case when a charge was placed SPHERE
(a) Electric field due to a Non-uniformly
kQ
in the conductor Potential at A Due to Q = Radially Charged Solid Non-conducting
r Sphere :
+ + If a sphere of radius R is charged with a non-uniform
+ +
charge density which varies with the distance x from
+
+

QA B centre x as
C
+
+

0
coul / m 3
+


+

S2 x
S1
+

+ +
+
P
–kQ
Due to S1 = R r
1

dx
kQ
due to S2 = R x
2
R
1 1 1 
 Vnet = kQ  r – R  R 
 1 2

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
 Electrostatics-2 2.21

Here if we wish to find electric field strength at a point EXAMPLE 5

situated at a distance r from centre of sphere outside it, Figure shows a uniformly charged sphere of radius
at point P shown in figure. This can be given as R and total charge Q. A point charge q is situated
KQ outside the sphere at a distance r from centre of
Ep = (where Q is the total charge of sphere) sphere. Find out the following :
r2
For outer points we can assume whole charge of (i) Force acting on the point charge q due to the sphere.
Q
sphere to be at its centre. Now Q can be calculated
by integrating the charge of an elemental shell of R
radius x and width dx as shown in figure. The charge q
dq in this shell can be given as
0
dq = . 4x2 dx =  4x 2 dx = 40x dx (ii) Force acting on the sphere due to the point charge.
x
Sol. (i) Electric field at the position of point charge
Total charge of sphere can be given as
 KQ
R E  2 rˆ
r
Q=  
dq  4 0 xdx
0
 KqQ  KqQ
so, F  2 rˆ | F | 2
r r
R
 x2  (ii) Since we know that every action has equal
= 40   = 20 R2 opposite reaction so
 2 0
 KqQ
Thus electric field strength at outer points can be Fsphere  – 2 rˆ
r
given as
 KqQ
| Fsphere |  2
K(20 R 2 ) 0 R 2 r
EP = =
r 2 2 0 r 2 EXAMPLE 6
To find electric field strength at an interior point at a Figure shows a uniformly charged thin sphere of total
distance r from the centre of sphere, we first find charge Q and radius R. A point charge q is also situated
the charge enclosed within the inner sphere of radius at the centre of the sphere. Find out the following :
r of which point P is on the surface. Thus enclosed (i) Force on charge q
charge can be given as
A
r
0 2

0

qencl = R .4x dx = 20r2 q
C
B

Here electric field strength at point P can be given as

(ii) Electric field intensity at A.
Kq encl K(2 0 r 2 )
EP = = (iii) Electric field intensity at B.
r2 r2
Sol. (i) Electric field at the centre of the uniformly
0 charged hollow sphere = 0
EP = 2  So force on charge q = 0
0
(ii) Electric field at A
  
Note EA  ESphere  E q
Kq
Here we can see that the above expression is =0+ ; r = CA
independent of distance from centre. r2
E due to sphere = 0, because point lies inside the
charged hollow sphere.
  
(iii) Electric field E B at point B = ESphere  E q

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
2.22 Theory and Exercise Book

KQ Kq R
= rˆ  2 ˆr (i) ( , 0, 0)
r2 r 2
K(Q  q)
= .rˆ ; r = CB  R R 
r2 (ii)  , ,0 
 2 2 
Note
(iii) (R, R, 0)
Here we can also assume that the total charge of
R
sphere is concentrated at the centre, for calculation Sol. (i) at ( , 0, 0) : Distance of point from centre
of electric field at B. 2

2
R 2 2 R
EXAMPLE 7 =   0 0 = < R, so point lies inside
2 2
Two concentric uniformly charged spherical shells
of radius R1 and R2 (R2 > R1) have total charges Q1 the sphere so
and Q2 respectively Derive an expression of electric  r  Rˆ
E  [ i]
field as a function of r for following positions. 30 30 2
Q2
Q1  R R 
(ii) At  , ,0  ; distance of point from centre
 2 2 
R1
R2 2 2
 R   R  2
=     0 R R
 2   2 
(i) r < R1 (ii) R1  r < R2 (iii) r  R2
so point lies at the surface of sphere, therefore
Sol.
(i) for r < R1 , 4 3
 KQ  K 3 R   R
therefore point lies inside both the spheres E 3 r  ˆi  R ˆj
R R 3  
Enet = Einner + Eouter = 0  2 2 
(ii) for R1  r < R2,
  R ˆ R ˆ
therefore point lies outside inner sphere but inside = i j
30  2 2 
outer sphere :
KQ1 (iii) The point is outside the sphere
Enet = Einner + Eouter = r̂  0
r2 4 3
 KQ  K 3 R 
KQ1 so, E  3 rr  [Ri
[Ri ˆ ˆ   [Ri
ˆˆRj]
Rj] ˆ ˆ Rj]
[Ri ˆRj]
ˆ
= r̂ r (( 2R)
2R) 3
66 2 20
r2
(iii) for r  R2
point lies outside inner as well as outer sphere (b) Electric Field Inside a Cavity of Non-
therefore. conducting Charged Body :
ENet = Einner + Eouter
KQ1 KQ + + + + +
= 2
rˆ  2 2 rˆ + + + + + + + +
r r + + + 
+ + + + + + +E
K(Q1  Q 2 ) + + + + + + + +2 + + E1
= r̂ + + + + + + +x + + + +
r2 + + + + +C + + + +P+y + +
EXAMPLE 8 + + + + + + + + + +C1+ +
+ + + + + + + + + + +
A solid non conducting sphere of radius R and + + + + + + + + + + +
uniform volume charge density  has its centre at + + + + + + + + +
+ + + + + + + +
origin. Find out electric field intensity in vector form + + + + + +
at following positions :

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
 Electrostatics-2 2.23

 a
Consider the sphere shown in figure charged uniformly
with charge density  coul/m3. Inside the sphere a E
spherical cavity is created with centre at C. 20
Now we wish to find electric field strength inside
(c) Some other important results for a
the cavity. For this we consider a point P in the
closed conductor :
cavity at a position vector x from the centre of
 (i) If a charge q is kept in the cavity then –q will be
sphere and at a position vector y from the centre induced on the inner surface and +q will be induced
of cavity as shown. on the outer surface of the conductor (it can be

If E1 be the electric field strength at P due to the proved using gauss theorem)
complete charge of the sphere (inside cavity also) +q
then we known electric field strength inside a
uniformly charged sphere is given as
 –q
 x q
E1 
3 0
Similarly if we assume charge is only there in the
region of cavity, this will also be a uniformly (ii) If a charge q is kept inside the cavity of a conductor
 and conductor is given a charge Q then –q charge
charged small sphere. If E 2 be the electric field
will be induced on inner surface and total charge
only due to the cavity charge, it can be given as on the outer surface will be q + Q. (it can be proved

y using gauss theorem)
E2 = 3 +q+Q
0
Now the electric field due to the charged sphere in
the cavity at point P can be given as
   –q
E net  E1 – E 2 q
[As now charge of cavity is removed]

a
= 3
0
   (iii) Resultant field, due to q (which is inside the cavity)
[As x – y  a ] and induced charge on S1, at any point outside S1
This shows that the net electric field inside the cavity (like B, C) is zero. Resultant field due to q + Q on
is uniform and in the direction of a i.e. along the S2 and any other charge outside S2, at any point
line joining the centre of spheres and cavity. inside of surface S2 (like A, B) is zero
a S2
B C

+ + + S1 q+Q
+ ++ +
coul / m 3 + + + ++ q
+ ++ ++
+ + + ++ A
+ + ++ –q
+ + + + ++
+ + ++
+ + + + ++
+ + ++
+ + + + ++
+ + ++
+ + + + ++
+ + ++
+ + + + ++ (iv) Resultant field in a charge free cavity in a closed
+ + ++
+ + + + ++
++ ++
+ + + + ++ ++
conductor is zero. There can be charges outside
+ + + +
+
+ + ++ ++ the conductor and on the surface also. Then also
+ + +
+
+ + ++ ++
+ + + this result is true. No charge will be induced on the
+ +
inner most surface of the conductor.
Similarly we can find the electric field strength inside
a cyclindrical cavity of a long uniformly charged
cylinder. If cavity axis is displaced from axis of
cylinder by a displacement vector a , by the analysis No
charge
we've done for a sphere, we can say that the electric
field strength inside the cavity is also uniform and
can be given as

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
2.24 Theory and Exercise Book

(v) Charge distribution for different types of cavities in S2

conductors 0

S2
S1 q
S1 c
q
C (G)
(A)
charge is at the geometrical centre
charge is at the common centre
(S1 S2  spherical) S2

S2
C
q
S1
q
(H)
S1 C

(B) charge is not at the geometrical centre

charge is not at the common centre 
(S1 S 2  spherical)
Using the result that E res in the conducting material
should be zero and using result (iii) We can show that
S2
Cas e S1 S2
A Uniform Uniform
q B Non uniform Uniform
S1
C C Non uniform Uniform
(C) D Non uniform Uniform
E Uniform Non uniform
charge is at the centre of S2 F Non uniform Non uniform
( S 2  spherical) G Non uniform Non uniform
H Non uniform Non uniform
In all cases charge on inner surface S1 = – q and on
S1
q outer surface S2 = q. The distribution of charge on
C 'S1' will not change even if some charges are kept
outside the conductor (i.e. outside the surface S2).
(D)
But the charge distribution on 'S2' may change if
charge is not at the centre of S2 some charges(s) is/are kept outside the conductor.
( S 2  spherical)
Electric field due at 'A' due to –q of S1 and +q of S2 is
S2 zero individually because they are uniformly distributed
At point B :
Kq K(–q) Kq Kq
S1 VB     , EB  0
q OB OB R2 R2
C
At point C :
(E)
Kq  Kq 
VC  , EC  OC
charge is at the centre of OC OC3
S1 (Spherical) (ii) Force on point charge Q :

S2 Here force on 'Q' will be only due to 'q' of S2 see

result (iii)
C  KqQ
q FQ  2 rˆ (r = distance of 'Q' from centre 'O')
S1 r
(F)
Force on point charge q :

charge not at the centre of S1 (spherical) Fq  0 (using result (iii) & charge on S1 uniform)

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
 Electrostatics-2 2.25

EXAMPLE 9 In case of combination of concentric conducting

An uncharged conductor of inner radius R1 and outer spherical shell, we do not consider the potential due
radius R2 contains a point charge q placed at point P to induced charge distribution as we used to consider
(not at the centre) as shown in figure ? in the case of cavties in conducting materials.
Find out the following : EXAMPLE 10
B
Consier the following system & find VC – VA
A
R1 P C
C q
S1 R2 B
S2 D
A
2R 4q
(i) VC (ii) VA (iii) VB R
q 2q
(iv) EA (v) EB 4R
(vi) force on charge Q if it is placed at B
Kq K(q) Kq
Sol. (i) VC   
CP R1 R2
–q on S1 in nonuniformly distributed still it produces R(4q) k(2q) k(q) 7kq
Sol. VC =   
4R 4R 4R 4R
K(q)
potential R1 at 'C' because 'C' is at distance kq k(2q) k(4q) 3kq
VA =   
'R1' from each points of 'S1'. R 2R 4R R
Kq Kq 7kq 3kq 7kq – 12kq 5kq
(ii) VA  R (iii) VB  VC – VA = – = =–
2 CB 4r R 4R 4R
(iv) EA = O (point is inside metallic conductor)
Kq ^ KQq ^ 9. CONNECTION OF TWO
(v) E B  CB (vi) FQ  CB
CB2 CB2 CONDUCTING MATERIAL :
Combination of conducting spherical shells. Two conducting hollow spherical shells of radii R1
Let us consider a system of concentric conducting and R2 having charges Q1 and Q2 respectively and
shelk with charge q1 on inner shell & q2 on outer shell. placed separately by large distance, are joined by a
kq1 kq 2 conducting wire
Potential at A = R  R
1 2 q1 q2

kq1 kq 2 R1 R2
Potential at B = 
r R2
S2
Let final charges on spheres are q1 and q2 respectively.
S1 Potential on both spherical shell become equal after
R1 joining, therefore
q1 q2
A
B Kq1 Kq 2
C 
R2 R1 R2

kq1 kq 2 q1 R1
Potential at C =   ....(i)
r r q2 R2
kq1 kq 2 and by charge conservation,
Potential of S1 = R  R q1 + q2 = Q1 + Q2 ....(ii)
1 2
from (i) and (ii)
kq1 kq 2
Potential of S2 = R  R
1 2

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
2.26 Theory and Exercise Book

(Q1  Q 2 )R1 –KQ K(x – 2Q)

q1   
R1  R 2 , R 2R
 –2Q = x – 2Q
(Q1  Q 2 )R 2
q2   x=0
R1  R 2
So charge on inner spherical shell = 0
q1 R1 and outer spherical shell = – 2Q.
ratio of charges 
q2 R2
1 4R12 R1 EXAMPLE 12
  Find charge on each spherical shell after joining the
 2 4R 22 R 2
inner most shell and outer most shell by a conducting
1 R 2 wire. Also find charges on each surface.
ratio of surface charge densities   R
2 1 5Q
q1 R1 3 –2Q
Ratio of final charges  Q
q2 R2 2
1 R
1 R 2
Ratio of final surface charge densities.   R 2R
2 1 3R

If two concentric hollow sphere are connected by a Sol. Let the charge on the innermost sphere be x.
wire then all the charge from inner sphere will reside Finally potential of shell 1 = Potential of shell 3
to the outer sphere.
Kx K(–2Q) K(6Q – x) Kx K(–2Q) K(6Q – x)
    
EXAMPLE 11 R 2R 3R 3R 3R 3R
The two conducting spherical shellsKxare K(–2Q)
joined by aK(6Q – x) Kx K(–2Q) K(6Q – x)
conducting wire and cut after some timewhen charge
   
R 2R 3R 3R 3R 3R
stops flowing. Find out the charge on each sphere
after that. Q
3x – 3Q + 6Q – x = 4Q ; 2x = Q ; x 
2
Q 6Q–x
–3Q
3 –2Q
R x
2
1 R
2R
2R
3R
Sol. After cutting the wire, the potential of both the shells
is equal Q
Thus, potential of inner shell Vin Charge on innermost shell =
2
Kx K(–2Q – x) k(x – 2Q) 5Q
=   charge on outermost shell =
R 2R 2R 2
and potential of outer shell Vout Q
+3Q/2
Kx K(–2Q – x) –KQ –3Q/2
=   –Q/2
2R 2R R Q/2

–2Q–x
x

middle shell = – 2Q
As Vout = Vin Final charge distribution is as shown in figure.

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
 Electrostatics-2 2.27

EXAMPLE 13 10. EARTHING OF CHARGED

Two conducting hollow spherical shells of radii R and 2R OR UNCHARGED METAL BODIES:
carry charges –Q and 3Q respectively. How much charge In electrical analysis, earth is assumed to be a very
will flow into the earth if inner shell is grounded ? large conducting sphere of radius 6400 kms. If some
charge Q is given to earth, its potential becomes
3Q KQ
Vi 
–Q Re
As Re is very large Ve comes out to be a negligible
R
value. Thus for very small bodies whose dimensions
are negligible compared to earth we can assume
2R that earth is always at zero potential
Keeping the above fact in mind if we connect a
small body to earth, charge flow takes place
Sol. When inner shell is grounded to the Earth then the between earth and the body till both will be at same
potential of inner shell will become zero because potential, zero potential as potential of earth will
potential of the Earth is taken to be zero. always remain zero, no matter if charge flows into
Kx K3Q earth or from earth. This implies that if a body at
 0 some positive potential is connected to earth, earth
R 2R
will supply some negative charge to this body so
that the final potential of body will become zero.
3Q
Consider a solid uncharged conducting sphere
x shown in figure. A point charge q is placed in front
of the sphere centre at a distance x as shown. Here
R
due to q, the potential at sphere is
Kq
V
2R x

–3Q
x= , the charge that has increased
2 x
C
–3Q –Q +q
= – (–Q) = hence charge flows into the S
2 2 R

Q
Earth =
2 Here we ignore induced charges due to q because
EXAMPLE 14 potential due to induced charges on sphere is zero.
An isolated conducting sphere of charge Q and radius If we close the switch S, earth supplies a charge qe
R is connected to a similar uncharged sphere (kept at on to the sphere to make its final potential zero.
a large distance) by using a high resistance wire. After Thus the final potential on sphere can be taken as
a long time what is the amount of heat loss ? – – qe –
–
Sol. When two conducting spheres of equal radius are – –
– –
connected charge is equally distributed on them – –
(Result VI).So we can say that heat loss of system –
x –
H = Ui – Uf – C
+q –
– S
 Q2   Q2 / 4 Q 2 / 4  Q2 – –
 – 0 –   – R –
 –
 80 R   80 R 80 R  16  0 R –
– – –
– – –

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
2.28 Theory and Exercise Book

Here we ignore induced charges due to q because (x) When two conductors are connected there will be
potential due to induced charges on sphere is zero. charge flow till their potential becomes equal.
It we close the switch S, earth supplies a charge qe
(xi) Electric pressure : Electric pressure at the surface
on the the sphere to make its final potential zero.
2
Thus the final potential on sphere can be taken as of a conductor is given by formula P  where
2 0
Kq Kq e  is the local surface charge density.
V  0
x R
qR
or qe = – EXAMPLE 14
x
Here it is obvious that earth has supplied a negative There are 4 concentric shells A, B, C and D of radius
charge to devlop a negative potential on sphere to of a, 2a, 3a, 4a respectively. Shells B and D are given
nullify the initial positive potential on it due to q. charges +q and –q respectively. Shell C in now
Always remember whenever a metal body is earthed. Find the potential difference VA – VC
connected to earth, we consider that earth suplies
Sol Let shell C acquires charge 'q' which will be such
a charge to it (say qe) to make its final potential
that final potential of C is zero.
zero due to all the charges including the charge on
body and the charges in its surrounding. kq kq '  –kq 
Vc    0
3a 3a  4a 
11. CONDUCTOR AND IT'S PROPERTIES
kq kq ' kq 1 1
[FOR ELECTROSTATIC CONDITION]    q = 3q  – 
3a 3a 4a  4 3
(i) Conductors are materials which contains large
number of free electrons which can move freely q
inside the conductor. q = –
4
(ii) In electrostatics conductors are always equipotential –q
surfaces.
(iii) Charge always resides on outer surface of conductor. C D
+q
(iv) If there is a cavity inside the conductor having no B q'
charge then charge will always reside only on outer
A
surface of conductor. a
(v) Electric field is always perpendicular to conducting 2a
surface.
3a
(vi) Electric lines of force never enter into conductors.
(vii) Electric field intensity near the conducting surface
is given by formula 4a
 
E nˆ As Vc = 0
0
VA – VC = VA
    A
EA  A nˆ ; E B  B nˆ Now calculating VA we get
0 0
  C B
kq k(q / 4) kq
VA  – –
and EC  C nˆ 2a 3a 4a
0
(viii) When a conductor is grounded its potential becomes zero. kq
 VA =
6a
V=0
kq
or VA – VC =
6a

Note
(ix) When an isolated conductor is grounded then its
charge becomes zero.

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
 Electrostatics-2 2.29

Section D - Plates q3
12. COMBINATION OF CONDUCTING due to q3 charge layer = 2A  towards left 
0
PLATES :
Let us consider two conducting plates placed parallel q4
due to q4 charge layer = 2A  towards left 
to each other. I plate is given a charge Q1 & II 0
plate is given a charge Q2 which distributes itself 
as shown in figure above E net at P

Q1 A
B q1 q2 q3 q4
Q2 = 2A – 2A – 2A – 2A [Towards right]
0 0 0 0
I II As the point P lies inside the conductor the field
should be zero
E q1 q2 q3 E
q4 Hence
q1 q  q3  q4
 2
2A 0 2A0
D C
where q1 + q2 = Q1 q1 = q2 + q3 + q4 (But q2 = – q3)
q3 + q4 = Q2 q1 = q4
Now we take a rectangular gaussian surface Q1  Q 2
ABCD. Among the four faces, two faces AD & Puting in equation above we get q1 = q4 =
2
BC of this closed surfaces lie completely inside the
EXAMPLE 15
conductor where the electric field is zero. The flux
through these faces is, therefore, zero. The other Two large parallel conducting sheets (placed at finite
parts of the closed surface AB & CD which are distance) are given charges Q and 2Q respectively.
outside the conductor are parallel to the electric field Find out charges appearing on all the surfaces.

i.e. their area vector is perpendicular to E & hence
Q 2Q
the flux through these parts is also zero. The total
flux of the electric field through the closed surface
is therefore zero. From gauss's law, the total charge
inside the closed surface should be zero. The charge P Q
on the inner surface of I should be equal & opposite
to that on the inner surface of II.
So q2 = – q3
Sol. Let there is x amount of charge on left side of first
Now to find further relations between the charges
plate, so on its right side charge will be Q – x, similarly
distributed we find electric field at point P
for second plate there is y charge on left side and 2Q
Electric field at point P
– y charge is on right side of second plate
due to q1 charge ayer
Ep = 0 (By property of conductor)

q1
(towards right)
2A0 x Q–x y 2Q –y

P Q

 As E due to a single layer of charge 
 
(towards right)   q 
is  1
 2e 0 2A0 
x Q  x y 2Q  y 
    0
q1 2A0  2A0 2A0 2A0 
due to q2 charge layer = 2A  towards left 
0

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
2.30 Theory and Exercise Book

we can also say that charge on left side of

P = charge on right side of P
x = Q – x + y + 2Q – y
3Q Q 3Q 5Q 5Q Q Q 3Q
 x 
, Qx  2 2 2 2 2 2
2 2

3Q Q Q 3Q
2 2 2 2
EXAMPLE 17
An isolated conducting sheet of area A and carrying
a charge Q is placed in a uniform electric field E,
Similarly for point Q:
such that electric field is perpendicular to sheet and
x + Q – x + y = 2Q – y
covers all the sheet. Find out charges appearing on
 y = Q/2, 2Q – y = 3Q/2
its two surfaces.
So final charge distribution of plates is :
Q

EXAMPLE 16
Figure shows three large metallic plates with charges
–Q, 3Q and Q respectively. Determine the final E
charges on all the surfaces.
–Q 3Q Q

Sol. Let there is x charge on left side of plate and Q – x

charge on right side of plate
EP = 0
Sol. We assume that charge on surface 2 is x. Following
x Qx
conservation of charge, we see that surfaces 1 has E
2A0 2A 0
charge (–Q – x). The electric field inside the metal
plate is zero so fields at P is zero. Resultant field at P
x Q
EP = 0   E
A0 2A0
Q  x x  3Q  Q
 
2A0 2A0
x Q–x
3Q Q
1 2 3 4 5 6 Qx x
–Q–x x E
2A 0 P 2A 0
P

 –Q –x = x + 4Q
5Q
 x Q Q
2  x  EA0 and Q  x   EA 0
2 2
We see that charges on the facing surfaces of the plates Q
So charge on one side is  EA0 and other side
are of equal magnitude and opposite sign. This can be 2
in general proved by gauss theorem also. Remember
this it is important result. Thus the final charge distribution Q
 EA 0
on all the surface is as shown in figure : 2

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
 Electrostatics-2 2.31

Solve this question for Q = 0 without using the above

Q
answer and match that answers with the answers that Ef 
A 0
you will get by putting Q = 0 in the above answer.
Before earthing this electric field was
(a) Earthing of a System of Parallel Plates Q E
Consider a large plate shown in figure charged with Ei   f
2A 0 2
a charge Q. This is connected to earth with a switch
S as shown. If switch S is closed, whole charge will Thus just after earthing the electric field between
flow to earth and the plate will become neutral as in the plates is doubled and the potential difference
the surrounding of a single earthed body no electric between the two plates will also be doubled. as plate
field exist. B is earthed, its potential is zero. The potential of
Now consider the system of two plates A and B plate. A can be given as
shown here. Plate A is given a charge Q and plate B Q
is neutral the charge distribution on plates is as shown VA = A  d
0
in figure. If the switch S is now closed the total
charge on outer surface of the system of plates after Now consider another example shown in figure. In
earthing should become zero hence whole charge a system of three parallel plates A, B and C the
on plate A will transfer to its inner surface and hence middle plate B is given a charge Q due to which
on the inner surface of plate B an equal and opposite charges are induced on plates A and C as shown.
charge –Q is developed which is given by earth as On the basis of discussion done in the previous section
shown in figure we can say that if switch S1 is closed whole charge
of plate B will shift on its left surface and a charge –
Q
– + – +
Q is flown through S1 toward plate A and final
– + Q Q – + Q situation will be as shwon in figure (a)
Q –
– – + 2 – + 2
2 – 2 – Q Q
+ +
– + – P + + – + + – +
– – – + + – +
+ + + d1 d2 –
– + – + + – + + – +
– – Q + – + Q
+ +  – Q Q+ + Q Q –
– –
– + – + 2 + – –  + + 2 – + 2
2+ 2
– + – + + – 2 + – +
– + – + + –  + + – +
E –
– + – + + – + + – +
+ – + + – +
A d B –
+ – + + – +
S + – + + – +
–
+ – + + – +
(a) S1 + + – +
A B C S2

+Q –Q
+ –
+ – Q
–Q
+ – +
–
+ – +
–
+ – P d1
+
d2
–
+ – +
 –
+ – +
E –
+ – +
–
+ – +
–
+ – +
–
+ – +
–
+ – +
–
d – +
S – +
(b) S1 +
A B C S2

If area of plates is A, the electric field between the

system of plates can be given as (a)

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
2.32 Theory and Exercise Book

q1 q2
Q d1 = d2
+
–Q A 0 A 0
–
– +
d1 + d2 or q1d1 = q2d2
–
– + And we have q1 + q2 = Q
– +
– + Qd 2
–
–
+
+ Thus on solving we get q1  d  d
1 2
– +
– +
– + Qd1
– + and q 2 
S1 + d1  d 2
(B) (C) S2
(A)
Thus if both the switches are closed simultaneously,
(b)
charges –q1 and –q2 will flow through the switches
S1 and S2 from each of plates A and C.
If instead of switch S1, S2 is closed in the beginning
the distribution of charges on the system will be EXAMPLE 18
obviously as shown according to the figure (b) and When a charge is given to a conducting plate, the
a charge –Q now flows through switch S2 from earth charge distributes itself on two surface.
to plate C.
If we close both the switches simultaneously, the + +
+ + 
situation will be according to shown in figure. Now + + 2 0  
the charge on plate B is distributed on the two surface + + +
 0
as shown and equal and oppsoite charges –q1 and – + +
+ + 2 0
q2 are developed on the inner surfaces of plates A
+ +
and C.
Here charges q1 and q2 can be calculated by equating the
 
potential difference of plates A and B and C and B as
20 is the E due to a single layer of charge but as
VB – VA = VB – VC
Here the electric field between plates can be given as in the case of conducting sheet there is generation
of two surfaces or two layers of charges.
q1
Between plates A and B E1 
A 0 
 electric field outside the conducting plate is
0
q2
Between plates B & C E2 = A EXAMPLE 19
0
When a charge Q is given to a non conducting plate
& conducting plate. Find the ratio of electric field
–q1 q1 q2 –q2 produced by them ?
– + + –
– + + – Sol. For non conducting plate For conducting plate
– + + –
– + + – Q
– + + Q
  – + + + Q
– E1 + + E2 – Q
– + + –
+  + +   2A
– + + – + A + +
– + + – +
– + + + +
+  +    Q
–
+ + +
+ E   Q
– –
– + + – + +  0 2A 0
S1 + + + 2 0 2A 0
A d1
B
d2
C S2 + +

Q
2A 0
1:1
Now we have VBA = VBC Ratio Q
2A 0

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
 Electrostatics-2 2.33

13. (A) TOTAL ELECTROSTATIC system hence here we can calculate the total
ENERGY OF A SYSTEM OF CHARGES electrostatic energy of the system by integrating
Total electrostatic potential energy of system of the field energy density in the space surrounding
charges can be given as the shells where electric field exist.
U =  self energy of all charged bodies +  Total field energy in the electric field associated
Interaction energy of all pairs of charged bodies with the system shown in figure can be given as
Let us consider some cases to understand this b 2 2
1  Kq1  1  K(q1 q 2 ) 
concept. Figure shows two uniformly charged non U 0  2  4x 2 dx 
 0  2  4x 2 dx

2  x  2  r 
conducting spheres of radius R1 and R2 and charged 0 0

with charges Q1 and Q2 respectively separated by 2  2

a distance r. If we find the total electrostatic energyU  1   Kq1  4x 2 dx  1   K(q1  q 2 )  4x 2 dx
of this system, we can write as 0
2  x 2 
0  0
2 
0
r2

 
U = Uself + Uinteraction

3KQ12 3KQ 22 KQ1Q2

U  
5R1 5R 2 r

+ + a
+ + + + b x
+ + + + + +
+ +
dx
+ + + +
+ +
+ + + + + +
+ R1 + + R2 +
+ + + +
Q Q1 x

dx
(B) ELECTROSTATIC ENERGY OF A
SYSTEM OF CONCENTRIC SHELLS : 1 2 1 1  1 1 
= Kq1  –   K(q1  q 2 ) 2  
Figure shown two concentric shells of radii a and b 2  a b  2 b
charged uniformly with charges q1 and q2. Here
the total energy of this system can be given as 1 Kq12 Kq12 Kq12 Kq 22 Kq 22
= –   
2 a 2b b 2b b

Kq12 Kq 22 Kq1q 2
=  
2b 2b b
EXAMPLE 20
a q2
q1
Figure shows a shell of radius R having charge q1
uniformly distributed over it. A point charge q is placed
b at the centre of shell. Find work required to increase
radius of shell from R to R1 as shown in fiugre(b)

Utotal = self energy of inner shell + self energy of

outer shell + interaction energy of the two shell R1
R

Kq12 Kq 22 Kq1q 2 R +q
=  
2a 2b b +q
q1
Alternative Method : q1
We know that the total electrostatic energy of a
system in stored in the form of field energy of the (a) (b)

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
2.34 Theory and Exercise Book

Sol. Work = Ui – Uf b
q2 K 1
U1  SE q  SE q1  IE = SE q 
Kq12
Kq q
 1
= 2 R2 x
a
2
dx
2R R
Kq 2 2
 1 1  Kq  1 1 
Kq12 Kq1q   b – a   2R 2  b – a 
Uf = SE q   2R 2    
2R1 R1
work done = Ui – Uf
EXAMPLE 22
Kq12 Kq1q Kq12 Kq1q Find the electrostatic energy stored in a cylindircal
=  – –
2R R 2R1 R1 shell of length , inner radius a and outer radius b,
(Try this problem yourself using the energy density coaxial with a uniformly charged wire with linear
formula) charge density  C/m.
Sol. For this we consider an elemental shell of radius x
EXAMPLE 21 and width dx. The volume of this shell dV can be
A point charge q = 3 C is located at the centre of given as
the spherical layer of uniform isotropic dielectric with dV = 2x.dx
relative permittivity k = 3. The inside radius of the The electric field due to the wire at the shell is
layer is equal to a = 250 mm and the outside radius 2K
E
is b = 500 mm. Find the electrostatic energy inside x
the dielectric layer. The electrostatic field energy stored in the volume
Sol. Consider a small elemental shell of thickness dx. of this shell is
Volume = dV = 4x2dx
1
Kq dU = 0 E 2 .dV
Electric field at x = 2 2
x k
2
1  2K 
1 2 1 K 2q2 or dU  0   .2x.dx
electric energy density = 0 E  0 4 2 2  x 
2 2 x k
The total electrostatic energy stored in the above
k=a mentioned volume can be obtained by integrating
the above expression within limits from a to b as

a 2
1  2K 

U  dU   0 2x.dx
2  x 
a
x b b
q
dx b
2 1
or U
40  x dx
a

b
Thus energy content in the element shell is 2 1
or U
40  x dx
1 K 2q2 a
 dE  0 4 2 4x 2 dx
2 x k
2 b
or U n
b
4 K 2 q 2 4 0  a 
E=  0 2 4 x 2 dx
a
2 k x
Note

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
 Electrostatics-2 2.35

Exercise - 1 Objective Problems | JEE Main

Section A - Questions Based on electric flux 5. A cylinder of radius (R) and length (L) is placed
for various configuration, in a uniform electrical field (E) parallel to the axis
Question on solid angle of the cyclinder . the total flux for the surface of
concept, Gauss law Based the cylinder is given by-
Questions
(A) 2R2E (B) R2 E
1. Statement - 1 : The flux crossing through a closed
surface is independent of the location of encloses R 2  R 2
charge. (C) (D) zero
E
Statement - 2 : Upon the displacement of charges

within a closed surface, the E at any point on surface 6. The volume charge density as a function of distance
does not change. X from one face inside a unit cube is varying as
(A) Statement - 1 is true, Statement - 2 is true and shown in the figure. Then the total flux (in S.I. units)
statement - 2 is correct explanation for statement - 1. through the cube if (0 = 8.85 × 10–12 C/m3) is :
(B) Statement - 1 is true, Statement - 2 is true and
statement - 2 is NOT correct explanation for density
statement - 1.
0
(C) Statement - 1 is true, statement - 2 is false.
(D) Statement - 1 is false, statement - 2 is true.
x
1/4 3/4 1 (in m)
2. Statement - 1 : Electric field of a dipole can't be
found using only Gauss law. (i.e. without using (A) 1/4 (B) 1/2
superposition principle) (C) 3/4 (D) 1
Statement - 2 : Gauss law is valid only for
symmetrical charge distribution 7. A hemisphere (radius R) is placed in electric field
(A) Statement - 1 is true, Statement - 2 is true and as shown in fig. Total outgoing flux is -
statement - 2 is correct explanation for statement - 1.
(B) Statement - 1 is true, Statement - 2 is true and
statement - 2 is NOT correct explanation for
statement - 1.
(C) Statement - 1 is true, statement - 2 is false.
(D) Statement - 1 is false, statement - 2 is true.

3. In a region of space, the electric field is in the x

 (A) R2 E (B) 2R2 E
direction and is given as E  E0 x i . Consider an
(C) 4R2 E (D) (R2 E)/2
imaginary cubical volume of edge a, with its edges
parallel to the axes of coordinates. The charge inside 8. A surface enclosed an electric dipole, the flux
this volume is through the surface is-
(A) zero (B)  0E0 a3 (A) Infinite (B) Positive
(C) Negative (D) Zero
1 3 1
(C)  E0 a (D)  0E0 a 2
0 6 9. Electric charges are distributed in a small volume.
The flux of the electric field through a spherical
4. Electric flux through a surface of area 100 m2 lying surface of radius 20 cm surrounding the total charge
 is 50 V-m. The flux over a concentric sphere of
in the xy plane is (in V-m) if E  i  2 j  3 k
radius 40 cm will be –
(A) 100 (B) 141.4 (A) 25 V-m (B) 50 V-m
(C) 173.2 (D) 200 (C) 100 V-m (D) 200 V-m

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
2.36 Theory and Exercise Book

A uniform electric field  ˆ a

10. E = a î + b j , intersects a 15. A point charge q is placed at a distance directly
2
surface of area A. What is the flux through this area above the centre of a horizontal square of side ‘a’
if the surface lies in the yz plane –
and another point charge q is placed at a distance
(A) aA (B) 0
‘a’ directly below one of its (the square’s) corners.
(C) bA (D) A a 2  b 2 The electric flux through the square is :
q q
11. A uniformly charged and infinitely long line having (A) 6  (B) 8 
0 0
a linear charge density ‘’ is placed at a normal
distance y from a point O. Consider a sphere of q 5q
radius R with O as centre and R > y. Electric flux (C) 24  ((D) 24 
0 0
through the surface of the sphere is-
2 R
(A) zero (B)  16. The electric field intensity at the centre of a
0 uniformly charged hemispherical shell is E0. Now
two portions of the hemisphere are cut from either
2 R 2  y 2  R 2  y2
(C) (D) side and remaining portion is shown in figure. If
0 0

a=b= , then electric field intensity at centre due
12. Two spherical conductors A and B of radii 3
1 mm and 2 mm are separated by a distance of 5 to remaining portion is :
cm and are uniformly charged. If the spheres are
connected by a conducting wire, then in equilibrium
condition, the ratio of the magnitude of the electric
fields at the surfaces of spheres A and B is
(A) 4 : 1 (B) 1 : 2  
(C) 2 : 1 (D) 1 : 4

13. A point charge q is placed at the center of a

E0 E0
 1  (A) (B)
spherical shell of radius R =   m. Electric 3 6
 
E0
flux through a position of sphere having surface (C) (D) Information insufficient
area = 0.2 m2 is : 2

q q Section B - Properties of conductors

(A) (B)
o 20 o 17. Statement - 1 : If a concentric spherical Gaussian
surface is drawn inside thin spheical shell of charge,
q 0.2 q
(C) (D) electric field (E) at each point of surface must be
10 o o zero.
Statement - 2 : In accordance with Gauss's law
14. A wire of linear charge  passes through a cuboids
  Qnet enclosed
of length l, breadth b and height h in such a manner E   [Link] 
that flux through the cuboids is maximum. The 0
position of wire is now changed so that the flux Q net enclosed  0 implies E  0
through the cuboids is minimum. If l > b > h then
(A) Statement - 1 is true, Statement - 2 is true and
the ratio of maximum flux to minimum flux will be :
statement - 2 is correct explanation for statement - 1.
l 2  b2  h2 l 2  b2 (B) Statement - 1 is true, Statement - 2 is true and
(A) (B) statement - 2 is NOT correct explanation for
h h
statement - 1.
h l (C) Statement - 1 is true, statement - 2 is false.
(C) (D)
l 2  b2 l 2  b2  h2 (D) Statement - 1 is false, statement - 2 is true.

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
 Electrostatics-2 2.37

18. Statement - 1 : In a given situation of arrangement 21. Figure shows two large cylindrical shells having
of charges, an extra charge is placed outside the uniform linear charge densities + and –. Radius
Gaussian surface. In the Gauss Theorem of inner cylinder is 'a' and that of outer cylinder is
  Qin 'b'. A charged particle of mass m, charge q revolves
 [Link]  0 in a circle of radius r, Then its speed 'v' is : (Neglect
 gravity and assume the radii of both the cylinders
Qin remains unchanged whereas electric field E at
the site of the element is changed. to be very small in comparison to their length.)

Statement - 2 : Electric field E at any point on the
Gaussian surface is due to inside charge only.
(A) Statement - 1 is true, Statement - 2 is true and
statement - 2 is correct explanation for statement - 1. – 
(B) Statement - 1 is true, Statement - 2 is true and
r
statement - 2 is NOT correct explanation for
statement - 1. v
a
(C) Statement - 1 is true, statement - 2 is false.
b
(D) Statement - 1 is false, statement - 2 is true.

19. An infinite, uniformly charged sheet with surface

charge density  cuts through a spherical Gaussian
surface of radius R at a distance x from its center, q 2q
as shown in the figure. The electric flux  through (A) 2 0 m (B)  0 m
the Gaussian surface is

 R2  q q
(A) (C)  0 m (D) 4  0 m
0

2 (R 2  x 2 )
(B) 0
R 22. The net charge given to an isolated conducting solid
x
sphere :
(R  x ) 2  (A) must be distributed uniformly on the surface
(C)
0 (B) may be distributed uniformly on the surface
(C) must be distributed uniformly in the volume
 (R2  x2 ) (D) may be distributed uniformly in the volume.
(D) 0

23. The net charge given to a solid insulating sphere:

20. Three charges q1 = 1 c , q2 =2 c and q3 = –3 c and (A) must be distributed uniformly in its volume
four surfaces S1, S2, S3 and S4 are shown. The flux (B) may by distributed uniformly in its volume.
emerging through surface S2 in N-m2 / C is - (C) must be distributed uniformly on its surface.
(D) the distribution will depend upon whether other
charges are present or not.

24. You are travelling in a car during a thunder storm.

In order to protect yoursefl from lightening, would
you prefer to :
(A) Remain in the car
(B) Take shelter under a tree
(A) 36  × 103 (B) –36  × 103
(C) Get out and be flat on the ground
(C) 36  × 109 (D) –36  × 109
(D) Touch the nearest electrical pole

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
2.38 Theory and Exercise Book

25. A spherical conductor A contains two spherical 29. Two sperical conductors B and C having equal radii
cavities. The total charge on the conductor itself is and carrying equal charges in them repel each other
zero. However, there is a point charge q b at the with a force F when kept apart at some distance. A
centre of one cavity and qc at the centre of the
third spherical conductor having same radius as that
other. At an equal distance r away from the centre
of the spherical conductor, there is another charge of B but uncharged, is brought in contact with B,
qd. Force acting on qb, qc and qd are F1, F2 and F3 then brought in contact with C and finally removed
respectively. [Assume all charges are positive] away from both. The new force of repulsion
qd between B and C is
F 3F
(A) (B)
4 4
qb
qc
F 3F
(C) (D)
8 8
(A) F1 < F2 < F3 (B) F1 = F2 < F3
(C) F1 = F2 > F3 (D) F1 > F2 > F3
30. A charged ball B hangs from a silk thread S. which
26. Electric lines of force are as shown in the figure. makes an angle  with a large charged conducting
Then potential at point P : sheet P, as shown in the figure. The surface charge
density  of the sheet is proportional to

+
P +
P +
+ S
+
(A) is zero (B) is not zero +
+ B
(C) may be zero also (D) is not defined

27. The figure shows a charge q placed inside a cavity (A) cos (B) cot 
in an uncharged conductor. Now if an external (C) sin  (D) tan 
electric field is switched on then :
31. A conducting liquid bubble of radius a and thickness
C t (t<<a) is charged to potential V. If the bubble
q
collapses to a droplet, find the potential on the droplet.
1/ 3 2
 a  2a 
(A) only induced charge on outer surface will (A)   V (B)   V
 3t   t 
redistribute.
(B) only induced charge on inner surface will 3 1/ 3
a  2t 
redistribute (C)   V (D)   V
(C) Both induced charge on outer and inner surface t  a
will redistribute.
32. In the given fig. the charge appears on the sphere is
(D) force on charge q placed inside the cavity will
change
28. A thin spherical conducting shell of radius R has a
charge q. Another charge Q is placed at the centre q
of the shell. The electrostatic potential at a point P r
at a distance R/2 from the centre fo the shell is
2Q 2Q 2q d
(A) (B) 
4 0 R 4 0 R 4 0 R qd
(A) q (B)
2Q q (q  Q) 2 r
(C)  (D) qr
4 0 R 4  0 R 4 0 R (C) – (D) zero
d

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
 Electrostatics-2 2.39

Section C - Spheres Problem, Electrostatics 37. Statement - 1 : A point charge q is placed inside a
pressure cavity of conductor as shown. Another point charge
(Questions 33 to 34) Q is placed outside the conductor as shown. Now as
Both question (33) and (34) refer to the system of the point charge Q pushed away from conductor,
charges as shown in the figure. A spherical shell the potential difference (VA – VB) between two point
with an inner radius ‘a’ and an outer radius ‘b’ is A and B within the cavity of sphere remains constant.
Statement - 2 : The electric field due to charges
made of conducting material. A point charge +Q is
on outer surface of conductor and outside the
placed at the centre of the spherical shell and a conductor is zero at all points inside the conductor.
total charge –q is placed on the shell.

Q a
A B Q
–q
q
33. charge –q is distributed on the surfaces as
(A) –Q on the inner surface, – q on outer surface
(B) –Q on the inner surface, – q + Q on the outer surface
(C) +Q on the inner surface, – q – Q on the outer surface
(D) The charge –q is spread uniformly between (A) Statement - 1 is true, Statement - 2 is true and
the inner and outer surface statement - 2 is correct explanation for statement - 1.
(B) Statement - 1 is true, Statement - 2 is true and
34. Assume that the electrostatic potential is zero at an statement-2 is NOT correct explanation for
infinite distance from the spherical shell. The statement-1.
electrostatic potential at a distance R(a < R < b) (C) Statement - 1 is true, statement - 2 is false.
from the centre of the shell is (D) Statement - 1 is false, statement - 2 is true.
(A) 0
KQ Qq 38. A solid sphere of radius R is charged uniformly. At
(B) (C) K what distance from its surface is the electrostatic
a R
Qq potential half of the potential at the centre ?
1
(D) K (where K  ) (A) R (B) R/2
b 4  0
35. A hollow metal sphere of radius 5 cm is charged (C) R/3 (D) 2R
such that the potential on its surface is 10 V. The
39. Two similar conducting spherical shells having
potential at the centre of the sphere is
charges 40 C and –20C are some distance apart.
(A) 0 V (B) 10 V
Now they are touched and kept at same distance.
(C) same as at point 5 cm away from the surface
The ratio of the initial to the final force between
out side sphere
them is :
(D) same as a point 25 cm away from the surface
(A) 8 : 1 (B) 4 : 1
36. A positively charged body ‘A’ has been brought near (C) 1 : 8 (D) 1 : 1
a neutral brass sphere B mounted on a glass stand
as shown in the figure. The potetial of B will be: 40. n small drops of same size are charged to V volts
each. If they coalesce to form a signal large drop,
B then its potential will be -
++ (A) V/n (B) Vn
++
+ ++ (C) Vn1/3 (D) Vn2/3
++ ++
+
A ++
41. 1000 identical drops of mercury are charged to a
potential of 1 V each. They join to form a single
(A) Zero (B) Negative drop. The potential of this drop will be -
(C) Positive (D) Infinite (A) 0.01 V (B) 0.1 V
(C) 10 V (D) 100 V

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
2.40 Theory and Exercise Book

42. A solid conducting sphere having a charge Q is Q

surrounded by an uncharged concentric conducting
hollow spherical shell Let the potential difference C
A
between the surface of the solid sphere and that of q1
the outer surface of the hollow shell be V. If the B
q2
shell is now given a charge of 3Q the new potential
difference between the same two surfaces is
(A) V (B) 2V q1  q2 q1  q2
(A) , ,Q
(C) 4V (D) –2V 2 2
Q  q1  q3 Q  q1  q2 Q  q1  q2
43. A positive charge q is placed in a spherical cavity (B) , ,
made in a positively charged sphere. The centres 3 3 3
of sphere and cavity are displaced by a small q1  q2  Q q1  q2  Q
 (C) , ,0
distance l . Force on charge q is : 2 3
 (D) 0, 0, Q + q1 + q2
(A) in the direction parallel to vector l
(B) in radial direction 48. There are four concentric shells A, B, C and D of
(C) in a direction which depends on the magnitude radii a, 2a, 3a and 4a respectively. Shells B and D
of charge density in sphere are given charges +q and –q respectively. Shell C is
(D) direction can not be determined now earthed. The potential difference VA – VC is :

44. If the electric potential of the inner metal sphere is Kq Kq Kq Kq

(A) (B) (C) (D)
10 volt & that of the outer shell is 5 volt, then the 2a 3a 4a 6a
potential at the centre will be -
Section D - Plates
a 49. An uncharged sphere of metal is placed in a uniform
b electric field produced by two large conducting
parallel plates having equal and opposite charges,
(A) 10 volt (B) 5 volt then lines of force look like :
(C) 15 volt (D) 0 + + + + ++ + + + + ++

45. Two identical conducting spheres, having charges of

opposite sign, attract each other with a force of 0.108 (A) (B)
N when separated by 0.5 m. The spheres are connected ––––––– – – – ––
by a conducting wire, which is then removed, and + + + + + + + + +
+
thereafter, they repel each other with a force of 0.036
N. The initial charges on the spheres are
(A) ± 5 × 10–6 C and  15 × 10–6 C (C) (D)
(B) ± 1.0 × 10–6 C and  3.0 × 10–6 C – – – – –
– – – – –
(C) ± 2.0 × 10–6 C and  6.0 × 10–6 C
50. Between two infinitely long wires having linear
(D) ± 0.5 × 10–6 C and  1.5 × 10–6 C charge densities  and – there are two points A
and B as shown in the figure. The amount of work
46. Three concentric metallic spherical shell A, B and
done by the electric field in moving a point charge
C or radii a, b and c (a < b < c) have surface charge
q0 from A to B is equal to
densities –, +, and – respectively. The potential
of shell A is -
(A) (/0)[a + b – c] (B) (/0)[a – b + c]
(C) (/0)[b – a – c] (D) none

47. Two small conductors A and B are given charges

q1 and q2 respectively. Now they are placed inside q 2q 0
0
a hollow metallic conductor (C) carrying a charge (A) 2 ln 2 (B) – ln 2
Q. If all the three conductors A, B and C are 0  0
connected by a conducting wire as shown, the 2q 0 q 0
charges on A, B and C will be respectively. (C) ln 2 (D)  ln 2
 0 0

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
 Electrostatics-2 2.41

Exercise - 2 (Level-I) Objective Problems | JEE Main

Section A - Questions Based on electric flux 5. A wire of infinite length passing through points H
for various configuration, and B of a cube of side a, as shown has a uniform
Question on solid angle charge density . Find the electric field at a point F
concept, Gauss law Based
of the cube ; (N is the point of intersection of two
Questions
body diagonals HB and DF)
1. Units of electric flux are -
H G
N – m2 N
(A) (B)
Coul 2 Coul 2 – m 2 E
N F
C
(C) volt-m (D) Volt-m3 D

A
B
2. The wedge-shaped surface in figure is in a region of 
(A) 3 0a (B) zero
uniform electric field E0 along x axis. The net electric
flux for the entire closed surface is –
 
Y
(C) 2 a (D) 2 3 a
0 0

Eo
6. A long string with a linear charge density of l per
5m
3m X unit length passes through an imaginary cube of edge
a. The maximum flux of the electric field through
4m
Z the cube will be
(A) 9 E0 (B) 15 E0 (A) la/e0 (B) 2 a/ 
(C) 12 E0 (D) Zero
(C) 6la/e0 (D) 3a/ 

3. A charge Q is placed at the centre of a cube. The 7. A +q1 charge is at centre of an imaginary spherical
flux of the electric field through the six surfaces of
the cube is Gaussion surface ‘S’, and – q1 charge is placed
nearby this +q1 charge inside ‘S’. A charge +q2 is
Q Q located outside this Gaussian surface. Then electric
(A) 6 (B) 
0 0 field on Gaussian surface will be :
(A) due to – q1 & q1 (B) uniform
Q Q
(C) (D) (C) due to all charges (D) zero
6L2 3L2

8. Electric field in a region is given by E  4xˆi  6yjˆ .
4. The electric field in a region is given by
 The charge enclosed in the cube of side 1 m oriented
E  200 î N / C for x > 0 and  200î N / C for x as shown in the diagram is given by   0. Find the
value of .
< 0. A closed cylinder of length 2m and cross-section
area 102 m2 is kept in such a way that the axis of Z

cylinder is along X-axis and its centre coincides with

origin. The total charge inside the cylinder is y
(Take e0 = 8.85 × 10–12 C2m2.N)
x
(A) zero (B) 1.86 × 10–5 C
(C) 1.77 × 10–11 C (D) 35.4 × 10–8 C (A) 2 (B) 4
(C) 3 (D) 8

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
2.42 Theory and Exercise Book

9. An electrostatic field line leaves at angle frompoint charge 14. The electric field intensity at a point located at distance
+q1, and connects with point charge –q2 at angle  . r (r < R) from the center of a spherical conductor
Find the ratio q1/q2 (Given : = 60°, = 90°). (radius R) charged Q will be -
(A) kQR/r3 (B) kQr/R3
(C) kQ/r 2 (D) zero

+q1 –q2 15. Three concentric conducting spherical shells carry

charges as follows +4Q on the inner shell, –2Q on the
(A) 1 : 2 (B) 2 : 1 middle shell and –5Q on the outer shell. The charge on
(C) 3 : 4 (D) None of these the inner surface of the outer shell is :
(A) 0 (B) 4 Q
10. The electric flux coming out of the equi-potential surface (C) –Q (D) –2Q
is-
(A) perpendicular to the surface 16. A solid metallic sphere has a charge +3Q. Concentric
(B) parallel to the surface with this sphere is a conducting spherical shell having
(C) in all directions charge –Q. The radius of the sphere is a and that of
(D) zero the spherical shell is b (>a). What is the electric field
at a distance r (a < r < b) from the centre ?
11. A rectangular surface of 2 metre width and 4 metre 1 Q 1 3Q
length, is placed in an electric field of intensity 20 (A) 4 r (B) 4 r
0 0

newton/C, there is an angle of 60º between the 1 3Q 1 Q

(C) 4 r2 (D) 4 r2
perpendicular to surface and electrical field intensity. 0 0

Then total flux emitted from the surface will be- (In
Volt- metre) 17. The electric field at the surface of a charged spherical
(A) 80 (B) 40 conductor is 10 KV/m. The electric field at a distance
(C) 20 (D) 160 equal to the diameter from its centre will be -
(A) 2.5 V/m (B) 2.5 KV/m
12. A square of side 20cm. is enclosed by a surface of (C) 5.0 KV/m (D) 5.0 V/m
sphere of 80 cm. radius . square and sphere have the
same centre. four charges +2×10–6 c, –5×10–6 c, 18. Two conducting spheres of radii r1 and r2 are equally
–3×10–6 c, +6×10–6c are located at the four corners charged. The ratio of their potentral is-
of a square, Then out going total flux from spherical (A) r1 2 / r2 2 (B) r2 2 / r1 2
surface in N-m2/c will be (C) r1 / r2 (D) r2 / r1
(A) zero (B) (16) × 10–6
(C) (8) × 10–6 (D) (36 ) × 10–6 19. The potential of a charged drop is v. This is divided
into n smaller drops, then each drop will have the
Section B - Properties of conductors potential as ;
13. Which of the following statements are correct? (A) n–1 v (B) n2/3v.
(A) Electric field calculated by Gauss law is the field (C) n3/2v (D) n–2/3 v
due to only those charges which are enclosed inside
the Gaussian surface. 20. 8 small droplets of water of same size and same
(B) Gauss law is applicable only when there is a charge form a large spherical drop. The potential of
symmetrical distribution of charge. the large drop, in comparision to potential of a small
(C) Electric flux through a closed surface will depends drop will be -
only on charges enclosed within that surface only. (A) 2 times (B) 4 times
(D) None of these (C) 8times (D) same

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
 Electrostatics-2 2.43

21. An infinite nonconducting sheet of charge has a 25. A point charge q is borught from infinity (slowly so
surface charge density of 10–7 C/m2. The separation that heat developed in the shell is negligible) and is
between two equipotential surfaces near the sheet placed at the centre of a conducting neutral spherical
whose potential differ by 5V is shell of inner radius a and outer radius b, then work
(A) 0.88 cm (B) 0.88 mm done by external agent is:
(C) 0.88 m (D) 5 × 10–7 m (A) 0
k q2
(B) b
2b
Section C - Spheres Problem, Electrostatics 2 2 q
kq kq a
pressure (C) 
2b 2a
22. A conducting sphere of radius r has a charge. Then
k q2 k q2
(A) The charge is uniformly distributed over its (D) 
2a 2b
surface, if there is an external electric field.
(B) Distribution of charge over its surface will be non 26. A unit positive point charge of mass m is projected
unifrom if no external electric field exist in space. with a velocity V inside the tunnel as shown. The tunnel
(C) Electric field strength inside the sphere will be equal has been made inside a uniformly charged
to zero only when no external electric field exists. nonconducting sphere. The minimum velocity with
(D) Potential at every point of the sphere must be same which the point charge should be projected such it
can it reach the opposite end of the tunnel, is equal to
23. For a spherical shell
(A) If potential inside it is zero then it necessarily
electrically neutral R/2

(B) electric field in a charged conducting spherical

shell can be zero only when the charge is uniformly
distributed (A) [R2/4m0]1/2
(C) electric potential due to induced charges at a (B) [R2/24m0]1/2
point inside it will always be zero (C) [R2/6m0]1/2
(D) none of these (D) zero because the initial and the final points are
at same potential.
24. A positive point charge Q is kept ( as shown in the
figure) inside a neutral conducting shell whose centre 27. A dipole having dipole moment p is placed in front
is at C. An external uniform electric field E is applied. of a solid uncharged conducting sphere as shown in
Then : the diagram. The net potential at point. A lying on
E the surface of the sphere is ;
A
r
C 
Q P
(A) Force on Q due to E is zero
(B) Net force on Q is zero
kp cos  kp cos 2 
(C) Net force acting on Q and conducting shell (A) (B)
r2 r2
considered as a system is zero
2kp cos 2 
(D) Net force acting on the shell due to E is zero. (C) zero (D)
r2

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
2.44 Theory and Exercise Book

28. Two uniformly charged non-conducting 33. Two spherical, nonconducting, and very thin shells
hemispherical sheels each having uniform charge of uniformly distributed positive charge Q and radius
density  and radius R form a complete sphere (not d are located a distance 10d from each other. A
stuck together) and surround a concentric spherical positive point charge q is placed inside one of the
conducting shell of radius R/2. If hemispherical parts shells at a distance d/2 from the center, on the line
are in equilibrium then minimum surface charge connecting the centers of the two shells, as shown in
density of inner conducting shell is : the figure. What is the net force on the charge q ?
(A) –2 (B) –/2 Q Q
(C) – (D) 2 d
o

}
d/2
29. A metal sphere A of radius R has a charge of Q on
it .The field at a point B outside the sphere is E. 10 d
qQ
Now another sphere of radius R having a charge (A) 36 l d2 to the left
-3Q is placed at point B. The total field at a point 0

mid-way between A and B due to both sphere is-

qQ
(A) 4E (B) 8E (B) 36 l d2 to the right
0
(C) 12E (D) 16E
362 qQ
30. A conducting sphere of radius R is charged to a (C) 36 l d2 to the left
0
potential of V volt. Then the electric field at a distance
r (>R) from the centre of the sphere would be - 360 qQ
(D) 36 l d2 to the right
0
RV V
(A) (B)
r2 r
Section D - Plates
rV R2 V
(C) (D)
R2 r3 34. Three identical conducting plates P1, P2 and P3 are
kept at a distance d from each other. If q, –q, 2q are
the charges in P1, P2 and P3 respectively, the electric
31. Two conducting spheres each of radius R carry
field between P1 and P2 is (where A is area of plate)
charge q. They are placed at a distance r from each
other, where r > 2 R. The neutral point lies at a  q   2q 
distance r/2 from either sphere. If the electric field (A)  2A  (B)  2A 
 0   0 
at the neutral point due to either sphere be E, then
the total electric potential at that point will be -  4q 
(A) r E/2 (B) r E (C) 0 (D)  2A 
 0 
(C) RE/2 (D) RE
35. If an electron enters into a space between the plates
32. Two conducting spheres of radii r 1 and r2 are
of a parallel plate capacitor at an angle  with the
charged such that they have the same electric field
plates and leaves at an angle  to the plates. The
on their surfaces. The ratio of the electric potential
ratio of its kinetic energy while entering the capacitor
at their centres is -
to that while leaving will be -
(A) r1 / r2 (B) r1/r2 2 2
 sin    cos  
(C) r12/r22 (D) None of the above (A)   (B)  
 sin    cos  
2 2
 cos    sin  
(C)   (D)  
 cos    sin  

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
 Electrostatics-2 2.45

Exercise - 2 (Level-II) Multiple Correct | JEE Advanced

Section A - Questions Based on electric flux Section B - Properties of conductors
for various configuration, 5. Mark the correct options -
Question on solid angle (A) Gauss’s law is valid only for uniform charge
concept, Gauss law Based
distributions.
Questions
(B) Gauss’s law is valid only for charges placed in
1. An electric field converges at the origin whose
vacuum.
magnitude is given by the expression E = 100rNt/
(C) The electric field calculated by Gauss’s law is
Coul, where r is the distance measured from the origin.
the field due to all the charges.
(A) total charge contained in any spherical volume
(D) The flux of the electric field through a closed
with its centre at origin in negative.
surface due to all the charges is equal to the flux
(B) total charge contained at any spherical volume,
due to the charges enclosed by the surface.
irrespective of the location of its centre, is negative.
(C) total charge contained in a spherical volume of radius
6. A hollow closed conductor of irregular shape is given some
3 cm with its centre at origin has magnitude 3 × 10–13C.
(D) total charge contained in a spherical volume of charge. Which of the following statements are correct ?
radius 3 cm with its centre at origin has magnitude (A) The entire charge will appear on its outer surface.
(B) All points on the conductor will have the same
3 × 10–9 Coul.
potential
2. Charges Q 1 and Q 2 lies inside and outside (C) All points on its surface will have the same
respectively of a closed surface S. Let E be the charge density.
field at any point on S and  be the flux of E over S. (D) All points near its surface and outside it will
(A) If Q1 changes, both E and  will change. have the same electric intensity.
(B) If Q2 changes, E will change but  will not change.
(C) If Q1 = 0 and q2  0 then E  0 but  = 0. 7. In fornt of an earthed conductor a point charge + q
(D) If Q1  0 and Q2 = 0 then E = 0 but   0. is placed a shown in figure :

3. For the given electric lines of force, select the correct

out of following statements
S
+q

A B
C

(A) Flux through closed surface S is zero (A) On the surface of conductor the net charge is
(B) VA – VB = 0 always negative.
B   (B) On the surface of conductor at some points
(C)  [Link] is positive charges are negative and at some points charges
A
may be positive distributed non uniformly
(D) If a point charge particle is released at point C (C) Inside the conductor electric field due to point
then its path will be straight line. charge is non zero
(D) None of these
q
4. In Gauss' s theorem  [Link]  
s 0
The surface
8. Which of the following statements are true for a
integral is evaluated by choosing a closed surface metallic conductor?
called the Gaussian surface. Here (A) The electrical conductivity depends on the
(A) The closed surface can be of any shape or size. density of atoms.
(B) q is the net charge enclosed inside the Gaussian (B) The electrical conductivity decreases with rise
surface; charges outside the surface are not considered. in temperature.
(C) E is the electric field due to all the charges both (C) The current density depends upon the drift
inside and outside the surface. velocity of electrons.
(D) The exact location of the charges inside the (D) The electrical conductivity increases with
surface does not affect the value of the integral. increase in voltage across it.

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
2.46 Theory and Exercise Book

9. In normal cases thin stream of water bends toward Section C - Spheres Problem, Electrostatics
a negatively charged rod. When a positively charged pressure
rod is placed near the stream, which of the following 12. An electric dipole is placed at the centre of a sphere.
are incorrect: Mark the correct answer
(A) the flux of the electric field through the sphere
is zero
(B) the electric field is zero at every point of the
[Link]
(C) the electric potential is zero everywhere on the
sphere.
(D) the electric potential is zero on a circle on the
surface.

(A) It will bend in the opposite direction. 13. At distance of 5cm and 10cm outwards from the
(B) It will bend in the same direction. surface of a uniformly charged solid sphere, the
(C) It won’t bend at all. potentials are 100V and 75V respectively. Then
(D) The direction of bending can't be predicted. (A) potential at its surface is 150V
(B) the charge on the sphere is (5/3) × 10–10 C
(C) the electric field on the surface is 1500 V/m
10. A conductor A is given a charge +Q and then placed
(D) the electric potential at its centre is 225 V
inside a deep metal Can B, without touching it. Then -
(A) potential of A does not change when it is placed
14. A thin-walled, spherical conducting shell S of radius
inside B R is given charge Q. The same amount of charge
(B) if B is earthed, +Q amount of charge flows is also placed at its centre C. Which of the following
from it into the earth statements are correct ?
(C) if B is earthed, the potential of A is reduced (A) On the outer surface of S, the charge density is
(D) if B is earthed, the potential of A is increased Q
.
2 R 2
11. An ellipsoidal cavity is carved within a perfect
(B) The electric field is zero at all points inside S.
conductor. A positive charge q is placed at the centre (C) At a point just outside S, the electric field is
of the cavity . The points A and B are on the cavity double the field at a point just inside S.
surface as shown in the figure. Then (D) At any point inside S, the electric field is inversely
proportional to the square of its distance from C.

15. A and B are two conducting concentric spherical

A shells. A is given a charge Q while B is uncharged.
B If now B is earthed as shown in figure. Then :
q

++
++
++

A++
(A) Electric field near A in the cavity = electric
field near B in the cavity
(B) Charge density at A = charge density at B
(C) Potential at A= potential at B (A) The charge appearing on inner surface of B is –Q
(D) Total electric field flux through the surface of (B) The field inside the outside A is zero.
(C) The field between A and B is not zero.
the cavity is q/0.
(D) The charge appearing on outer surface of B is zero.

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
 Electrostatics-2 2.47

Exercise - 3 | Level-I Subjective | JEE Advanced

Section A - Questions Based on electric flux Question No. 9 to 10
for various configuration, 9. A point charge q is located at distance d from an
Question on solid angle infinite plane. Determine the electric flux thorough
concept, Gauss law Based
the plane due to the point charge.
Questions
1. What do you predict by the given statement about
the nature of charge (positive or negative) enclosed 10. A point charge q is located at a very small distance
by the close surface. "In a close surface lines which form the center of a very large square on the line
are leaving the surface are double then the lines which perpendicular to the square passing through its center
are entering in it." Determine the approximate electric flux through the
square due to the point charge.
2. The length of each side of a cubical closed surface
is l. If charge q is situated on one of the vertices of Section B - Properties of conductors
the cube, then find the flux passing through shaded 11. A spherical charged conductor has  as the surface
face of the cube.
density of charge. The electric field on its surface is
E. If the radius of the sphere is doubled keeping the
surface density of charge unchanged, what will be
q
the electric field on the surface of the new sphere -

3. A point charge Q is located on the axis of a disc of (Question no. 12 to 13)

radius R at a distance a from the plane of the disc. If There is a cubical cavity inside a conducting sphere of
one fourth (1/4th) of the flux from the charge passes radius R. A positive point charge Q is placed at the centre
through the disc, then find the relation between a & R. of the cube and another positive charge q is placed at a
R distance  ( > R) from the centre of the sphere. The sphere
a is earthed as shown in fig.

Q
Q
4. A very long uniformly charged thread oriented along q
the axis of a circle of radius R rests on its centre 
with one of the ends. The charge on the thread per R
unit length is equal to . Find the flux of the vector
E through the circle area.
12. Charge induced on the inner surface of cavity is :
5. 5x105 lines of electric flux are entering in a closed 13. Net charge on the outer surface of conducting
surface and 4x105 liner come out of the surface the sphere is:
charge enclosed by the surface is -
14. A solid conducting sphere of radius r is having a
6. In a certain region of surface there exists a uniform charge Q and point charges +q and –q are kept at
electric field of 2 × 103 k̂ V/m. A rectangular coil of distances d from the centre of sphere as shown in
dimensions 10 cm × 20 cm is placed in x-y plane. the figure. The electric potential at the centre of
The electric flux through the coil is - solid sphere
(assume potential to be 0 at infinity)
7. The electric flux from a cube of edge  is . What Q
will be its value if edge of cube is made 2 and
d r
charge enclosed is halved - +q

8. A long string with a charge of  per unit length passes –q d

through an imaginary cube of edge . The maximum
possible flux of the electric field through the cube will be

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
2.48 Theory and Exercise Book

15. An isolated conducting sheet of area A and carrying a 19. A spherical conducting shell of inner radius R1 and
charge Q is placed in a uniform electric field E, such that
outer radius R2 has charge Q. Now a charge q is
electric field is perpendicular to sheet and covers all the
sheet. Find out charges appearing on its two surfaces. placed inside the shell but not at centre then surface
Q charge densities with their nature on inner and outer
surfaces of shell are respectively.

E 20. A point charge q is located at the centre O of a spherical

uncharged conducting layer provided with a small ori-
fice. (see figure). The inside and outside radii of the layer
are equal to a and b respectively. What amount of work
16. A conducting sphere of radius R and charge Q is has to be performed to slowly transfer the charge q from
placed near a uniformly charged nonconducting the point O through the orifice and into infinity?
infinite large thin plate having surface charge density
. Then find the potential at point A (on the surface
of sphere) due to charge on sphere a
b
1  Oq
(here K = 4  , 0 = )
0 3

+ +Q
+ A
Section C - Spheres Problem, Electrostatics
+
O pressure
+
+ 4R 21. A charge Q is uniformly distributed over a rod of
+ length l. Consider a hypothetical cube of edge l with
the centre of the cube at one end of the rod. Find
the minimum possible flux of the electric field
17. Two hollow spherical conductors A & B are arranged
as shown in figure. Conductor B is initially (before through the entire surface of the cube.
connection of A & B) neutral and charge on A is Q,
after connection the potential of B is -
22. A particle of mass m and charge –q moves along a
R diameter of a uniformly charged sphere of radius R and
r A carrying a total charge +Q. Find the frequency of S.H.M.

B
of the particle if the amplitude does not exceed R.

18. Figure shows two conducting thin concentric shells of 23. There are 27 drops of a conducting fluid. Each has radius
radii r and 3r. The outer shell carries charge q = 6C. r and they are charged to a potential V0. They are then
Inner shell is neutral. Find the positive chare (in C) that
combined to form a bigger drop. Find its potential.
will flow from inner shell to earth after the switch S is
closed.
q=6C 24. There are two concentric metal shells of radii r1 and
r2 (> r1). If initially the outer shell has a charge q
and the inner shell is having zero charge. Now inner
r
shell is grounded. Find :
S
(i) Charge on the inner surface of outer shell.
3r
(ii) Final charges on each sphere.
(iii) Charge flown through wire in the ground.

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
 Electrostatics-2 2.49

25. A point charge ‘q’ is within an electrically neutral Section D - Plates

conducting shell whose other surface has spherical
Question No. 29 to 31
shape. Find potential V at point P lying outiside shell
Three large conducting plates are placed parallel to
at a distance ‘r’ from centre O of outer sphere. each other as shown in figure. The outer plates A &
C can be connected to ground with the help of
switches as shown in figure. Initially the plate B
carries a charge + Q while A & C are neutral and the
O P switches are open.
q r
d 2d
I II III IV V VI

26. Consider two concentric conducting spheres of radii

a & b (b > a). Inside sphere has a positive charge
A B C
q1. What charge should be given to the outer sphere
S1
so that potential of the inner sphere becomes zero? S2
How does the potential varies between the two
spheres & outside ?

27. A metal sphere A of radius a is charged to a potential Based on above information answer the following
question.
V. What will be its potential if it is enclosed by a
29. when the switch S1 is closed and S2 is kept open,
spherical conducting shell B of radius b and the two then the charge appearing on IV, V & VI surfaces
are connected by a wire. are

B 30. When the switch S 1 is kept open and S 2

is closed, then Charge on III & IV surface are -
b
a A
31. When both the switches S1 & S2 are closed,
then Charge on face V is

28. Consider three identical metal spheres A, B and C.

Spheres A carries charge +6q and sphere B carries charge
–3q. Sphere C carries no charge. Spheres A and B are
touched together and then separated. Sphere C is then
touched to sphere A and separated from it. Finally the
sphere C is touched to sphere B and separated from it.
Find the final charge on the sphere C.

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
2.50 Theory and Exercise Book

Exercise - 3 | Level-II Subjective | JEE Advanced

Section A - Questions Based on electric flux 5. A particle having charge q = 8.85µC is placed on the
for various configuration, axis of a circular ring of radius R = 30 cm. Distance
Question on solid angle of the particle from centre of the ring is a = 40 cm.
concept, Gauss law Based
Questions Calculate electrical flux passing through the ring.

1. Two concentric rings, one of radius ‘a’ and the other

Section B - Properties of conductors
of radius ‘b’ have the charges +q and –(2/5)–3/2 q
6. Figure shows a section through two long thin concentric
respectively as shown in the figure. Find the ratio
cylinders of radii a & b with a < b. The cylinders have
b/a if a charge particle placed on the axis at z = a is
equal and opposite charges per unit length . Find the
in equilibrium.
electric field at a distance r from the axis for -
–3/2
qB=–(2/5) q
b

a z=a
qA=+q
b a

(A) r < a
2. Calculate the total electric flux through the (B) a < r < b
paraboloidal surface due to a uniform electric field (C) r > b
of magnitude Eo in the direction shown in Figure.
7. An electron beam after being accelerated from rest
r
through a potential difference of 500 V in vacuum is
d
allowed to impinge normally on a fixed surface. If the
E0 incident current is 100 A, determine the force exerted
on the surface assuming that it brings the electrons to
3. A hollow half cylinder surface of radius R and length rest. (e = 1.6 × 10–19 C; m = 9.0 × 10–31 kg)

l is placed in a uniform electric field E . Electric field
is acting perpendicular on the plane ABCD. Find 8. A cone made of insulating material has a total charge
the flux through the curved surface of the hollow
Q spread uniformly over its sloping surface. Calculate
cylindrical surface.
the energy required to take a test charge q from infinity
A to apex A of cone. The slant length is L.
R
A
B AB=L
B
l
9. Two plane parallel conducting plates 1.5 × 10–2 m
D apart are held horizontally one above the other in
air. The upper plate is maintained at positive potential
E of 1.5 kV while the other plate is earthed. Calculate
C the number of electrons which must be attached to
a small oil drop of mass 4.9 × 10–15 kg between
4. The intensity of an electric field depends only on the plates to maintain it at rest. If the potential of
upper plate is suddenly changed to – 1.5 kV, what is
the coordinates x and y as follows:
the initial acceleration of the charged drop ? Also
E = a (xi + yj) / (x2 + y2), obtain the terminal velocity of the drop if its radius
where a is a constant, and i and j are the unit vectors is 5 × 10–6 m and coefficient of viscosity of air is
of the X- and Y-axes. Find the charge within a 1.8 × 10–5 N-s/m2. Assuming that the density of air
sphere of radius R with the centre at the origin. is negligible in comparison with that of oil.

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
 Electrostatics-2 2.51

10. Two small equally charged identical conducting balls 14. A sphere of radius R has a uniform volume density
are suspended from long threads secured at one point. . A spherical cavity of radius b, whose center lies
The charges and masses of the balls are such that 
at a , is removed from the sphere.
they are in equilibrium when the distance between (i) Find the electric field at
them is 10 cm (the length of the threads >> 10 cm.) any point inside the
One of the balls is then discharged. How will the balls spherical cavity. b
behave after this ? What will be the distance between (ii) Find the electric field a
the balls when equilibrium is restored? outside the cavity
O
(a) at points inside the R
Section C - Spheres Problem, Electrostatics large sphere but outside
pressure the cavity and
11. A positive charge Q is uniformly distributed throughout (b) at points outside the
the volume of a dielectric sphere of radius R. A point large sphere.
mass having charge +q and mass m is fired towards
the centre of the sphere with velocity v from a point at
distance r (r > R) from the centre of the sphere. Find
Section D - Plates
15. Three identical metallic plates, each of area
the minimum velocity v so that it can penetrate R/2 A, are kept at small separations as shown.
distance of the sphere. Neglect any resistance other Initially, charge Q, 3Q and 3Q are given to
than electric interaction. Charge on the small mass the plates A, B and c, respectively. Now,
remains constant throughout the motion. both the switches S 1 and S 2 are closed
simultaneously. Then Charge flown through
S1 and S2 are
12. A solid non conducting sphere of radius R has a
non-uniform charge distribution of volume charge Q 3Q 3Q
r A B C
density,  = 0 , where 0 is a constant and r is the
R
distance from the centre of the sphere. Show that -
(a) the total charge on the sphere is Q = 0R3 and
(b) the electric field inside the sphere has a magnitude
S1 S2
d 2d
KQr 2
given by, E  .
R4

13. A cavity of radius r is present inside a solid dielectric

sphere of radius R, having a volume charge density
of . The distance between the centres of the sphere
and the cavity is a. An electron e is kept inside the
cavity at an angle  = 45° as shown. How long will
it take to touch the sphere again ?

e
r

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
2.52 Theory and Exercise Book

Exercise - 4 | Level-I Previous Year | JEE Main

1. Two spherical conductors A and B of radii 1mm 4. Let three be a spherically symmetric charge distribution
and 2 mm are separated by a distance of 5 cm and
5 r 
are uniformly charged. If the spheres are connected with charge density varying as (r)  0   
4 R
by a conducting wire then in equilibrium condition,
the ratio of the magnitude of the electric fields at upto r = R, and (r)  0 for r > R, where r is the
the surfaces of spheres A and B is (AIEEE 2006) distance from the origin. The electric field at a distance
(A) 4 : 1 (B) 1 : 2 r(r < R) from the origin is given by (AIEEE 2010)
(C) 2 : 1 (D) 1 : 4
40 r  5 r  0 r  5 r 
(A)    (B)   
2. A thin spherical shell of radius R has charge Q 3 0  3 R  4 0  3 R 
spread uniformly over its surface. Which of the
following graphs most closely represents the electric 40 r  5 r  0 r  5 r 
(C)    (D)   
field E(r) produced by the shell in the range 3 0  4 R  30  4 R 
0  r  x , where r is the distance from the centre
of the shell ? (AIEEE 2008) 5. The electrostatic potential inside a charged spherical
ball is given by   ar 2  b where r is the distance
E(r) E(r)
from the centre a, b are constants. Then the charge
density inside the ball is (AIEEE 2011)
(A)  6a  0 r (B)  24a  0
(A) (B)
r r
(C)  6a  0 (D)  24a  0 r
O R O R

6. This question has statement 1 and statement 2 of the

E(r) E(r)
four choices given after the statements, choose the
one that best describes the two statements. An
insulating solid sphere of radius R has a uniform positive
charge density . As a result of this uniform charge
(C) (D) distribution, there is a finite value of electric potential
r r at the centre of the sphere, at the surface of the sphere
O R O R
and also at a point outside the sphere. The electric
potential at infinite is zero (AIEEE 2012)
Statement 1 When a charge q is taken from the
Q centre of the surface of the sphere its potential
3. Let (r)  r be the charge density distribution
R 4 q
energy changes by 3 .
for a solid sphere of radius R and total charge Q. 0

For a point P inside the sphere at distance r1 from Statement 2 The electric field at a distance r (r<R)
the centre of the sphere, the magnitude of electric
r
field is (AIEEE 2009) from the centre of the sphere is 3 .
0

Q (A) Statement 1 is false, Statement 2 is true.

(A) zero (B)
4 0 r12 (B) Statement 1 is true, Statement 2 is false.
(C) Statement 1 is true, Statement 2 is true,
Qr12 Qr12 Statement 2 is the correct explanation for Statement 1
(C) (D) (D) Statement 1 is true, Statement 2 is true, Statement 2
4  0 R 4 3 0 R 4
is not the correct explanation of Statement 1

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
 Electrostatics-2 2.53

7. In a uniformly charged sphere of total charge Q 9. The region between two concentric spheres of radii
and radius R, the electric field E is plotted as 'a' and 'b', respectively (see figure), has volume
function of distance from the centre. The graph A
which would correspond to the above will be charge density   , where A is a constant and r
r
(AIEEE 2012)
is the distance from the centre. At the centre of the
spheres is a point charge Q. The value of A such
E E that the electric field in the region between the
spheres will be constant, is : [AIEEE-2016]
(A) (B)
R
R r
a

Q
b
E E

(C) (D) Q 2Q
(A) 2 b2  a2  (B)   a2  b2 
R r R r
2Q Q
(C) (D)
a2 2a2
8. A charge Q is uniformly distributed over a long rod
AB of length l as shown in the figure. The electric
10. Three concentric metal shells A, B and C of
potential at the point O lying at a distance L from
respective radii a, b and c (a < b < c) have
the end A is: (JEE Main 2013)
surface charge densities + , – and + 
A B respectively. The potential of shell B is :
O
L L [JEE Main -2018]
Q Q ln 2   b 2  c2    a 2  b2 
(A) 4 L ln 2 (B) 4 L   a   c
0 0 (A) (B)
0  c  0  a 
Q 3Q
(C) 8 L (D) 4 L   a 2  b2    b 2  c2 
0 0 (C)   c (D)   a
0  b  0  b 

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
2.54 Theory and Exercise Book

Exercise - 4 | Level-II Previous Year | JEE Advanced

1. Three large parallel plates have uniform surface 5. Consider a neutral conducting sphere. A positive
charge densities as shown in the figure. What is
point charge is placed outside the sphere. The net
the electric field at P. [JEE’ 2005 (Scr)]
charge on the sphere is then, [JEE 2007]
z=a (A) negative and distributed uniformly over the
P surface of the sphere
z=–a
z=–2a (B) negative and appears only at the point on the
4  4 sphere closest to the point charge

(A) –  k (B)  k (C) negative and distributed non-uniformly over the
0 0

2 2 entire surface of the sphere

 
(C) –  k (D)  k (D) Zero
0 0

2. A conducting liquid bubble of radius a and thickness 6. A spherical portion has been removed from a solid
t (t<<a) is charged to potential V. If the bubble sphere having a charge distributed uniformly in its
collapses to a droplet, find the potential on the droplet.
[JEE2005] volume as shown in the figure. The electric field
inside the emptied space is [JEE 2007]
3. The electrostatic potential ( r ) of a spherical
symmetric system, kept at origin, is shown in the
adjacent figure, and given as [JEE 2006]

(A) zero everywhere

(B) non-zero and uniform
R0 r
(C) non-uniform
q q (D) zero only at its center
 = 4   r (r  R0 ) r = 4   R (r  R 0 )
0 0 0
Which of the following option(s) is / are correct? 7. STATEMENT-1
(A) For spherical region r  R0, total electrostatic
energy stored is zero. For practical purposes, the earth is used as a refrence
(B) Within r = 2R0, total charge is q. at zero potential in electrical circuits. [JEE 2008]
(C) There will be no charge anywhere except at r = R0. and
(D) Electric field is discontinuous at r = R0
STATEMENT-2
4. A long, hollow conducting cylinder is kept coaxially The electrical potential of a sphere of radius R with
inside another long, hollow conducting cylinder of charge Q uniformly distributed on the surface is
larger radius. Both the cylinders are initially Q
electrically neutral. [JEE 2007] given by 4  R .
0
(A) A potential difference appears between the two (A) STATEMENT-1 is True, STATEMENT-2 is True;
cylinders when a charge density is given to the inner
STATEMENT-2 is a correct explanation for
cylinder
(B) A potential difference appears between the two STATEMENT-1
cylinders when a charge density is given to the outer (B) STATEMENT-1 is True, STATEMENT-2 is
cylinder True’ STATEMENT-2 is NOT a correct
(C) No potential difference appears between the explanation for STATEMENT-1
two cylinders when a uniform line charge is kept
(C) STATEMENT-1 is True, STATEMENT-2 is
along the axis of the cylinder
(D) No potential difference appears between the False
two cylinders when same charge density is given (D) STATEMENT-1 is False, STATEMENT-2 is
to both the cylinders. True

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
 Electrostatics-2 2.55

Paragraph for Question No. 8 to 10 12. A solid sphere of radius R has a charge Q distributed
The nuclear charge (Ze) is non-uniformly distributed in its volume with a charge dinsity  = Kra , where

within a nucleus of radius R. The charge density  K and a are constants and r is the distance from its
R 1
(r) [charge per unit volume] is dependent only on centre. If the electric field at r = is times that
2 8
the radial distance r from the centre of the nucleus at r = R, find the value of a. [JEE 2009]
as shown in figure The electric field is only along
the radial direction. [JEE 2008] 13. A disk of radius a / 4 having a uniformly distributed charge
6 C is placed in the x–y plane with its centre at (–a / 2, 0, 0).
Figure :
A rod of length a carrying a uniformly distributed charge 8
d C is place on the x-axis from x = a / 4 to x = 5a / 4. Two
point charges –7 C and 3 C are placed at (a / 4, – a / 4, 0)
and (–3a / 4, 3a / 4, 0), respectively. Consider a cubical
O a R r
surface formed by six surfaces x = ± a / 2, y = ± a / 2,
8. The electric field at r = R is z = ± a / 2. The electric flux through this cubical surface is
(A) independent of a [JEE 2009]
(B) directly proportional to a
(C) directly proportional to a2
(D) inversely proportional to a

9. For a = 0, the value of d (maximum value of  as

–2C 2C
shown in the figure) is (A)  (B) 
0 0
3 Ze 3 Ze
(A) (B)
4 R3  R3
4 Ze Ze 10C 12C
(C) 3 R3 (D) 3 R3 (C)  (D) 0
0

14. A uniformly charged thin spherical shell of radius R

10. The electric field within the nucleus is generally
carries uniform surface charge density of  per unit
observed to be linearly dependent on r. This implies.
area. It is made of two hemispherical shells, held
R
(A) a = 0 (B) a  together by pressing them with force F (see figure).
2
2R F is proportional to [JEE 2010]
(C) a = R (D) a 
3

11. Three concentric metallic spherical shells of radii

R, 2R, 3R, are given charge Q 1 , Q 2 , Q 3 , F F

respectively. It is found that the surface charge

densities on the outer surfaces of the shells are
1
2 2 1
2
equal. Then, the ratio of the charges given to the (A)   R (B)   R
0 0
shells Q1 : Q2 : Q3 , is [JEE 2009]
(A) 1 : 2 : 3 (B) 1 : 3 : 5 1 2 1 2
(C)  R (D)  R 2
(C) 1 : 4 : 9 (D) 1 : 8 : 18 0 0

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
2.56 Theory and Exercise Book

15. Consider an electric field E  E0 x̂ , where E0 is a (A) The net electric flux crossing the plane x = +a/2 is
constant. The flux through the shaded area (as shown equal to the net electric flux crossing the plane x = -a/2.
in the figure) due to this field is [JEE 2011]
z
(B) The net electric flux crossing the plane y = +a/2 is
equal to the net electric flux crossing the plane y = -a/2.
(a,0,a) (a,a,a)

q
(C) The net electric flux crossing the entire region is 
0

y (D) The net electric flux crossing the plane z = +a/2 is

(0,0,0) (0,a,0)
x equal to the net electric flux crossing the plane x = +a/2.
(A) 2E0a2 (B) 2 E0a2
E0 a2 19. An infinitely long solid cylinder of radius R has a
(C) E0a2 (D)
2 uniform volume charge density  . It has a spherical

16. A spherical metal shell A of radius RA and a solid cavity of radius R/2 with its centre on the axis of
metal sphere B of radius RB (<RA) are kept far the cylinder, as shown in the figure. The magnitude
apart and each is given charge '+Q'. Now they are of the electric field at the point P, which is at a
connected by a thin metal wire. Then [JEE 2011]
distance 2R from the axis of the cylinder, is given
(A) Einside
A
=0 (B) QA > QB
23R
A RB by the expression 16  . The value of  is
(C)   R (D) E on surface
A
on surface
E
B
o
B A

[JEE 2012]
17. Which of the following statement(s) is/are correct?
(A) If the electric field due to a point charge varies as
r–2.5 instead of r–2, then the Gauss law will still be valid
(B) The Gauss law can be used to calculate the field
distribution around an electric dipole
(C) If the electric field between two point charges is
zero somewhere, then the sign of the two charges is
the same
(D) The work done by the external force in moving
a unit positive charge from point A at potential VA to
point B at potential VB is (VB – VA). [JEE 2011] 20. Two non-conducting solid spheres of radii R and
2R, having uniform volume charge densitites 1 and
18. A cubical region of side a has its centre at the origin. 2 respectively, touch each other. The net electric
It encloses three fixed point charges, -q at (0,-a/4,0), field at a distance 2R from the centre of the smaller
sphere, along the line joining the centres of the
+3q at (0,0,0) and -q at (0,+a/4,0). Choose the correct
option(s). [JEE Advance 2012] 1
spheres, is zero. The ratio  can be [JEE-2013]
2

32
(A) -4 (B) 
25

32
(C) (D) 4
25

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
 Electrostatics-2 2.57

21. Two non-conducting spheres of radii R1 and R2 and 24. Consider a uniform spherical charge distribution of
carrying uniform volume charge densities + and radius R1 centred at the origin O. In this distribution,
-, respectively, are placed such that they practically a spherical cavity of radius R2, centred at P with
overlap, as shown in the figure. At all points in the distance OP = a = R1 – R2 (see figure) is made. If
overlapping region, [JEE-2013] the electric field inside the cavity at position r is
 
E(r ) , then the correct statement(s) is (are)
[JEE-2015]
R2
P
R1 R2
a
R1
O
(A) the electrostatic field is zero.
(B) the electrostatic potential is constant.

(C) the electrostatic field is constant in magnitude. (A) E is uniform, its magnitude is independent of
(D) the electrostatic field has same direction. R2 but its direction depends on r

(B) E is uniform, its magnitude depends on R2 and
its direction depends on r
22. Charges Q, 2Q and 4Q are uniformly distributed in 
(C) E is uniform, its magnitude is independent of a
three dielectric solid spheres 1,2 and 3 of radii R/2, 
but its direction depends on a
R and 2R respectively, as shown in figure. If magni- 
(D) E is uniform and both its magnitude and direction
tudes of the electric fields at point P at a distance R 
depends on a
from the centre of spheres 1,2 and 3 are E1, E2 and
E3 respectively, the [JEE 2014] 25. The figures below depict two situtions in which two
infinitely long static line charges of constant positive line
charge density  are kept parallel to each other. In their
resulting electric field, point charges q and –q are kept in
equilibrium between them. The point charges are confined
to move in the x direction only. If they are given a small
displacement about their equilibrium positions, then the
correct statement(s) is (are) [JEE-2015]
(A) E1>E2>E3 (B) E3>E1>E2
(C) E2>E1>E3 (D) E3>E2>E1

x x
23. Let E1(r), E2(r) and E3(r) be the respective electric +q –q
fields at a distance r from a point charge Q, an
infinitely long wire with constant linear charge density
, and an infinite plane with uniform surface charge
(A) Both charges execute simple harmonic motion.
density . If E 1(r0) = E 2(r0) = E 3(r0) at a given
(B) Both charges will continue moving in the
distance r0, Then [JEE 2014]
direction of their displacement.
(A) Q  4r02 (C) Charge +q executes simple harmonic motion
while charge –q continues moving in the direction

(B) r0  of its displacement.
2
(D) Charges –q executes simple harmonic motion
(C) E1 r0 / 2   2E2 r0 / 2  while charge +q continues moving in the direction
of its displacement.
(D) E2 r0 / 2   4E3 r0 / 2 

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
2.58 Theory and Exercise Book

26. An infinitely long uniform line charge distribution of (A) The circumference of the flat surface is an
charge per unit length  lies parallel to the y-axis in equipotential
3 (B) The component of the electric field normal
the y-z plane at z  a (see figure). If the
2 to the flat surface is constant over the surface.
magnitude of the flux of the electric field through (C) Total flux through the curved and the flat
the rectangular surface ABCD lying in the x-y plane
Q
L surfaces is 
with its centre at the origin is n (0 permittivity of 0
0

free space), then the value of n is [JEE-2015] (D) The electric flux passing through the curved
Q  1 
surface of the hemisphere is  2  1  
0  2

29. An infinitely long thin non-conducting wire is

parallel to the z-axis and carries a uniform
line charge density . It pierces a thin non-
conducting spherical shell of radius R in such
27. An infinite line charge of uniform electric charge
a way that the arc PQ subtends an angle
density  lies along the axis of an electrically
conducting infinite cylindrical shell of radius R, At 120° at the centre O of the spherical shell,
time t = 0, the space inside the cylinder is filled with as shown in the figure. The permittivity of
a material of permittivity  and electrical conductivity free space is  0. Which of the following
. The electrical conduction in the material follows statements is (are) true ? [JEE-2018]
Ohm’s law. Which one of the following graphs best
describes the subsequent variation of the magnitude
of current density j(t) at any point in the material?
[JEE-2016]
j(t) j(t)

(A) (B)
(0, 0) t (0, 0) t

j(t) j(t)

(C) (D)
(0, 0) t (0, 0) t
(A) The electric flux through the shell is
28. A point charge +Q is placed just outside an 3R / 0
imaginary hemispherical surface of radius R as
shown in the figure. Which of the following (B) The z-component of the electric field is
statements is/are correct? [JEE-2017] zero at all the points on the surface of the
shell
+Q (C) The electric flux through the shell is

2R /  0

(D) The electric field is normal to the surface

R
of the shell at all points

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
 Electrostatics-2 2.59

Exercise - 1 Objective Problems | JEE Main

1. C 2. C 3. B 4. C 5. D 6. C 7. A
8. D 9. B 10. A 11. C 12. C 13. B 14. A
15. D 16. C 17. D 18. C 19. D 20. B 21. A
22. A 23. B 24. A 25. B 26. C 27. A 28. C
29. D 30. D 31. A 32. C 33. B 34. D 35. B
36. C 37. A 38. C 39. A 40. D 41. D 42. A
43. A 44. A 45. B 46. C 47. D 48. D 49. C
50. D

Exercise - 2 (Level-I) Objective Problems | JEE Main

1. C 2. D 3. B 4. D 5. A 6. D 7. C
8. A 9. B 10. A 11. A 12. A 13. C 14. D
15. D 16. C 17. B 18. D 19. D 20. B 21. B
22. D 23. D 24. D 25. C 26. A 27. B 28. A
29. D 30. A 31. B 32. B 33. A 34. C 35. B

Exercise - 2 (Level-II) Multiple Correct | JEE Advanced

1. A,B,C 2. A,B,C 3. A, C 4. ABCD 5. C,D
6. A,B 7. ABC 8. BC 9. ACD 10. A,B,C
11. C,D 12. AD 13. A,C,D 14. A,C,D 15. A,C,D

Exercise - 3 | Level-I Subjective | JEE Advanced

1. There is a positive charge in the close surface.
q R R
2. 24 0 3. a= 4. 2 0 5. –8.85 × 10–7C
3
6. 40 V-m 7. /2 8. 3 /0 9. q / 20 10. q / 20 11. E
qR 1 Q
12. – Q, non-uniformly distributed 13.  14.
 4 0 r

Q Q Q  Q
15. charge on one side is – EA0 and other side + EA0 16. K  R 17.
2 2 R 4 0 4 0 R

q Qq  q2  1 1 
–2C A   
18. 19. 4R12 (Non Uniform), 4R 22 (Uniform) 20.  8
 0
 a b 

Q 1 qQ
21. 2 0 22. 2 4 0mR 3
23. 9V 0

r 1 r 
24. (i)  r q (ii) Charge on inner shell = –  1  q and charge on the outer shell = q
 2  r2 
r  kq
(iii) Charge flown in to the earth = –q  1  25. v
 r2  r

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
2.60 Theory and Exercise Book

 q1  1 1 
 Vr   –  ; ar b
 4  0  r a 
b  q  1 1 aV
26. (i) q2  – q1 ; (ii)  Vb  1  –  ; r  b 27. 28. 1.125 q
a  4  0 b a b

 Vr  1  q1  q2  ; r  b
 4  0  r r 

29. zero 30. Q/4 & 3Q/4 31. –Q/3

Exercise - 3 | Level-II Subjective | JEE Advanced

1. 2 2. E 0r 2 3. E 2R 4. 4 0 aR. 5. 105 NC–1 m2
2K Qq
6. 0, ,0 7. 7.5 × 10–9 N 8. 2 0 L
r
9. [3, 19.6 ms–2 downward, 5.7 × 10–5 ms–1.] 10. [10(1/4)1/3 cm]
1/ 2
 2KQq  r – R 3   6 2mr 0
11.     12. Proof 13.
 mR  r 8  ea
    b 3     R 3   b 3   
a  
14. (1) 3 ,(2)a. 3 r      (r  a) b.   r      (r  a) 15. 3Q and 4Q
0 0   r  a  30  r   r  a 

Exercise - 4 | Level-I Previous Year | JEE Main

1. C 2. A 3. C 4. B 5. C
6. A 7. C 8. B 9. D 10. C

Exercise - 4 | Level-II Previous Year | JEE Advanced

1/ 3
 a
1. C 2. V'    .V 3. A,B,C,D 4. A 5. D
 3t 
6. B 7. B 8. A 9. B 10. C
11. B 12. 2 13. A 14. A 15. C
16. A,B,C,D 17. C, D 18. A,C 19. 6 20. B,D
21. C,D 22. C 23. C 24. D 25. C
26. 6 27. A 28. AD 29. AB

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
 CURRENT 3.1

Current Electricity
CHAPTER
3
Section A - Definition of Current, Current 2. ELECTRIC CUR R ENT AND
Density, Drift Velocity
CURRENT DENSITY
1. INTRODUCTION When there is a transfer of charge from one side
• Conductor of an area to the other, we say that there is an
electric current through the area. If the moving
In some materials, the outer electrons of each atoms
charges are positive, the current is in the direction
or molecules are only weakly bound to it. These
of motion, if they are negative, the current is
electrons are almost free to move throughout the
opposite to the direction of motion. If a charge Q
body of the material and are called free electrons.
crosses an area in time t, we define the average
They are also known as conduction electrons. When
electric current through the area during this time as
such a material is placed in an electric field, the
free electrons move in a direction opposite to the Q
i
t
field. Such materials are called conductors.
• Insulator : The current at time t is

Another class of materials is called insulators in Q dQ

i  lim 
which all the electrons are tightly bound to their t 0 t dt

respective atoms or molecules. Effectively, there Thus, electric current through an area is the rate of
are no free electrons. When such a material is transfer of charge from one side of the area to the
placed in an electric field, the electrons may slightly other. The SI unit of current is ampere. If one
shift opposite to the field but they can't leave their coulomb of charge crosses an area in one second,
parent atoms or molecules and hence can't move the current is one ampere. It is one of the seven
through long distances. Such materials are also base units accepted in SI.
called dielectrics.
• Semiconductor : EXAMPLE 1

In semiconductors, the behaviour is like an insulator If q = 2t2 + 3, find current at t = 2 sec ?

at low levels of temperature. But at higher dq
Sol. i
temperatures, a small number of electrons are able dt
to free themselves and they respond to the applied i = 4t
electric field. As the number of free electrons in a  i at 2 sec = 4 × 2 = 8 A
semiconductor is much smaller then that in a We shall now define a vector quantity known as
conductor, its behaviour is in between a conductor electric current density at a point. To define the
and an insulator and hence, the name semiconductor. current density at a point P, we draw a small area
A freed electron in a semiconductor leaves a S through P perpendicular to the flow of
vacancy in its normal bound position. These charges(shown in figure) If i be the current through
vacancies also help in conduction. the area S, the average current density is

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
3.2 Theory and Exercise Book

 i For a finite area,

j   
S i   [Link]
The current density at the point P is
Note carefully that an electric current has direction
i di as well as magnitude but it is not a vector quantity.
j  lim 
S0 S dS It does not add like vectors. Therefore current is
neither a vector quantity nor a scalar quantity but a
The direction of the current density is the same as
tensor quantity. The current density is a vector
the direction of the current. Thus, it is along the
quantity.
motion of the moving charges, if the charges are
positive and opposite to the motion of the charges,
if the charges are negative. If a current i is uniformly EXAMPLE 2
distributed over an area S and is perpendicular to it, An electron beam has an aperature 1.0 mm2. A
i total of 6.0 × 10 10 electrons go through any
j
S perpendicular cross-section per second. Find (a) the
current and (b) the current density in the beam.
Sol. The total charge crossing a perpendicular cross-
Q section in one second is
P q = ne
= 6.0 × 1016 × 1.6 × 10–19 C
Q S = 9.6 × 10–3 C
 i
t The current is
(a)
q 9.6  10 –3 C
i  = 9.6 × 10–3 A
t 1s

As the charge is negative, the current is opposite to

S cos 
 be direction of motion of the beam.
j

(b) The current density is

S n̂ i 9.6  10 –3 A 9.6  10 –3 A
j  
S (1.0mm)2 1.0  10 –6 m2
Now let us consider an area S which is not
necessarily perpendicular to the current (figure shown)  9.6  103 A / m 2
If the normal to the area makes an angle  with the
direction of the current, the current density is,
3. DRIFT SPEED
i A conductor contains a large number of loosely
j
Scos  bound electrons which we call free electrons or
or, i = j S cos  conduction electrons. The remaining material is a
 collection of relatively heavy positive ions which
where i is the current through S, If S be the we call lattice. These ions keep on vibrating about
area vector corresponding to the area S, we have their mean positions. The average amplitude
  depends on the temperature. Occasionally, a free
i  j.S
electron collides or interacts in some other fashion
with the lattice.

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
 CURRENT 3.3

The speed and direction of the electron changes

e
randomly at each such event. As a result, the electron vd  E  kE ...(1)
2m
moves in a zig-zag path. As there is a large number
of free electrons moving in random directions, the opposite to the field. The constant k depends on the
number of electrons crossing an area S from one material of the conductor and its temperature.
side very nearly equals the number crossing from
E
the other side in any given time interval. The electric A vd
current through the area is, therefore, zero.
v d t
When there is an electric field inside the conductor,
a force acts on each electron in the direction Let us now find the relation between the current
opposite to the field. The electrons get biased in density and the drift speed. Consider a cylindrical
their random motion in favour of the force. As a conductor of cross-sectional area A in which an
result, the electrons drift slowly in this direction. At electric field E exists. Consider a length vd t of the
each collision, the electron starts afresh in a random conductor (figure shown). The volume of this
direction with a random speed but gains an additional portion is Avdt. If there are n free electrons per
velocity v' due to the electric field. This velocity v' unit volume of the wire, the number of free electrons
increases with time and suddenly becomes zero as in this portion is nAvdt. All these electrons cross
the electron makes a collision with the lattice and the area A in time t. Thus, the charge crossing this
starts afresh with a random velocity. As. the time ,t area in time t is
between successive collisions is small, the electron
Q = nAvd t e
"slowly and steadily drifts opposite to the applied
field (shown figure). If the electron drifts a distance Q
or, i = nAvvde
 in a long time t, we define drift speed as t

l i
vd  and j=  nev d ...(2)
t A
If  be the average time between successive
collisions, the distance drifted during this period is
EXAMPLE 3
1 1  eE  Calculate the drift speed of the electrons when 1 A
l  ( ) 2    ( ) 2
2 2 m  of current exists in a copper wire of cross-section 2
mm2. The number of free electrons in 1 cm3 of
l 1  eE  copper is 8.5 × 1022.
The drift speed is v d    
 2 m  Sol. We have
It is proportional to the electric field E and to the j i
average collision-time . j = nevd or, vd  
ne A ne
The random motion of free electrons does not
contribute to the drift of these electrons. Also, the 1A
average collision-time is constant for a given = (2  10 –6 m 2 )(8.5  1022  106 m –3 )(1.6  10 –19 C)
material at a given temperature. We, therefore,
make the following assumption for our present = 0.036 mm/s
purpose of discussing electric current. We see that the drift speed is indeed small.
When no electric field exists in a conductor, the
Note
free electrons stay at rest (Vd = 0) and when a
field E exists, they move with a constant velocity

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
3.4 Theory and Exercise Book

Section B - Resistance & resistivity, Ohm's R is called the resistance of the given conductor.
law + VI (Volt - Curr.) The quantity 1/R is called conductance.
Characteristics + Colour Code
+ Temp. Dependence Equation (5) is another form of Ohm's law which is
widely used in circuit analysis. The unit of resistance
4. OHM'S LAW
is called ohm and is denoted by symbol . An object
Using equations (1) and (2)
of conducting material, having a resistance of desired
ne 2  value, is called a resistor.
j  nev d  E or, j  E ...(3)
2m From equation (5) and (6)

ne 2  
where  = R ...(7)
2m A
where  depends only on material of the conductor From equation (7), the unit of resistivity  is ohm-
and its temperature. This constant is called the metre, also written as -m. The unit of conductivity
electrical conductivity of the material. Equation (3) () is (ohm-m) written as mho/m.
is known as Ohm's law.
from eq. (4) & (7)
The resistivity of a material is defined as

1 2m 2 m  
  R 
...(4) ne2 A A
 ne 2 
Ohm's law tells us that the conductivity (or
 2m 
resistivity) of a material is independent of the electric where  = resistivity  where  
field existing in the material. This is valid for  ne 2  
conductors over a wide range of field.
 = length along the direction of current
Suppose we have a conductor of length l and
uniform cross-sectional area A (figure shown) Let A = Area of the cross section perpendicular
us apply a potential difference V between the ends to direction of current
of the conductor. The electric field inside the n = no. of free charges per unit volume.
V  = relaxation time
conductor is E  . If the current in the conductor
l m = mass of electron
i
is i, the current density is j  . Ohm's law j = E
A
EXAMPLE 4
then becomes
Calculate the resistance of an aluminium wire of
v length 50 cm and cross-sectional area 2.0 mm2. The
resistivity of aluminium is  = 2.6 × 10–8 -m
i
A
E 
Sol. The resistance is R = 
l A
(a) (b)
(2.6  10 –8   m)  (0.50m)
  0.0065 
i V 2  10 –6 m 2

A l We arrived at Ohm's law by making several
1 l l assumptions about the existence and behaviour of
or, V i i ...(5) the free electrons. These assumption are not valid
A A
for semiconductors, insulators, solutions etc. Ohm's
or, V=Ri ...(6)
law cannot be applied in such cases.

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
 CURRENT 3.5

EXAMPLE 5
L2 L I 
The dimensions of a conductor of specific resistance  {r1L  (r2 – r1 )x}–1   – 
 0
 (r2 – r1 ) 
 are shown below. Find the resistance of the
conductor across AB, CD and EF.
– L  1 1  L
A D   – 
(r2 – r1 )  r2 r1  (r1r2 )

c F IL
E  V  IR 
b r1r2
a
C
B
EXAMPLE 7
c b a
Sol. R AB  , R CD  , R EF  The space between two coaxial cylinders, whose
ab ac bc
radii are a and b (where a < b as in (figure shown)
is filled with a conducting medium. The specific
EXAMPLE 6 conductivity of the medium is .
A portion of length L is cut out of a conical solid

a
wire. The two ends of this portion have circular
b
cross-sections of radii r 1 and r2 (r2 > r1). It is
connected lengthwise to a circuit and a current i is
flowing in it. The resistivity of the material of the
wire is . Calculate the resistance of the considered
portion and the voltage developed across it.
Sol. If follows from the figure, that

r2 – r1 (a) Compute the resistance along the length of

tan = cylinder.
L
 r = r1 + x tan  (b) Compute the resistance between the cylinders
in the radial direction. Assume that the cylinders
 r2 – r1  r1L  x(r2 – r1 ) are very long as compared to their radii, i.e., L >>
= r1 + x  
 L  L
b, where L is the length of the cylinders.

l l l l
i r2 Sol. (a) R =   
r1 A A ( b 2 – a 2 ) (b2 – a 2 )
l (b) From Ohm's law, we have
 
J  E
 
 A  r 2  [r1L  (r2 – r1 )x]2 Assuming radial current density. J becomes
L2
 I
dx dxL2 J rˆ for a < r < b
dR  2
 2 rL
r [r1L  (r2 – r1 )x]2
 I
L2
L
dx and, therefore, E rˆ
R   dR  2rL
 0 [r1L  (r2 – r1 )x]2


Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
3.6 Theory and Exercise Book

Here we have used the assumption that L >> b so Colour band A and B : Indicate the first two
  significant figures of resistance in ohm.
that E and J are in cylindrically symmetric form.
Band C : Indicates the decimal multiplier i.e. the
The potential drop across the medium is thus : number of zeros that follows the two significant
a  a
figures A and B.
 I dr I b
Vab    E(r).dr = –  ln   Band D : Indicates the tolerance in percent about
2 L b r 2 L  a 
b the indicated value or in other words it represents
The resistance the percentage accuracy of the indicated value.
The tolerance in the case of gold is ± 5% and in
b silver is ± 10%. If only three bands are marked on
In  
Vab a carbon resistance, then it indicate a tolerance of 20%.
R ab    
I 2 L Table : Colour code for carbon resistance

Method 2 : We split the medium into differential cylindrical Letters as an Figure Multiplier
shell elements of width dr, in series. The current aid to Colour
(A, B) (C)
memory
flow is cylindrically symmetric (L >> b). The area
B B lack 0 10 o
through which the current flows across a shell of
radius r is A(r) = 2rL. The length the current flows, B B rown 1 10 1

passing through a shell of radius r is dr. Therefore, R Red 2 10 2

the resistance of the shell of radius r is : O Orange 3 10 3

Y Y ellow 4 10 4
1 dr Green 5 10 5
dR  G
 2rL
B Blue 6 10 6
Since the shells are connected in a series, we have V Violet 7 10 7
G Grey 8 10 8
 b W White 9 10 9
b ln  
a
R ab   dR   
a
2  L Ex.1 A voltage of 30 V is applied across a carbon resistor
with first, second and third rings of blue, black and
yellow colours respectively. Find the value of
Colour Coding of Resistance current through the resistor.
To know the value of resistance colour code is used. Sol. Blue Black yellow
These code are printed in form of set of rings or   
strips. By reading the values of colour bands, we 6 0 4
(A) (B) (C)
can estimate the value of resistance.
 R = AB × 10C = 6 × 104 ~
The carbon resistance has normally four coloured
V 30
rings or bands say A, B, C and D as shown in  i= = = 5 × 10–5A
R 60 10 4
following figure.

Ex. 2 A voltage of 30 V is applied across a carbon resistor

with first, second and third rings of blue, black and
A B C D red colours respectively. Find the value of current
through the resistor.
Sol. Blue Black Red
  
6 0 2
(A) (B) (C)

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
 CURRENT 3.7

 R = AB × 10C = 6 × 102 ~ (c) Resistance of semiconductors

V 30 (i) There are certain substances whose conductivity
 i= = = 5 × 10–2A
R 60 10 2 lies in between that of insulators and conductors,
higher than that of insulators but lower than that of
conductors. These are called as semiconductors,
e.g., silicon, germanium, carbon etc.
Effect of Temperature on Resistance (ii) The resistivity of semiconductors decreases with
(a) Resistance of Pure Metals increase in temperature i.e.,  for semiconductors
is –ve and high.
 2m  l (iii) Though at ordinary temperature the value of n
(i) We know that R 2 
 ne   A (no. of free electrons per unit volume) for these
materials is very small as compared to metals, but
For a given conductor, l, A and n are constant, hence
increases very rapidly with rise in temperature (this
R  (1/)
happens due to breaking of covalent bonds). Though
If  represents the mean free path (Average distance  decreases but factor of n dominates. Therefore,
covered between two successive collisions) of the the resistance
electron and vrms, the root-mean-square speed, then
ml
R goes on decreasing with increase in
 V ne 2 A
 , Hence R  rms
v rms  temperature.
Now,
Note
(a)  decreases with rise in temperature because the
amplitude of vibrations of the +ve ions of the metal
increases and they create more hindrance in the
movement of electrons and,
Section C, D - Circuit theory, KCL & KVL,
(b) (i) vrms increases because vrms  T. Therefore, Battery, Grouping of cells
Resistance of the metallic wire increases with rise
in temperature. As  R and   (1/), hence 5. BATTERY AND EMF
resistivity increases and conductivity decreases with A battery is a device which maintains a potential
rise in temperature of the metallic of the metallic difference between its two terminals A and B.
wires. Figure shows a schematic diagram of a battery.
(ii) If R0 and Rt represent the resistances of metallic Some internal mechanism exerts forces on the
wire at 0°C and t°C respectively then Rt is given by charges of the battery material. This force drives
the following formula : the positive charges of the battery material towards
A and the negative charges of the battery material
Rt = R0(1 + t)
towards B. We show the force on a positive charge
where  is called as the Temperature coefficient 
q as Fb . As positive charge accumulates on A and
of resistance of the material of the wire.
negative charge on B, a potential difference develops
 depends on material and temperature but generally 
it is taken as a constant for a particular material for and grows between A and B. An electric field E is
small change. developed in the battery material from A to B and
 
Rt – R0 = R0  t exerts a force Fe  qE on a charge q. The direction

for very small change in temperature dR = R0  dt of this force is opposite to that of Fb In steady state,
the charge accumulation on A and B is such that
Fb  Fe . No further accumulation takes place.

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
3.8 Theory and Exercise Book

direction shown in the figure. The free electrons in

+
the wire move in the opposite direction and enter
–
Fb the battery at the terminal A. Some electrons are
A B
withdrawn from the terminal B which enter the wire
through the right end. Thus, the potential difference
If a charge q is taken from the terminal B to the
between A and B tends to decrease. If this potential
terminal A , the work done by the battery force Fb is
difference decreases, the electrostatic force F e
W = Fb d where d is the distance between A and B.
inside the battery also decreases. The force Fb due
The work done by the battery force per unit charge is
to the battery mechanism remains the same. Thus,
W Fbd there is a net force on the positive charges of the
E  battery material from B to A. The positive charges
q q
rush towards A and neutralise the effect of the
This quantity is called the emf of the battery. The electrons coming at A from the wire. Similarly, the
full form of emf is electromotive force. The name negative charges rush towards B. Thus, the potential
is misleading in the sense that emf is not a force, it difference between A and B is maintained.
is work done/charge. We shall continue to denote For calculation of current, motion of a positive
this quantity by the short name emf. If nothing is charge in one direction is equivalent to the motion
connected externally between A and B, of a negative charge in opposite direction. Using
Fb = Fe = qE or, Fbd = qEd = qV this fact, We can describe the above situation by a
where V = Ed is the potential difference between simpler model. The positive terminal of the battery
the terminals. Thus, supplies positive charges to the wire. These charges
are pushed through the wire by the electric field and
Fb d
E V they reach the negative terminal of the battery. The
q
battery mechanism drives these charges back to the
Thus, the emf of a battery equals the potential positive terminal against the electric fIeld existing in
difference between its terminals when the terminals the battery and the process continues. This maintains
are not connected externally. a steady current in the circuit
Potential difference and emf are two different Current can also be driven into a battery in the
quantities whose magnitudes may be equal in certain reverse direction. In such a case, positive charge
conditions. The emf is the work done per unit charge enters the battery at the positive terminal, moves
by the battery force Fb which is non-electrostatic in inside the battery to the· negative terminal and leaves
nature. The potential difference originates from the the battery from the negative terminal. Such a
electrostatic field created by the charges process is called charging of the battery. The more
accumulated on the terminals of the battery.
common process in which. the positive charge
A battery is often prepared by putting two rods or
comes out of the battery from the positive terminal
plates of different metals in a chemical solution.
is called discharging of the battery.
Such a battery, using chemical reactions to generate
emf, is often called a cell.
 EXAMPLE 8
E
i =2A
A B
vA R  2 vB
E = 10 V
A B
Find vA – vB
Now suppose the terminals of a battery are Sol. vA – iR – E = vB
connected by a conducting wire as shown in above vA – vB = iR + E = 4 + 10 = 14 volt
figure. As the terminal A is at a higher potential
than B, there is an electric field in the wire in the

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
 CURRENT 3.9

EXAMPLE 9 0 – (–30)
Current in FC = = 15A from C to K
Shown in the figure. Find out the current in the wire BD 2
5
C B 0 – (–40)
current in DE =  20A from D to E
20v 10v 2
current in wire AH = 40 – 35 = 5 A from A to H
D A
2
6. KIR CHHO FF'S LAW S FO R
Sol. Let at point D potential = 0 and write the potential of
CIRCUIT ANALYSIS
10
other points then current in wire AD = = 5A from Before moving on to the statement of Kirchhoff's
2
law, we state some conventions to be followed in
20 circuit analysis :
A to D current in wire CB = = 4A from C to B
5 (1) Direction of conventional current is from high
potential to low potential terminal.
v=+20 5 v=0
C B (2) Current flows from high potential node A to low
4A
5A potential node B. if we traverse from point A to B,
4A
10v there is drop of potential; similarly from B to A,
there is gain of potential.
20v 1A + 10v
If we traverse from point A to B, there is drop of
potential; similarly from B to A, there is gain of
v=0 A
D 5A 2 potential. If a source of emf is traversed from negative
to positive terminal, the change in potential is +E.
 current in wire BD = 1 A from D to B
Potential gain
EXAMPLE 10 VA – VB = + E
Find the current in each wire High Potential Low potential
A B
Final Initial
H G F E Potential drop potential potential
10v 30v 40v
50v While discharging, current is drawn from the battery,
1 2 the current comes out from positive terminal and
2
A B C D enters negative terminal, while charging of battery
Sol. Let potential at point A is 0 volt then potential of current is forced from positive terminal of the battery
other points is shown in figure. to negative terminal. Irrespective of direction of
current through a battery the sign convention
40 – 0 mentioned above holds.
Current in BG = = 40 A from G to B
1 The positive plate of a capacitor is at high potential
+10V
and negative plate at low potential. If we traverse a
H G10V 35A F
E capacitor from positive plate to negative plate, the
10V 5A 10V 20A
30V 50V change in potential is –Q/C
40V
40V –30V –40V i + –
10V VB – VA = –Q/C
1 2 2 A B
5A Discharging Battery
40A 15A 20A
0V 0V i + – High Low
A B C 20V D
A B potential potential
0V 0V Charging Battery

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
3.10 Theory and Exercise Book

If we traverse a resistor in the direction of current,

the change in potential is –IR. I1 I2
O
High Potential
+
Low Potential I3
– I6
A B VB – VA = –IR I4

Direction of traverse
Final Initial
Drop of potential
potential potential
The KCL applied to junction O yields.
Direction of traverse
I1 + I5 + I3 = I2 + I4
Gain of potential
Outgoing Incoming
If we traverse a resistor in the direction opposite current current
to the direction of current, the change in potential
is +IR.
2A
Potential gain

Potential drop VA – VB = +IR

5A
High Potential Low Potential Final Initial 3A
+ – potential potential
VA VB

Positive terminal of source of emf is at high potential EXAMPLE 11

and negative terminal at low potential. If we traverse
Find the potential at point A
a source of emf from the positive terminal to negative
terminal, the change in potential is –E. 20V

Direction of traverse 2
VB – VA =–E
VB – VA = – E 15V
1 2
Direction of traverse Final Initial –50 V
potential potential +10 V xA
VA – VB = + E 20V 5V

If a capacitor is traversed from negative plate to 1

positive plate, the change in potential is +Q/C.
–30V
VA – VB = + Q/C + –
Sol. Let potential at A = x, applying kirchhoff current
law at junction A

High Low x – 20 – 10 x – 15 – 20 x – 5  50 x  30
potential potential    0
A B 1 2 2 1

2x – 60  x – 35  x  45  2x  60
 0
(a) The Kirchhoff's Current Law 2
The Kirchhoff's current law (KCL) states that the  6x + 10 = 0
algebraic sum of the currents entering the junction
must equal to sum of the currents leaving the 5
 x–
junction. From the standard point of physics, KCL 3
is a statement of charge conservation.
–5
Potential at A = V
3

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
 CURRENT 3.11

EXAMPLE 12 Sol. Assume x potential at the upper junction & zero

potential at the lower junction.
2 2 2 By KCl, we know that net current on a junction is
zero.
10V  i1 + i2 + i3 + i4 = 0
5V 20V
x–4 x–2 x2 x–4
   0
Find the current in every branch ? 2 4 4 2
Sol. Let we assume x potential at the top junction & 2x – 8 + x – 2 + x + 2 + 2x – 8 = 0
zero potential at lower junction
x i4 2
As from KCL,net current on a junction is O
i3
i1 + i2 + i3 = 0 i2
i1
4V 4
2V 4V
x – 5 x – 10 x – 20
  0 2
2 2 2 4
2V

35
3x = 35  x
3 O O O O

i1 x i3 8
6x – 16 = 0  x V
3
i2
2 1
2 2 2  i1  – A, i 2   A,
3 6

10V 20V
7 2
5V i3  A, i 4  – A
6 3
0 0 0
EXAMPLE 14
35
–5
10 2
 i1  3  A
2 3
2 2 2 2
5 25
Similarly, i2 = A ; i3 = – A.
6 6
4V 2V 2V

EXAMPLE 13

2
Find the current in every branch ?
Sol. The above question could be solved by assuming
potential x & y at the top junctions & zero potential
4V 4 at lower junctions
2V 4V
At the junction 1 applying KCL,
2
2V i1+ i2 + i3 = 0
4
x–4 x–2 x–y
  0
2 2 2

Find the current in every branch ?  3x – y = 6 ...(1)

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
3.12 Theory and Exercise Book

anticlockwise
i1 x i3 2 i4 y i6 direction, starting from point A, we have
1
i 2 i5
2
2 2 2 2 + IR + Ir – E = 0
In the In the opposite From positive
4 2 2 opposite direction to to negative
4V 2V 2V direction current terminal
to current
O O O O
b c

At the junction 2 applying KCL,

i4 + i5 + i6 = 0 r
R
Real
y–x y–2 y Battery
  0
2 2 2 E
 3y – x = 2 ...(2)
a d
Solving (1) & (2)
9x – 3y = 18 E
Hence, I
 3y – x = 2 R r
 8x = 20
EXAMPLE 15
5 3 Find current in the circuit
x= ,y=
2 2
1
Just put the values of x & y & then the evaluate the
current in every branch 20 V 15 V
4
2
(b) The Kirchhoff's Voltage Law 10 V
The Kirchhoff's voltage law (KVL) states that the
algebraic sum of the potential difference around any 3 30 V
closed loop of an electric circuit is zero. The KVL
is a statement of conservation of energy. The Sol.  all the elements are connected in series
KVL reflects that electric force is conservative, the  current in all of them will be same
work done by a conservative force on a charge
20 V – i
taken around a closed path is zero. D +
C
We can move clockwise or anticlockwise, it will + 1 15 V
4i 4  –
make no difference because the overall sum of the – 2 2i
potential difference is zero. 10 V +
3 i
We can start from any point on the loop, we just A + – i B
have to finish at the same point. 3i 30 V
An ideal battery is modelled by an independent
let current = i
voltage source of emf E and an internal resistance
Applying kirchhoff voltage law in ABCDA loop
r as shown in figure A real battery always absorbs
10 + 4i – 20 + i + 15 + 2i – 30 + 3i = 0
power when there is a current through it, thereby
10 i = 25
offering resistance to flow of current.
 i = 2.5 A
Applying KVL around the single loop in

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
 CURRENT 3.13

EXAMPLE 16 (a) Resistance in Series

Find the current in each wire applying only kirchhoff R1 R2 R3 R
voltage law
V1 V2 V3

10 50V
F E D
V V
2 2
(i) In this combination the resistance are joined end to
1
end. The second end of each resistance is joined to
30V first end of the next resistance and so on. A cell is
A B C connected between the first end of first resistance
and second end of last resistance. Figure shows three
Sol. Applying kirchhoff voltage law in loop ABEFA
resistances R1, R2 and R3 connected in this way.
i1 + 30 + 2 (i1 + i2) – 10 = 0
Let V1, V2 and V3 are the potential differences across
3i1 + 2i2 + 20 = 0 ...(i) these resistances.
Applying kirchhoff voltage law in BCDEB
(ii) In this combination current flowing through each
+ 30 + 2(i1 + i2) + 50 + 2i2 = 0 resistance will be same and will be equal to current
4i2 + 2i1 + 80 = 0 supplied by the battery.
2i2 + i1 + 40 = 0 ...(ii) (iii) As resistances are different and current flowing
Solving (i) and (ii) through them is same, hence potential differences
3[–40 –2i2] + 2i2 + 20 = 0 across them will be different. Applied potential
difference will be distributed among three resistances
–120 – 4i2 + 20 = 0
directly in their ratio.
10V 50V
As i is constant, hence V  R
F E D i.e., V1 = iR1, V2 = iR2, v3 = iR3
i1 i2 i2
i1 (iv) If the potential difference between the points A and
+
– 2(i1+i2) 2  – D is V, then
1 i1 – 2i2 2  V = V1 + V2 + V3 = i (R1 + R2 + R3)
+ 30V + (v) If the combination of resistances between two points
i1 i1+i2 i2 is replaced by a single resistance R such that there is
A B i2 C no change in the current of the circuit in the potential
difference between those two points, then the single
i2 = – 25 A resistance R will be equivlaent to combination and
V = i R i.e.,
and i1 = 10 A
iR = i (R1 + R2 + R3) or R = R1 + R2 + R3
 i1 + i2 = – 15 A (vi) Thus in series combination of resistances, important
current in wire AF = 10 A from A to E conclusion are
(a) Equivalent Resistance > highest individual
current in wire EB = 15 A from B to E
resistance
current in wire DE = 25 A from D to C (b) Current supplied by source = Current in each
resistance
7. COMBINATION OF RESISTANCE V V V V
or  1  2  3
A number of resistance can be connected in a circuit R1  R 2  R 3 R1 R 2 R 3
and any complicated combination can be, in general, (c) The total potential difference V between points
reduced essentially to two different types, namely A and B is shared among the three resistances
series and parallel combinations. directly in their ratio
V1 : V2 : V3 = R1 : R2 : R3

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
3.14 Theory and Exercise Book

(b) Resistance in Parallel

V  1 1 1 
i1 R1 Thus,  V   
R R
 1 R 2 R 3
i A i2 R2 B
i R
i3 R3 1 1 1 1
or   
R R1 R 2 R 3

V (v) Thus in parallel combination of resistance important

V conclusion are :
(i) When two or more resistance are combined in such
(a) Equivalent resistance < lowest individual
a way that their first ends are connected to one
terminal of the battery while other ends are connected resistance
to other terminal, then they are said to be connected (b) Applied potential difference = Potential difference
in parallel. Figure shows three resistances R1, R2
and R3 joined in parallel between two points A and across each resistance.
B. Suppose the current flowing from the battery is i. or iR = i1R1 = i2R2 = i3R3
This current gets divided into three parts at the
(c) Current approaching the junction A = Current
junction A. Let the currents in three resistance R1 , R2
leaving the junction B and current is shared among
and R3, are i1, i2, i3 respectively.
the three resistances in the inverse ratio of resistances
(ii) Suppose potential difference between points A and
1 1 1
B is V. Because each resistance is connected i1 : i2 : i3 = : :
R1 R 2 R 3
between same two points A and B, hence potential
(i) If two or more resistance are joined in parallel
difference across each resistance will be same and
then i1R = i1R2 = i3R3............
will be equal to applied potential difference V. i.e., iR = constant i.e., a low resistance joined in
parallel always draws a higher current.
(iii) Since potential difference across each resistance
(ii) When two resistance R1 and R2 are joined in
is same, hence current approaching the junction A parallel, then
is divided among three resistances reciprocally in
i1 R 1 i12 R 12
their ratio. 1 or 1
i2 R 2 i 22 R 22
As V is constant, hence i  (1/R) i.e.,
i12 R1t R 2 H1 R 2
or  or 
V V V i2 2 R 2 t R1 H 2 R1
i1  ,i 2  and i 3 
R R2 R3 i.e., heat produced will be maximum in the lowest
resistance.
(iv) Because i the main current which is divided into
three parts i1, i2 and i3 at the junction A. EXAMPLE 17
Find current which is passing through battery.
 1 1 1 
hence, i  i1  i 2  i 3  V     2
 R1 R 2 R 3 
3
If the equivalent resistance between the points A
6
V
and B is R, then i =
R 1
30V

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
 CURRENT 3.15

Sol. Here potential difference across each resistor is not 5V

30 V I= Modified circuit
3R
 battery has internal resistance here the concept R
of combination of resistors is useful.
Req = 1 + 1 = 2 P

30 R C R
i  15A A
2 B
R

EXAMPLE 18 5V
R
Find equivalent Resistance Current in P  3R  2V
1.5R  R 3R

× R R/2
A × B
R R R
P
A B

R R R
Sol. A VA
B
EXAMPLE 20
R VB VA VB
Find the current in 2  resistance.
Here all the Resistance are connected between the
4 2
terminals A and B. So, Modified circuit is
R 120V
So Req= 6 1
3 3
R
4 4
A R
B
Sol. 2, 1 in series = 3
R
18
3, 6 in parallel =  2
9
4
EXAMPLE 19 2, 4 in series = 6
12A 12A
Find the current in Resistance P if voltage supply 6, 3 is parallel = 2
between A and B is V volts Req = 4 + 4 + 2 = 10  2
R
120
i  12A
P R R 10 4 12A
A B
R 8
So current in 2 Resistance = A
3
3R
Sol. Req =
5 4 8
2 A A
12A 4A 3 3 3

3 6
A B
VA VB C 8A

4

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
3.16 Theory and Exercise Book

• SPECIAL PROBLEMS B

R R
3 R
r F
r R R
1 6 R E G R
r A C
r r r
R R
A B
4 r H
R R
r r r R
2 7 D
r r
5
R

R
We wish to determine equivalent resistance between
R R R R
A and B. In figure shown points (1,2) (3, 4, 5) and
(6, 7) are at same potential Equivalent circuit can be R R E
A R R C R G
B,D F,H
redrawn as in figure shown.
The equivalent resistance of this series combination is R

r r r r 3r EXAMPLE 21
R eq.     
2 4 4 2 2
In the circuit shown in figure. (a) find the current
r 1,2 r 3,4,5 r 6,7 r flowing through the 100  resistor connecting points
r r U and S.
A B
r r r r
Sol. Figure (b) shows simplified circuit. The battery is
r r
directly attached to resistor 90hence current in it
In the figure shown, the resistances specified are is 2 A, see figure (c), The total resistance of second
in ohms. We wish to determine the equivalent branch is also 90 , hence current divides equally.
resistance between point A and D. Point B and C,
Now current through 45  resistor is 2 A and it is a
E and F are the the same potential so the circuit
can be redrawn as in figure shown. combination of two equal 90  resistors. Once again
Thus the equivalent resistance is 1 . current divides equally. 90  resistor is a series
combination of 40  and 50 , hence current
A
through them is equal, i.e.,
2
D 2
1 1
1 1 1 2 1

E 1 F A 1 2 1
2 2 B,C E,F D
B C
1

In the network shown in figure shown all the

resistances are equal, we wish to determine equivalent
resistance between A and E. Point B and D have
same potential, similarly F and H have same potential.
The equivalent circuit is shown in figure shown. The
equivalent resistance of network is 7R/2.

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
 CURRENT 3.17

the junction B gets further divided into two parts

(i 1 – i g) and i g, along branches BC and BD
respectively. At junction D, currents i2 and ig are added
to give a current (i2 + ig), along branch DC. (i2 – ig)
and (i2 + ig) add up at junction C to give a current (i1
+ i2) or i along branch CE. In this way, currents are
distributed in the different branches of bridge. In this
position, we get a deflection in the galvanometer.
(iv) Now the resistance P,Q,R and S are so adjusted
that on pressing the key K2, deflection in the
galvanometer becomes zero or current ig in the
branch BD becomes zero. In this situation, the
bridge is said to be balanced.
1 A. As 50  resistor is a parallel combination of (v) In this balanced position of bridge, same current i1 flows
two equal 100  resistors, they must have the same in arms AB and BC and similarly same current i2 in
current i.e., 0.5 A arms AD and DC. In other words, resistances P and Q
and similarly R and S, will now be joined in series.
8. WHEATSTONE'S BRIDGE (vi) Condition of balance : Applying Kirchhoff's 2nd
law to mesh ABDA, i1P + igG – i2R = 0 ....(1)
B
i1 – ig Similarly, for the closed mesh BCDB, we get,
P ig Q (i1 – ig) Q – (i2 + ig)S – igG = 0 ....(2)
i1 When bridge is balanced, ig = 0. Hence eq. (1) &
A C
G (2) reduce to
i2
i2+ig i1P – i2R = 0 or i1P = i2R ....(3)
K2
R S
i1Q – i2S = 0 or i1Q = i2S ....(4)
i1+i2 D P R
i1+i2 
Dividing (3) by (4), we have, ....(5)
Q S
+ –
This is called as condition of balanced for
E K1
Wheatstone's Bridge.
(i) Wheatstone designed a network of four resistances (vii) It is clear from above equation that if ratio of the
with the help of which the resistance of a given resistance P and Q, and the resistance R are known,
conductor can be measured. Such a network of then unknwon resistance S can be determined. This
resistances is known as Wheastone's bridge. is the reason that arms P and Q are called as ratio
(ii) In this bridge, four resistance P, Q, R and S are so arms, arm AD as known arm and arm CD as
connected so as to form a quadrilateral ABCD. A unknown arm.
sensitive galvanometer and key K2 are connected (viii) When the bridge is balanced then on inter-changing
between diagonally opposite corners B and D, and the positions of the galvanometer and the cell there is
a cell and key K1 are connected between two other no effect on the balance of the bridge. Hence the arms
corners A and C (figure shown) BD and AC are called as conjugate arms of the bridge.
(iii) When key K1 is pressed, a current i flows from the (ix) The sensitivity of the bridge depends upon the value
cell. On reaching the junction A, the current i gets of the resistances. The sensitivity of bridge is
divided into two parts i1 and i2. Current i1 flows in the maximum when all the four resistances are of
arm AB while i2 in arm AD. Current i1, on reaching the same order.

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
3.18 Theory and Exercise Book

EXAMPLE 22 8.1 Unbalanced Wheatstone Bridge

Find equivalent resistance of the circuit between the EXAMPLE 24
terminals A and B.
10 B(x) 5
A C
10 6 i1 i5 i3
i i
v 2 0
A 20 B i2 i4
D F
5 E(y) 10

5 3
v 0
Sol. Since the given circuit is wheat stone bridge and it v
is in balance condition.
Find equivalent resistance ?
 10 × 3 = 30 = 6× 5
Sol. Let potential at point B is x and E is Y
hence this is equivalent to
v
16  8 16 R eq 
R eq    i
16  8 3
Applying KCl at point B
10 6 x–v x–y x–0
  0
10 2 5
A B
8x – 5y = v ...(1)
5 Applying KCL at point E
3
y–v y–x y–0
  0
5 2 10
EXAMPLE 23
 8y – 5x = 2v ...(2)
Find the equivalent resistance between A and B
R 6v 7v
solving x & y x , y
13 13
R R
A B current from branches BC & EF adds up to give
R total current (i) flowing in the circuit.
R
x – 0 y – 0 19v
i = i3 + i4 =  
Sol. This arrangement can be modified as shown in 5 10 130
figure since it is balanced wheat stone bridge.
V 130
2R  2R  i  Req. =
R eq  R R eq 19
2R  2R

C
R R Ladder Problem :
R R R R R
R A 
A B
R R R R R
R R
B 
D
Find the effective resistance between A & B ?

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
 CURRENT 3.19

Sol. Let the effective resistance between A & B be RE between points C & D would be kRE (where RE is
since the network is infinite long, removal of one the effective resistance)
cell from the chain will not change the network.  Effective R between A & B.
The effective resistance between points C & D
would also be RE. R(kR E )
RE  R 
The equivalent network will be as shown below kR E  R
On solving we get
R C
A 2kR – R  (R – 2kR)2  4kR 2
RE 
2k
R RE
15. Symmetrical Circuits :
B Some circuits can be modified to have simpler
D
solution by using symmetry if they are solved by
traditional method of KVL and KCL then it would
The original infinite chain is equivalent to R in series
take much time.
with R & RE in parallel.
EXAMPLE 26
RR E Find the equivalent Resistance between A and B
RE  R 
R  RE
C
RER + RE2 = R2 + 2RRE R R
R
2 2
 R – RRE – R = 0
E R R
A B

R(1  5) R
RE  R R
2 D

EXAMPLE 25 Sol. I Method : MIRROR SYMMETRY

The branches AC and AD are symmetrical
R kR k2R k3R  current through them will be same.
A
The circuit is also similar from left side and right
R kR k2R k3R side like mirror images with a mirror placed alone
CD therefore current distribution while entering
B
through B and an exiting from A will be same. Using
Find the equivalent resistance between A & B ? all these facts the currents are as shown in the figure.
It is clear that current in resistor between C and E is
Sol. As moving rom one section to next one, resistance
0 and also in ED is 0. It's equivalent is shown in
is increasing
figure (b)
R C C
A
R R
R
R kRE i i1 i–2i1 i1
A B
i–2i1 E i1 i
B
D i1 R R i
R
by k times. Since the network is infinitely long, D
removal of one section from the chain will bring a
(fig.a)
little change in the network. The effective resistance

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
3.20 Theory and Exercise Book

branches AC and AD at the input

R R  current in them are same but from input and
R R from exit the circuit is not similar
A B ( on left R and on right 2R)
R R  on both sides the distribution of current will not
be similar.
(fig.b)
Here Vc = Vd

C
2R
R eq 
3 R 2R
II Method : FOLDING SYMMETRY R
x y
R 2R
 The potential difference in R between (B, C) A B
i i–2x E
and between (B, D) is same VC = VD y
R R 2R
Hence the point C and D are same hence circuit x
can be simplified as
R E R D
A B hence C and D are same point
R R/2
R R
So, the circuit can be simplified as
Now it is balanced wheat stone bridge.
R R
C,D R E 2R
A B
This called folding.
Now, it is Balanced Wheatstone bridge R/2
R/2 R
R E R
A B C,D
R/2 R/2
R/2 3R 9
3R  R
R eq  2  2 R
(C,D) 3R 9
3R 
2 2
2R  R 2R
R eq  
2R  R 3
EXAMPLE 28
In II Method it is not necessary to know the currents
Find the equivalent Resistance between A and B
in CA and DA
R
R R R
EXAMPLE 27 R
R R
Find the equivalent Resistance between A and B A B
R R
C R R
R 2R
R R
R 2R A R
A B B
E R
R R R
R R
2R x R R x
Sol. A x i–2x B
D i R i–2x x
R R R
Sol. In this case the circuit has symmetry in the two
C R D

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
 CURRENT 3.21

Here VA = VC and VB = VD
Here the circuit can be simplified as
y R R y
A B 1 6
i i–y i–y 2,4,8 3,5,7
R/2
R/2 R/2
R/2
R/2
R/3 R/6 R/3.
4R
2R 
R eq 3  4R
10R 5 Ans.
5R
3 R eq 
6
R R
A B (b) When current enters at 1 and leaves at 2
R/2 R/2
R/2 R/2 Sol. Here 3, 7 are equipotential surface (if we move
from 1  3, 7 we have along face and 2, 3, 7 we
R/2
move along edge) similarly 4, 8 are equipotential
2R
A B
surface.

R/2 R/2 1 2
R/3
2R
A B

4R/3 3, 7 4,8

EXAMPLE 29
Twelve equal resistors each R  are connected to 5 6
form the edges of a cube. Find the equivalent
resistances of the network. 7R
R eq 
5 6 12
(c) When current enters at 1 and leaves at 3
8 7 Sol. If we cut the cube along the plane passing through
2, 4, 5, 7 then by mirror symmetry, the final
configuration will be
4 3
5 6 5 6
2
1
(a) When current enters at 1 & leaves at 6 (body 8 7 8 7

diagonal)
Sol. Here 2, 4, 8 are equipotential points (if we move 4 3 4 3

from 1  2, 4, 8 it comes along the edge & 6  2, 2 2

1 1
4, 8 it comes along face diagonal). Similarly 3, 5, 7
are equipotential points.
3R
R eq 
4

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
3.22 Theory and Exercise Book

9. COMBINATIONS OF CELLS (B) Cells in Parallel

A cell is used to maintain current in an electric
circuit. We cannot obtain a strong current from a E
1 r
single cell. Hence need arises to combine two or
more cells to obtain a strong current. Cells can be E E r/n
2 r
combined in three possible ways :

......
I
(A) In series, (B) In parallel, and E
n r
(C) In mixed grouping. R
(A) Cells in Series R

1 2 n nE
r r ...... r nr
(I) When E.M.F's and internal resistance of all
E E E I the cells are equal : In this combination, positive
I
terminals of all the cells are connected at one point
R
R and negative terminals at other point. Figure shown
such cells connected in parallel across some external
In this combination, cells are so connected that –ve resistance R. Let e.m.f and internal resistance of
terminal of each cell is connected with the +ve each cell are E and r respectively.
terminal of next and so on. Suppose n cells are Because all the cells are connected in parallel
connected in this way. Let e.m.f and internal between two points, hence e.m.f of battery = E.
resistance of each cell are E and r respectively. Total internal resistance of the combination of n cells = r/n
Net e.m.f of the cells = nE. Total internal resistance Because external resistance R is connected in
= nr. Hence total resistance of the circuit = nr + R. series with internal resistance, hence total resistance
If total current in the circuit is I, then of the circuit = (r/n) + R
If current in external resistance is I, then
net e.m.f nE
I  ...(1)
Total Resistance nr  R net E.M.F E nE
I  
Total resistance (r / n)  R r  nR
Case (i) : If nr < < R, then I  n E / R i.e., if total internal
resistance of the cells is far less than external nE E
Case (I) : If r << R, the I   i.e., if internal
resistance, then current obtained from the cells is nR R
approximately equal to n times the current obtained resistance of the cells is much less than external
from a single cell. Hence cells, whose total internal resistance, then total current obtained from
resistance is less than external resistance, just be combination is nearly equal to current given by one
joined in series to obtain strong current. cells only. Hence there is no use of joining cells of
low internal resistance in parallel.
nE E
Case (ii) : If nr >> R, then I   i.e., if total internal nE
nr r Case (II) : If r >> R, then I  i.e., if the internal
r
resistance of the cells is much greater than the
resistance of the cells is much higher than the external
external resistance, then current obtained from the
resistance, then total current is nearly equal to n
combination of n cells is nearly the same as obtained
times the current given by one cell. Hence cells of
from a single cell. Hence there is no use of joining high internal resistance must be joined in parallel to
such cells in series. get a strong current.

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
 CURRENT 3.23

(II) When emf's and internal resistance of all the cells If n cells are joined in parallel, then
connected in parallel are different : In this case,
Ei Ei
total current in external resistance is obtained with r r 1
i i
the help of Kirchhoff's laws. Figure shows three I i and Eeq.  , req. 
1 1 1
cells of e.m.f E1, E2 and E3 and internal resistances 1  R r r
i ri i i
r1, r2 and r3 connected in parallel across some
external resistance R. Suppose currents given by (C) Cells in Mixed Grouping
three cells are i1, i 2 and i 3. Hence according to
(1) (1) (2) (n)
Kirchhoff's first law, total current I in external .......
resistance R, is given by (2)
.......
I = i1 + i2 + i3 ...(1)

.....

.....
Applying Kirchhoff's 2nd law to closed mesh ABEF .......
we get (m)

 (E1 – IR)  R
IR + i1r1 = E1 or i1 =  r1  ...(2)
  In this combination, a certain number of cells are
Similarly, for closed meshes ABDG and ABCH, we joined in series in various rows, and all such rows
are then connected in parallel with each other.
get
Suppose n cells, each of e.m.f E and internal
E 2 – IR resistance r, are connected in series in every row
i2  ....(3)
r2 and m such rows are connected in parallel across
some external resistance R, as shown in figure.
E1 r1
i1 Total number of cells in the combination = mn. As e.m.f.
F E of each row = nE and all the rows are connected in parallel,
i2 E2 r2 hence net e.m.f of battery = nE.
G D
Internal resistance of each row = nr. As m such
i3 E3 r3 rows are connected in parallel, hence total internal
H C
I  nr 
R resistance of battery =  
m
A B

 nr  
E – IR Hence total resistance of the circuit =    R 
and i3  2 ....(4)  m  
r3
Substituting eq. (2), (3) and (4) in eq. (1), we have If the current in external resistance is I, then
E1 – I R E 2 – I R E 3 – I R
I   net e.m.f nE mnE
r1 r2 r3 I  
Total resistance (nr / m)  R nr  mR
E1 E 2 E 3 1 1 1
   –IR   
r1 r2 r3  r1 r2 r3  mnE
 2

  1 1 1  E E
 nr – mr   2 nmrR
E
or I 1  R      1  2  3
  r1 r2 r3  r1 r2 r3 It is clear from above equation that I will be maximum
when
(E1 / r1 )  (E 2 / r2 )  (E 2 / r3 )
or I [(nr – mR)2 + 2  nmrR] is minimum.
1  R(1/ r1  1/ r2  1/ r3 )

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
3.24 Theory and Exercise Book

This will be possible when the quantity [nr – mR]2 10V 2

is minimum. Because this quantity is in square, it can 6V 1
not be negative, hence its minimum value will be equal B
Sol.
to zero, i.e., A
C 2
4V
nr
mR = nr or R= Battery (B) and (C) are in parallel combination with
m
opposite polarity. So, their equivalent
i.e., In mixed grouping of cells, current in external
10 –4
resistance will be maximum when total internal 
BC  2 2  5 – 2  3V
resistance of battery is equal to external resistance. 1 1 1

Because power consumed in the external resistance 2 2
or load = I2R, hence when current in load is rBC = 1 
maximum, consumed power in it is also maximum, Now, ABC  6 – 3  3V
Hence consumed power in the load will also be 3V
6V 1 1
nr
maximum when R = . rABC = 2 Ans.
m

mnE mnE nE mE Note

I max  or  or
2mR 2nr 2R 2r

EXAMPLE 30
Find the current in the loop.
Section E - Electrical Power & Energy
1 40v, 2 
10. ELECTRICAL POWER
4 2 The energy liberated per second in a device is called
its power, the electrical power P delivered by an
15v, 1 10v electrical device is given by
1
3 20v,1 dq
P= V = VI
dt
Sol. The given circuit can be simplified as
35 v, 5 Power consumed by a resistor.
10
V2
P = VI = I2R = watt
R
The power P is in watts when I is in amperes, R is
35 35 7 7
i   A  I A in ohms and V is in volts.
10  5 15 3 3
The practical unit of power is 1 kW = 1000 W.

EXAMPLE 31 V2
The formula for power P = I2R = VI = is true
Find the emf and internal resistance of a single R
battery which is equivalent to a combination of three only when all the electrical power is dissipated as
batteries as shown in figure.
heat and not converted into mechanical work, etc.
10V 2 simultaneously.
6V 1 If the current enters the higher potential point of the
device then electric power is consumed by it (i.e. acts
as load). If the current enters the lower potential point
4V 2
then the device supplies power (i.e. acts as source.)

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
 CURRENT 3.25

(A). JOULE'S LAW OF ELECTRICAL HEATING

When an electric current flows through a conductor 50W, 220V
100W, 220V
20W, 220V
electrical energy is used in overcoming the resistance
of the wire. If the potential difference across a
B1 B2 B3
conductor of resistance R is V volt and if a current
of I ampere flows the energy expanded in time t
seconds is given by
V2
W = VIt joule = I2Rt joule = t 220V
R
The electrical energy so expanded is converted into 2
Vrated
heat energy and this conversion is called the heating Sol. Prated 
R
effect of electric current.
The heat generated in joules when a current of I 2
Vrated
amperes flows through a resistance of R ohm for t R
Prated
seconds is given by
I2 Rt  R 3  R 2  R1
H = I2Rt joule = cal.
4.2 Power = i2R
This relation is known as Joule's law of electrical As current passing through every bulb is same
heating.
 Brightness order is B3 > B2 > B1
EXAMPLE 32
EXAMPLE 34
If bulb rating is 100 watt and 220 V then determine
(a) Resistance of filament The above B B 1 2

(b) Current through filament c o n f i gu r a t i o n

(c) If bulb operate at 110 volt power supply then shows three B 3

find power consume by bulb. identical bulbs,

Sol. Bulb rating in 100 W and 220 V bulb means when Grade them in
220 V potential difference is applied between the order of their
two ends then the power consume is 100 W brightness. V
Here V = 220
Sol. B1 & B2 withdraw less current as compared to B3
P = 100
because in series they give 2R resistance where as
V2 R is the resistance dut to B3.
 100
R Power = i2R
So R = 484   Brightness order : B3 > B2 = B1.
Since Resistance depends only on material hence it
is constant for bulb
EXAMPLE 35
V 220 5
I   Amp. B6
R 22  22 11
Grade the bulbs
power consumed at 110 V
in order of their B3
B5 B4
110  110 brightness
 power consumed =  25W
484 (All bubls B1 B2
are identical)
EXAMPLE 33
In the following figure, grade the bulb in order of
their brightness : V

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
3.26 Theory and Exercise Book

For a given real battery the load resistance maximizes

1 B6
Sol. As i the power if it is equal to the internal resistance of the
R
battery.
3 1 B5 B3 P
i1 : i 2  : =6:5 i4 B4 2 R
5R 2R  E 
P(R)    R
R r 
6i 5i i1 i3 R R
 i1  r
, i2  B1 B2
11 11
E
1 1 i2 O r
i3 : i 4  : =1:2 i
2R R The maximum power transfer theorem in general,
As i3 + i4 = i1 holds for any real voltage source. The resitance R
V
may be a single resistor or R may be the equivalent
2i 4i
 i3  ; i4  resistance of a collection of resistors.
11 11
power = i2R Note
 Order of Brightness : B5 > B1 = B2 > B6 >
B4 = B3

(B) MAX IMUM POW ER T RANS FER Section F - Electrical Instrument + Exp.
Verifying ohm's law & Specific
THEOREM Resistance Using Meter Brige &
Let E be emf and r internal resistance of the battery. Post Office + Potentiometer
It is supplying current to an external resistance R (EMF & Int. Res.)

E 11. INTRUMENTS
current in circuit I = (A) AMMETER
(R  r )
It is a device used to measure current and its always
connected in series with the 'element' through which
The power absorbed by load resistor R is current is to be meaured, e.g., in figure (A) ammeter
2 A1 will measure the current (I1) through resistance
 E  R1, A2 measures current (I2) through R2 and R3 while
P = I2R =   R
R r  A, measures current I( I1 + I2).
Regarding an ammeter it is worth noting that :
For maximum power transfer we take the derivative of P
(1) The reading of an ammeter is always lesser than actual
w.r.t R, set it equal to zero and solve the equation for R. current in the circuit, e.g., true current in the resistance
dP V
0 R in the circuit shown in figure (B) is I =
dR R
However, when an ammeter of resistance r is used to
dP (R  r)2 – R[2(R  r)]
 E2 0 measure current as shown in figure (C), the reading will be
dR (R  r) 2
V  V
R I'   I 
(R  r)  R
I
– A +
E I
r battery R1 I1
+A –
1
Solving for R, we have
(R + r)2 – R (2) (R + r) = 0 I2
(R + r) – 2R = 0 R2 I2 R3
R=r A2
+ –
(A)

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
 CURRENT 3.27

EXAMPLE 37
V V Find the current in the circuit also determine
–
percentage error in measuring in current through an
I I I' I' A r ammeter (a) and (b).
+
2 2

R R A 0.5 
10V 10V
(B) (C)
(a) (b)
(2) Smaller the resistance of an ammeter more accurate 10 10
will be its reading. An ammeter is said to be ideal Sol. In A I  5A , In B I  4A
2 2.5
if its resistance (r) is zero. However, as practically
r  0, ideal ammeter cannot be realised in practice. i – i'
Percentage error is =  100 = 20% Ans.
(3) To convert a galvanometer into an ammeter of a i
certain range say I, a small resistance S (called Here we see that due to ammeter the current has
shunt) is connected in parallel with the galvanometer reduced. A good ammeter has very low resistance
so that the current passing through the as compared with other resistors, so that due to its
galvanometer of resistance G becomes equal to its
presence in the circuit the current is not affected.
full scale deflection value Ig. This is possible only if
IgG = (I – Ig)S
EXAMPLE 38
(i – iG ) S 3
Find the reading of A
i ig
G ammeter. Is this the
external
resistance current through 6  ? 6
18V 1

Ammeter 3 6
Sol. R eq   1  3
3 6
Ig Current through battery
i.e., S = (I – I ) G
g
18
I  6A
3
EXAMPLE 36 So, current through ammeter
What is the value of shunt which passes 10% of the 6
 6
 4A
main current through a galvanometer of 99 ohm ? 9
Sol. As in figure RgIg = (I – Ig)S No, it is not the current through the 6 resistor.
Ideal ammeter is equivalent to zero resistance
I  I 
 99    I –  S wire for calculation potential difference across
10  10 
Rg it is zero.
 S = 11  I Ig
G
For calculation it is (B) VOLTMETER
simply a resistance It is a device used to measure potential difference and is
(I–Ig) S

Resistance of ammeter I
I
A R1 R2 I' +
R .S V v r
RA  G R R
–
RG  S V1 V2
+ – + – I
for S << RG  RA = S V –
+
(B)
(A)

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
3.28 Theory and Exercise Book

always put in parallel with the 'circuit element' across 200  200 
which potential difference is to be measured e.g., in
Figure (A) voltmeter V1 will measure potential 100 V 300  100 V 300  v 600 
difference across resistance R1, V2 across resistance
R2 and V across (R1 + R2) with V = V1 + V2 (A) (B)

Regarding a voltmeter it is worth noting that :

100
(1) The reading of a voltmeter is always lesser than true Sol. In (A) : Potential difference =  300
200  300
value, e.g., if a current I is passing through a resistance
R [Fig. (B)], the true value V = IR. However, when a = 60 volt
voltmeter having resistance r is connected across R, In (B) Potential difference
the current through R will become 100  300  600 
=   50 volt
r V 300  600  300  600 
I'  I and so V'  I ' R  200 
(R  r) [1  (R / r)] 300  600
and as voltmeter is connected across R its reading We see that by connected voltmeter the voltage
V' is lesser than V. which was to be measured has charged. Such
(2) Greater the resistance of voltmeter, more accurate voltmeters are not good. If its resistance had been
will be its reading. A voltmeter is said to be ideal if very large than 300  then it would have not
its resistance r is infinite, i.e., it draws no current affected the voltage by much amount.
from the circuit element for its operation. Ideal
voltmeter has been realised in practice in the form (C) METRE-BRIDGE
of potentiometer. Metre-bridge is a sensitive device based on the
(3) To convert a galvanometer into a voltmeter of certain principle of wheatstone-bridge, for the determination
range say V, a high resistance R is connected in of the resistance of a conductor (wire). Its sensitivity
series with the galvanometer so that current passing is much more than that of the post-office box.
through the galvanometer of resistance G becomes
equal to its full scale deflection value Ig. This is
possible only if

v
Ig

G
R

V
V = Ig (G + R) i.e., R –G
Ig Metre-bridge is shown in figure AC is one metre long
wire of manganin or constantan which is fixed along a
EXAMPLE 39 scale on a wooden base. The area of cross-section of
A voltmeter has a resistance of G ohm and range of the wire is same at all places. The ends A and C of the
V volt. Calculate the resistance to be used in series wire are joined to two L-shaped copper strips carrying
with it to extend its range to nV volt. binding-screws as shown. In between these strips,
V leaving a gap on either side, there is a third copper
Sol. Full scale current ig = strip having three binding screws. The middle screw
G
D is connected to a sliding jockey B through a shunted
to change its range
- galvanometer G. The knob of the jockey can be made
V1 = (G +Rs) ig
to touch at any point on the wire.
V To measure the unknown resistance, the connection
 nV = (G + Rs)
G as shown in figure are made.
Rs = G(n – 1) Ans. A resistance R is taken out from the resistance box
and the key K is closed. Now the jockey is slided
EXAMPLE 40 along the wire and a point is determined such that,
Find potential difference across the resistance 300 on pressing the jockey on the wire at that point there
 in A and B.

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
 CURRENT 3.29

is no deflection in the galvanometer G. In this (D) POTENTIOMETER

position the points B and D are at the same potential. A potentiometer is used to compare [Link]. of two
The point B is called 'null-point'. The lengths of both cells or to measure internal resistance of a cell.
the parts AB and BC of the wire are read on the Principle : The potentiometer is based upon the
scale. Suppose the resistance of the length AB of principle that when a constant current is passed
the wire is P and that of the length BC is Q.
through a wire of uniform area of cross-section, the
Then, by the principle of Wheastone-bridge. We have,
potential drop across any portion of the wire is
P R directly proportional to the length of that portion.

Q S Construction : A potentiometer consists of a number
of segments of wire of uniform area of cross section
Let the length AB be l cm. Then the length BC will stretched on a wooden board between two thick copper
be = (100 – l) cm. strips. Each segment of wire is 100 cm long. The wire
is usually of constantan or manganin. A metre rod is
l
 resistance of AB, i.e. P = , and resistance of fixed parallel to its length. A battery connected across
A the two end terminals sends current through the wire,
BC, Q =  (100 – l)/A which is kept constant by using a rheostat.
where  is the specific resistance of the material of Theory : Let V be potential difference across certain
the wire and 'A' is the area of cross-section of the portion of wire, whose resistance is R. If I is the
wire. Thus current through the wire, then V = IR

P l
 ...(i)
Q (100 – l )

P
Substituting this value of in eq. (i), we get
Q

l R R(100 – l )
 or S
(100 – l ) S l
R is the resistance taken in the resistance box and l is
the length measured. Hence, the value of resistance l
We know that R =  ,
S can be determined from the above formula. A
where l, A and  are length, area of cross-section
A number of observations are taken for different
and resistivity of the material of wire respectively.
resistances in the resistance box and for each
observation the value of S is calculated. l
 V  I
Finally, the experiment is repeated by interchanging A
the unknown resistances S and the resistance box. If a constant current is passed through the wire of uniform
The mean of the values of S is then obtained. area of cross-section, then I and A are constants. Since,
for a given wire,  is also constant, we have
V = constant × l or Vl
EXAMPLE 41 Hence, if a constant current flows through a wire of
In a meter bridge experiment, the value of unknown uniform area of cross-section, then potential drop along
resistance is 2. To get the balancing point at 40 cm the wire is directly proportional to the length of the wire.
distance from the same end, then what will be the Applications of a potentiometer. A potentiometer
resistance in the resistance box ? can be put to following uses :
Sol. Apply condition for balance wheat stone bridge,
1. To compare [Link]. of two cells : Two cells, whose
P  P 100 – 40 [Link]. are E1 and E2, can be compared by making
  
Q 100 –  2 40 use of the ciruit as shown in figure. The positive poles
of both the cells are connected to the terminal A of
P=3 Ans.
the potentiometer. The negative poles of the two cells
are connected to terminals 1 and 2 of a two way key.
while its common terminal is connected to a jockey j

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
3.30 Theory and Exercise Book

through a galvanometer G. An auxiliary or driver Rh

– + + E' –
battery of e.m.f E, an ammeter A, rheostat Rh and a A K1
one way key K are connected between the end
terminals A and B of the potentiometer. Thus, the
B
positive poles of the two cells as well as the positive
J
pole of auxiliary battery are connected at the common
point A. It may be pointed that the e.m.f of auxiliary A
battery should always be greater than the e.m.f of
either of the two cells. E
G R
K + –

– + + E' –
A S
Rh K2
A constant current I is maintained through the
B
200 300 potentiometer wire with the help of the rheostat.
Plug in the key K2 is kept out and the jockey is
200
moved over the potentiometer wire so as to balance
100 the e.m.f. E of the cell, whose internal resistance is
A to be found. Let l1 be the balancing length of the
E1
potentiometer wire between point A and jockey J. If
1
+ – x is resistance per unit length of the wire, then
+ –
G E = (x l1) I
3 With the help of resistance box S, introduce
E2
2 resistance say S and then put the plug in key K2.
To compare the [Link] of the two cells, a constant Now find the balance point for the terminal potential
current is passed through the potentiometer wire difference V between the two poles of the cell. If l2
between points A and B. The current is kept constant is the balancing length, then
by using the rheostat. V = (x l2) I
When the plug is put in the gap between the terminals Dividing above equation , we have
1 and 3 of the two way key, the cell of e.m.f. E1
E1 l1
will come in the ciruit. Suppose the balancing length 
(between points A and J) is l1. If x is the resistance E 2 l2
per unit length of the potentiometer wire and I, the The internal resistance* of the cell is given by
constant current flowing through it, then
E 
E1 = (xl1) I r   – 1 S
When the key is put in the gap between the terminals V 
2 and 3 and removed from the gap between 1 and Using above equation , we have
3, the cell of e.m.f E2 wil be included in the circuit.
l  l –l
Let the balancing length be l2 in this case. Then, r   1 – 1 S or r  1 2 S
E2 = (x l2) I l
 2  l2
Dividing above equation Knowing the values of l1, l2 and S, the internal
E1 l1 resistance r of the cell can be found.

E 2 l2 Note

Note

We use potentiometer for two tasks :

(i) to find emf of a cell
2. To measure internal resistance of a cell. The internal (ii) to find internal resistance of a cell
resistance of a cell may be found by using a We will first analyse the first task  to find emf of
potentiometer by setting up the circuit as shown in figure. a cell through some examples

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
 CURRENT 3.31

EXAMPLE 42 150V
Potential gradient = 10 m  15V / m

200V
25 
50V 150 O
–50

10m
A 75 
10m
x P
150 O
G x
r
G
20V

Find the value of x if A is the null point ? 120V 30

For 120 V
50
O
120V / m
50V   8m
15V
 x = 10 – 8 = 2m
Sol.
10m Now we will analyse the other task to find internal
50 O resistance of the cell using potentiometer. The main
key point is that first analyse the main circuit then
30 G
the auxillary circuit (supplementary circuit)
20V E1
Potential gradient =

50
Potential gradient = = 5 V/m Now for the auxillary circuit
10
E1
 For 20V potential difference
O E1
20
  4m
5
 x = 10 – 4 = 6m

x P
EXAMPLE 43 O E1

25  G null deflection
E
r
ER
200V E R r

75  R
10m
P E
i
x Rr
2 G Er ER
E ir  E  
Rr R r
120V
ER E
Find the value of x if P is a null point.   1x
Rr 
Sol. Current in the main circuit
Let we take some examples to understand the topic
200 – 25 i – 75 i = 0
i=2A in better way.

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
3.32 Theory and Exercise Book

EXAMPLE 44 Sol. 100 – 5i1 – 20 i1 = 0

90V 10 i1 = 4 A

80
10cm
Potential gradient = = 8V/m
20 10
P
x 8 – 2i2 – 2i2 – 2 = 0
G
2 100V
0 80
20V 2
100 5

Find x if P is a null point?

10m
Sol. First analysing the main circuit,
90 – 10i1 – 20 i1 = 0 0 80
P
i1 = 3 A. G
60V 20
Potential gradient = = 6V/m. 2V 2 2
10m 0 5
90V 10
0 60 8
90 0
8V 2 5
10cm 20
3
0
60 i2 = A
G
2
20 2 10
0 5v 5
for 5 volts   m
20V 2 8v / m 8

Now analysing the auxillary circuit 5

20 – 2i2 – 2i2 = 0  x= m
8
i2 = 5 A.
10 5
For 10 Ve   m
6 3 (E) POST OFFICE BOX
5 25 A post office Box can also be used to measure an
 x = 10 –  m
3 3 unknown resistance. It is a wheatstone Bridge with
EXAMPLE 45 three arms P, Q and R: while the fourth arm(s) is
the unknown resistance. P and Q are known as
100V the ratio arms while R is known as the rheostat
5 arm.
At Balance. the unknown resistance
10m 20 S = (P/Q) R ....(1)
0 P 80V The ratio arms are first adjusted so that they carry
x
G 100 W each. The resistance in the rheostat arm is
2V 2
now adjusted so that the galvanometer deflection
is in one direction. If R = RO (ohm) and
R = RO +1 (ohm) are the resistance in rheostat
2 arm. for which the deflection in galvanometer is in
8V
opposite direction, then it implies that the unknown
Find x if P is a null point ? resistance’s lies between RO & (RO+1) ohm.

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
 CURRENT 3.33

X Now, the resistance in P and Q are made 100 W

R1 B R2 C and 1000 W respectively and the process is re-
A
peated. Equation (1) is used to compute S. The ra-
1000 100 10 1C 100 1000
tio P/Q is progressively made 1:10 and then 1:100.
R
Thus, the resistance S can be accurately measured.
1NF Errors
1 2 2 5 10 20 20 50

5000 2000 2000 1000 500 200 200 100 The major sources of error are the connecting wires
unclear resistance plugs. change in resistance due
A' K1 B' to joule heating, and the insensitivity of the
K2
wheatstone bridge.
G
(A)
These errors may be removed by using thick
connecting wires, clean plugs, keeping the circuit
B
on for very brief periods (to avoid joule heating and
R1 R2 calculating the sensitivity.)
G In order that the sensitivity is maximum, the
A C resistance in the arm P is kept close to the value of
K2
the resistance S.
R X
Note
D

E K1
(B)

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
3.34 Theory and Exercise Book

Exercise - 1 Objective Problems | JEE Main

Section A - Definition of Current, Current 7. A wire has a non-uniform cross-section as shown in
Density, Drift Velocity figure. A steady current flows through it. The drift
1. The electric current in a discharge tube containing a speed of electrons at points P and q is vp and vQ.
gas is due to
(A) electron only
(B) positive ions only
(C) negative ion and positive ions both
P Q
(D) electrons and positive ions both

2. When a potential difference (V) is applied across a

conductor , the thermal speed of electrons is (A) vp = vQ (B) vp < vQ
(A) zero (C) vp > vQ (D) Data insufficient
(B) proportional to T
(C) proportional to (T) 8. A current (I) flows through a uniform wire of
(D) proportional to V diameter (d) when the mean drift velocity is V. The
same current will flow through a wire of diameter
3. A steady current is passing through a linear
d/2 made of the same material if the mean drift
conductor of non-uniform cross-section. The
current density in the conductor is velocity of the electron is
(A) independent of area of cross-section (A) V/4 (B) V/2
(B) directly proportional to area of cross-section (C) 4V (D) 2V
(C) inversely proportional to area of cross-section
(D) inversely proportional to the square root of
Section B - Resistance & resistivity, Ohm's
area of cross-section
law + VI (Volt - Curr.)
4. Two wires each of radius of cross section r but of Characteristics + Colour Code
different materials are connected together end to + Temp. Dependence
end (in series). If the densities of charge carriers in
the two wires are in the ratio 1 : 4, the drift velocity
9. A carbon resistor is marked with the rings coloured brown,
of electrons in the two wires will be in the ratio.
black, green and gold. The resistance (in ohm) is -
(A) 1 : 2 (B) 2 : 1
(A) 3.2 × 105 ± 5 % (B) 1 × 106 ± 10 %
(C) 4 : 1 (D) 1 : 4 7
(C) 1 × 10 ± 5 % (D) 1 × 106 ± 5 %
5. In a wire of cross-section radius r, free electrons
travel with drift velocity v when a current  flows 10. The resistance of a semi-conductors
through the wire. What is the current in another (A) increases with increase of temperature
wire of half the radius and of the same material
(B) decreases with increase of temperature
when the drift velocity is 2v ?
(A) 2I (B) I (C) does not charge with charge of temperature
(C) I/2 (D) I/4 (D) first decreases and then increases with increase
of temperature
6. An insulating pipe of cross-section area ‘A’ contains
an electrolyte which has two types of ions  their
11. A hollow copper tube of 5 m length has got
charges being –e and +2e. A potential difference
applied between the ends of the pipe result in the external diameter equal to 10 cm and the walls are
drifting of the two types of ions, having drift speed = v 5 mm thick. If specific resistance of copper is
(–ve ion) and v/4 (+ ve ion). Both ions have the same 1.7 × 10-8 ohm × metre. calculate the resistance of
number per unit volume = n. The current flowing the tube.
through the pipe is (A) 5.77 × 105  (B) 5.77 × 10-5 
(A) nev A/2 (B) nev A/4
(C) 5.77 × 10-7  (D) 5.77 × 107 
(C) 5nev A/2 (D) 3nev A/2

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
 CURRENT 3.35

12. In order to increase the resistance of a given wire 16. A rectangular carbon block has dimensions
of uniform cross section to four times its value, a 1.0 cm × 1.0 cm × 50 cm. Resistances are
fraction of its length is stretched uniformly till the measured, first across two square ends and then
across two rectangular ends, respectively. If
3
full length of the wire becomes times the original resistivity of carbon is 3.5 × 10–5 -m, then values
2
of measured resistances respectively are :
length what is the value of this fraction ?
1 1
(A) (B)
4 8

1 1
(C) (D)
16 6 50 cm
1cm
13. A conductor with rectangular cross section has
dimensions (a × 2a × 4a) as shown in figure. 1cm
Resistance across AB is x, across CD is y and
across EF is z. Then 35
(A)  10 2 , 7  10  5 
2
C F 5 15
(B) 7  10  ,  10  2 
2
2a 35
A
B (C)  10  4 , 7  10  7 
4a a 2
15
(D) , 7  10 2 
E D 2

(A) x = y = z (B) x > y > z Section C, D - Circuit theory, KCL & KVL,
(C) y > z > x (D) x > z > y Battery, Grouping of cells
17. In the circuit shown, what is the potential
14. A piece of copper and another of germanium are difference VPQ ?
cooled from room temperature to 80K. The resistance of
Q
(A) each of them increases
(B) each of them decreases 2V 4V
(C) copper increases and germanium decreases 1V
(D) copper decreases and germanium increases P

(A) + 3V (B) + 2V
15. The current in a metallic conductor is plotted (C) – 2V (D) none
against voltage at two different temperatures T1
and T2. Which is correct 18. The equivalent resistance between points A and B is :
65 A
 2 15
(A) B
T1 2
Current

T2 45
(B)  8 10
2

5
Voltage (C) 
2
20 10
(A) T1 > T2 (B) T1 < T2 91
(C) T1 = T2 (D) none (D)  30 40
2

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
3.36 Theory and Exercise Book

19. Consider an infinte ladder network shown in figure. 24. In the figure shown, battery 1 has emf = 6V and
A voltage V is applied between the points A and B. internal resistance = 1. Battery 2 has emf = 2V
This applied value of voltage is halved after each and internal resistance = 3  . The wires have
section. negligible resistance. What is the potential
difference across the terminals of battery 2?
R1 R1 R1 R1 R1
A
R2 R2 R2 R2 R2 1
1
R
(A) R1/R2 = 1 (B) R1/R2 = 1/2 3
(C) R1/R2 = 2 (D) R1/R2 = 3
2
20. In the diagram resistance between any two
junctions is R. Equivalent resistance across terminals (A) 4V (B) 1.5V
A and B is (C) 5V (D) 0.5V

r r

25.  i i 
(a) (b)

A B r r
 
11R 18R (No current) (d)
(A) (B)
7 11 (c)

7R 11R In which of the above cells, the potential difference

(C) (D)
11 18 between the terminals of a cell exceeds its emf.
(A) a (B) b
21. A storage battery is connected to a charger for (C) c (D) d
charging with a voltage of 12.5 Volts. The internal
resistance of the storage battery is 1 . When the 26. The diagram besides shows a circuit used in an
charging current is 0.5 A, the emf of the storage experiment to determine the emf and internal
battery is : resistance of the cell C. A graph was plotted of the
(A) 13 Volts (B) 12.5 Volts potential difference V between the terminals of the
(C) 12 Volts (D)11.5 Volts cell against the current I, which was varied by
adjusting the rheostat. The graph is shown on the right;
22. The terminal voltage across a battery of emf E can be x and y are the intercepts of the graph with the axes
(A) 0 (B) > E as shown. What is the internal resistance of the cell ?
(C) < E (D) all of above
V(V)
23. One end of a Nichrome wire of length 2L and cross- C
sectional area A is attatched to an end of
another Nichrome wire of length L and cross-sectional V
area 2A. If the free end of the longer wire is at an
electric potential of 8.0 volts, and the free end of the A
shorter wire is at an electric potential of 1.0 volt, the I(A)
potential at the junction of the two wires is equal to
(A) 2.4 V (B) 3.2 V (A) x (B) y
(C) 4.5 V (D) 5.6 V (C) x/y (D) y/x

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
 CURRENT 3.37

27. A cell of emf E has an internal resistance r & is P R Q

connected to rheostat. When resistance R of R

rheostat is changed correct graph of potential
difference across it is R R
R

V V
(A) 7 (B) 4 (C) 2 (D) 5
(A) (B)
R R 31. For the following circuits, the potential
difference between X and Y in volt is –

V V

(C) (D)
R R

28. A circuit is comprised of eight identical batteries

and a resistor R = 0.8. Each battery has an emf 2 4 8 5
(A) (B) (C) (D)
of 1.0 V and internal resistance of 0.2. The voltage 3 3 9 3
difference across any of the battery is
32. In a closed circuit the sum of total emf is
equal to the sum of the –
(A) currents
(B) resistances
(C) products of current and the resistances
(D) none of the above

(A) 0.5 V (B) 1.0 V

(C) 0 V (D) 2 V Section E - Electrical Power & Energy
33. A line having a total resistance of 0.5 deliver 15kW
29. Two batteries one of the emf 3V, internal at 240 V to a small factory. The efficiency of
resistance 1 ohm and the other of emf 15 V, internal transmission is:
resistance 2 ohm are connected in series with a (A) 60% (B) 79%
resistance R as shown. If the potential difference (C) 89 % (D) 97%
between a and b is zero the resistance of R in ohm is
34. The battery in the diagram is to be charged by the
a b generator G. The generator has a terminal
voltage of 120 volts when the charging current is
3V,1 15V,2
10 amperes. The battery has an emf of 100 volts
and an internal resistance of 1 ohm. In order to
R charge the battery at 10 amperes charging current,
the resistance R should be set at
(A) 5 (B) 7
R
(C) 3 (D) 1
+
G
30. The equivalent resistance between the –
– +
terminal point P and Q is 4 in the given
100 V,1
circuit, then find out the resistance of R in
ohms – (A) 0.1 (B) 0.5 
(C) 1.0  (D) 5.0 

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
3.38 Theory and Exercise Book

35. A resistor of resistance R is connected to a cell of 41. If the length of the filament of a heater is reduced
internal resistane 5 . The value of R is varied from by 10%, the power of the heater will
1  to 5 . The power consumed by R : (A) increase by about 9%
(A) increases continuously (B) increase by about 11%
(B) decreases continuously (C) increase by about 19%
(C) first decreases then increases (D) decrease by about 10%
(D) first increases then decreases.
42. A heater A gives out 300 W of heat when connected
36. Power generated across a uniform wire connected to a 200 V d.c. supply. A second heater B gives out
across a supply is H. If the wire is cut into n equal 600 W when connected to a 200 v d.c. supply. If a
parts and all the parts are connected in parallel series combination of the two heaters is connected
across the same supply, the total power generated to a 200 V d.c. supply the heat output will be
in the wire is (A) 100 W (B) 450 W
H (C) 300 W (D) 200 W
(A) (B) n2H
n2

(C) nH (D)
H Section F - Electrical Instrument + Exp.
n Verifying ohm's law & Specific
Resistance Using Meter Brige &
37. A constant voltage is applied between the two ends Post Office + Potentiometer
of a uniform metallic wire. Some heat is developed (EMF & Int. Res.)
in it. The heat developed is doubled if 43. If an ammeter is to be used in place of a voltmeter
(A) both the length and the radius of the wire are halved then we must connect with the ammeter a
(B) both the length and the radius of the wire are doubled (A) Low resistance in parallel
(C) the radius of the wire is doubled (B) High resistance in parallel
(D) the length of the wire is doubled (C) High resistance in series
(D) Low resistance in series
38. When electric bulbs of same power, but different
marked voltage are connected in series across the
44. When an ammeter of negligible internal resistance is
power line, their brightness will be
inserted in series with circuit it reads 1A. When the
(A) proportional to their marked voltage
voltmeter of very large resistance is connected across
(B) inversely proportional to their marked voltage
X it reads 1V. When the point A and B are shorted
(C) proportional to the square of their marked voltage
by a conducting wire, the voltmeter measures 10 V
(D) inversely proportional to the square of their
across the battery. The internal resistance of the
marked voltage
battery is equal to
(A) zero x
39. Rate of dissipation of Joule’s heat in resistance per
(B) 0.5  y
unit volume is (symbols have usual meaning)
(C) 0.2 
(A) E (B) J
(D) 0.1 
(C) JE (D) None 12V
45. Resistances R1 and R2 each 60 are connected in
40. The charge flowing through a resistance R varies series as shown in figure. The Potential difference
with time as Q = 2t – 8t2. The total heat produced between A and B is kept 120 volt. Then what will
1 be the reading of voltmeter connected between the
in the resistance is (for 0  t  ) point C & D if resistance A B
8
of voltmeter is 120.
R R (A) 48 V
(A) joules (B) joules
6 3 (B) 24 V R1 C R2
(C) 40 V
R D
(C) joules (D) R joules (D) None V
2

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
 CURRENT 3.39

46. By error, a student places moving-coil voltmeter V 50. An ammeter A of finite resistance, and a
(nearly ideal) in series with the resistance in a resistor R are joined in series to an ideal cell C. A
circuit in order to read the current, as shown. The potentiometer P is joined in parallel to R. The
voltmeter reading will be ammeter reading is I0 and the potentiometer reading
(A) 0 E=12V, r  2 is V0. P is now replaced by a voltmeter of finite
(B) 4V [Link] ammeter reading
(C) 6V C
4 now is I and the voltmeter
(D) 12V V eading is V.
(A) I > I0, V < V0 R
47. In the figure shown for gives values of R1 and R2 A
the balance point for Jockey is at 40 cm from A. (B) I > I0, V = V0
When R2 is shunted by a resistance of 10 , balance (C) I = I0, V < V0
(D) I < I0, V = V0 P
shifts to 50 cm. R1 and R2 are (AB = 1m)
R1 R2
10
(A) , 5 51. A battery of emf E0 = 12 V is connected across a
3 G
(B) 20, 30 4m long uniform wire having resistance 4/m. The
(C) 10, 15 cells of small emfs 1 = 2V and 2 = 4V having
A B
internal resistance 2  and 6  respectively, are
15
(D) 5,  connected as shown in the figure. If galvanometer
2
shows no deflection at the point N, the distance of
48. A 6V battery of negligible internal resistance is point N from the point A is equal to
0 R  8
connected across a uniform wire of length 1m. The 1
(A) m
positive terminal of another battery of emf 4V and 6
internal resistance 1 is joined to the point A as N
shown in figure. The ammeter shows zero deflection 1 A
(B) m B
when the jockey touches 6V 3 1 r1 G
the wire at the point C. (C) 25 cm
The AC is equal to 2 r2
(D) 50 cm
(A) 2/3 m C
A B
(B) 1/3 m 52. A potentiometer wire has length 10 m and resistance
(C) 3/5 m 10. It is connected to a battery of EMF 11 volt
A
(D) 1/2 m and internal resistance 1, then the potential gradient
4 V,1
in the wire is
49. The figure shows a metre- bridge circuit, with
(A) 10 V/m (B) 1 V/m
AB = 100 cm, X = 12 and R = 18, and the
jockey J in the position of balance. If R is now made (C) 0.1 V/m (D) none
8 , through what distance will J have to be moved
to obtain balance ? 53. In the circuit shown in figure reading of voltmeter is
– +
(A) 10 cm V1 when only S1 is closed, reading of voltmeter is
(B) 20 cm V2 when only S2 is closed. The reading of voltmeter
X R
(C) 30 cm is V3 when both S1 and 3R
A J B R
(D) 40 cm S2 are closed then
6R S1
(A) V2 > V1 > V3
S2
(B) V3 > V2 > V1 V
(C) V3 > V1 > V2
(D) V1 > V2 > V3 E

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
3.40 Theory and Exercise Book

Exercise - 2 (Level-I) Objective Problems | JEE Main

Section A - Definition of Current, Current Section B - Resistance & resistivity, Ohm's
Density, Drift Velocity law + VI (Volt - Curr.)
Characteristics + Colour Code
1. The electric current in a liquid is due to the flow of
+ Temp. Dependence
(A) electron only
(B) positive ions only 7. A negligibly small current is passed through a wire
of length 15 m and uniform cross-section 6.0×10-7
(C) negative and positive ions both
m2. The measured resistance of the wire is 5.0 .
(D) electrons and positive ions both
The resistivity of the material is
(A) 1.8×10-6 -m (B) 0.2×10-6 -m
2. A metallic block has no potential difference applied
(C) 0.6×10-6 -m (D). 0.9 ×10-6 -m
across it. Then the mean velocity of free electron is
(A) proportional to T 8. The resistance of a wire of length 20 cm is 5. It is
(B) proportional to T stretched uniformly to a length of 40 cm. The
(C) zero resistance now becomes:
(D) finite but independent of temperature (A) 5 (B) 10
(C) 20 (D) 200
3. Which of the following quantities do not change 9. Read the following statements carefully :
when a resistor connected to a battery is heated due Y : The resistivity of a semiconductor decreases with
to the current?
increases of temperature.
(A) drift speed Z : In a conducting solid, the rate of collision between
(B) resistivity free electrons and ions increases with increase of
(C) resistance temperature.
(D) number of free electrons. Select the correct statement from the following
(A) Y is true but Z is false
4. Two wires of the same material having radii in the (B) Y is false but Z is true
ratio 1:2, carry currents in the ratio 4 : 1. The ratio (C) Both Y and Z are true
of drift velocities of electrons in them is: (D) Y is true and Z is the correct reason for Y
(A) 1:16 (B) 16:1
(C) 1:4 (D) 4:1 10. A brass disc and a carbon disc of same radius are
assembled alternatively to make a cylindrical
conductor. The resistance of the cylinder is
5. A uniform copper wire carries a current i amperes
independent of the temperature. The ratio of
and has p carriers per metre3. The length of the
wire is  metres and its cross-section area is s metre2. thickness of the brass disc to that of the carbon disc
If the charge on a carrier is q coulombs, the drift is [ is temperature coefficient of resistance &
velocity in ms–1 is given by Neglect linear expansion]
(A) i/sq (B) i/psq  C C  C B
(C) psq/i (D) i/ps  q (A)   (B)  
B B B C


6. In the presence of an applied electric field (E ) in a B  C B B
(C)   (D)  
metallic conductor. C B C C

(A) The electrons move in the direction of E
 11. Current density in a cylindrical wire of radius R is
(B) The electrons move in a direction opposite to E
(C) The electrons may move in any direction  x  R
 J0   1 for 0  x 
randomly, but slowly drift in the direction of E  R 2
given as J   . The current
(D) The electrons move randomly but slowly drift J x R
0 for  x  R
  R 2
in a direction opposite to E
flowing in the wire is

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
 CURRENT 3.41

7 1 Section C, D - Circuit theory, KCL & KVL,

(A) J0 R 2 (B) J0 R2 Battery, Grouping of cells
24 6
18. ABCD is a square where each side is a uniform wire
7 5
(C) J0 R2 (D) J0 R2 of resistance 1. A point E lies on CD such that if a
12 12 uniform wire of resistance 1 is connected across
AE and constant potential difference is applied across
12. Specific resistance of a wire depends on the A and C then B and E are equipotential.
(A) length of the wire 1
CE A B
(B) area of cross–section of the wire (A) 1
ED 1
(C) resistance of the wire 1 1
(D) material of the wire CE
(B) 2 E
ED D C
1
13. A cross–sectional area of a copper wire is CE 1 CE
3×10–6 m2. The current of 4.2 amp. is flowing (C) ED  (D)  2
2 ED
through it. The current density in amp/m 2
through the wire is – 19. The resistance of all the wires between any two
(A) 1.4 × 103 (B) 1.4 × 104 adjacent dots is R. Then equivalent resistance
(C) 1.4 × 105 (D) 1.4 × 106 between A and B as shown in figure is :
A
(A) 7/3 R
14. When the resistance wire is passed through (B) 7/6 R
a die the cross–section area decreases by 1%, (C) 14/8 R
the change in resistance of the wire is (D) None of these B
(A) 1% decrease (B) 1% increase
(C) 2% decrease (D) 2% increase
20. In the box shown current i enters at H and leaves at
i 2i i i i
C. If iAB  , iDC  , iHA  , iGF  ,iHE  ,
15. In the following diagram two parallelopiped 6 3 2 6 6
A and B are of the same thickness. The arm choose the branch in which current is zero
of B is double that of A. Compare these resistances
(A) BG B C
and find out the value of RA/RB is –
(A) 1 (B) FC A
D
(B) 2
i i i (C) ED G
A F
1 B H
a 2a
(C) (D) none i E
2 t a 21. Consider the circuit shown in the figure
(D) 4 t
2a
5 3 A 3
16. A cylindrical copper rod is reformed to twice
its original length with no change in volume.
The resitance between its ends before the 28 V 10  10  4
change was (R). Now its resistance
(A) 8R (B) 6R
(C) 4R (D) 2R 4  B 2 3

17. Three copper wires of lengths and cross- (A) the current in the 5  resistor is 2A
(B) the current in the 5 resistor is 1A
 A
sectional areas are (  , A);  2 ,  and (C) the potential difference VA – VB is 10 V
 2 (D) the potential difference VA – VB is 5V
 
 2 , 2 A  Resistance is minimum is :– 22. The equivalent resistance of a group of
 
resistances is R. If another resistance is connected
A in parallel to the group, its new equivalent becomes
(A) wire of cross-sectional are
2 R1 & if it is connected in series to the group, its new
(B) wire of cross-sectional are A equivalent becomes R2 we have
(C) wire of cross-sectional area 2A (A) R1 > R (B) R1 < R
(D) same is all the three cases (C) R2 > R (D) R2 < R

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
3.42 Theory and Exercise Book

23. The effective resistance between the points P and Which of the graphs given below represents current
Q of the electrical circuit shown in the figure is voltage characteristics when P and Q are in series.
(A) 2 Rr / (R + r) 2R 2R
2 2
(B) 8R(R + r)/(3R + r) 2R
1 1
(C) 2r + 4R P r r Q
2R (A) (B)
(D) 5R/2 + 2r 10 20 10 20
2R 2R P.D.(Volt) P.D.(Volt)

24. A wire of length L and 3 identical cells of negligible

2 2
internal resistances are connected is series. Due to
the current, the temperature of the wire is raised by 1 1
T in time t. N number of similar cells is now (C) (D)
10 20 10 20
connected in series with a wire of the same material P.D.(Volt) P.D.(Volt)
and cross section but of length 2L. The temperature
of the wire is raised by the same amount T in the 29. Find the current flowing through the resistance R1
same time t. The value of N is : of the circuit shown in figure if the resistance are
(A) 4 (B) 6 equal to R1 = 10 , R2 =20 , and R3 = 30 , and
(C) 8 (D) 9 the potential of points 1, 2 and 3 are equal to
1  10 V,  2  6 V and 3  5 V .
25. Under what condition current passing through the
resistance R can be increased by short circuiting the 2
R2
battery of emf E2. The internal resistances of the
two batteries are r1 and 1 R1 O
E1 r1 E2 r2
r2 respectively.
R2
(A) E2r1 > E1(R + r2)
(B) E1r2 > E2(R + r1) 3
(C) E2r2 > E1(R + r2) (A) 0.1 A (B) 0.2 A
R
(D) E1r1 > E2 (R + r1) (C) 0.3 A (D) 0.4 A

26. n identical cells are joined in series with its two cells 30. A battery of emf E and internal resistance r is
A and B in the loop with reversed polarities. EMF connected across a resistance R. Resistance R can be
of each shell is E and internal resistance r. Potential adjusted to any value greater than or equal to zero. A
difference across cell A or B is (here n > 4) graph is plotted between the current (i)
passing through the resistance and potential differ ence
2E  1
(A) (B) 2E 1 – n  (V) across it. Select the correct alternative (s).
n
V
4E  2 (volt)
(C) (D) 2E1  n  10
n

27. In the network shown the potential difference i

2 ampere
between A and B is (R = r1 = r2 = r3 = 1 , E1 = 3 V,
E2 = 2 V, E3 = 1 V) r E 1 1 (A) internal resistance of battery is 5
(A) 1 V (B) emf of the battery is 20V
R r E
(B) 2 V A
2 2
(C) maximum current which can be taken from the
(C) 3 V B battery is 4A
(D) 4 V (D) V-i graph can never be a straight line as shown
r 3 E3
in figure.
28. Two current elements P and Q have current 31. A simple circuit contains an ideal battery and a
voltage characteristics as shown below : resistance R. If a second resistor is placed in parallel
with the first.
P Q
(A) the potential across R will decrease
1
(B) the current through R will decreased
1
(C) the current delivered by the battery will increase
10 P.D. (Volt) 10 P.D. (Volt) (D) the power dissipated by R will increased.

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
 CURRENT 3.43

32. In previous problem, if the cell had been 36. The ratio of powers dissipatted respectively in R
connected in parallel (instead of in series) which of and 3R, as shown is R
the above graphs would have shown the relationship (A) 9
between total current I and n ?
(B) 27/4
3R
(C) 4/9
I/A

I/A
(D) 4/27 2R
(A) (B)
n n
O O 37. In the circuit shown, the resistances are given in ohms
and the battery is assumed ideal with emf equal to 3.0
volts The resistor that dissipates the most power is
50
I/A

I/A

(C) (D)
R1 R3 R4 30
n n 60
O O 3V R2 50

Section E - Electrical Power & Energy

(A) R1 (B) R2
33. Arrange the order of power dissipated in the given (C) R3 (D) R4
circuits, if the same current is passing through all
circuit and each resistor is ‘r’ : 38. The variation of current (I) and voltage (V) is as shown
in figure A. The variation of power P with
current I is best shown by which of the following graph
(I) A B
V

(ii) A B
Fig A I
(iii) A P P
B

(A) (B)

(iv) A I I
B
P P

(A) P2 > P3 > P4 > P1 (B) P3 > P2 > P4 > P1

(C) (D)
(C) P4 > P3 > P2 > P1 (D) P1 > P2 > P3 > P4
I I
34. Two bulbs one of 200 volts, 60 watts & the other of 39. If X, Y and Z in figure are identical lamps, which of
200 volts, 100 watts are connected in series to a the following changes to the brightnesses of the
200 volt supply. The power consumed will be lamps occur when switch S is closed ?
(A) 37.5 watt (B) 160 watt
z
(C) 62.5 watt (D) 110 watt x s

35. Three 60 W light bulbs are mistakenly wired in series

and connected to a 120 V power supply. Assume
the light bulbs are rated for single connection to 120 Y
V. With the mistaken connection, the power dissipated (A) X stays the same, Y decreases
by each bulb is (B) X increases, Y decreases
(A) 6.7 W (B) 13.3 W (C) X increases, Y stays the same
(C) 20 W (D) 40 W (D) X decreases, Y increases

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
3.44 Theory and Exercise Book

40. What amount of heat will be generated in a coil of 44. A galvanometer may be converted into ammeter or
resistance R due to a charge q passing through it if voltmeter. In which of the following cases the
the current in the coil decreases to zero uniformly resistance of the device will be the largest ? (Assume
during a time interval t maximum range of galvanometer = 1mA)
(A) an ammeter of range 10A
4 q2R q2R
(A) (B) ln (B) a voltmeter of range 5 V
3 t 2t (C) an ammeter of range 5A
2q2R ( 2  t) (D) a voltmeter of range 10 V.
(C) (D) ln
3 t q2R
45. In the circuit shown the readings of ammeter and
Section F - Electrical Instrument + Exp. voltmeter are 4A and 20V respectively. The meters
Verifying ohm's law & Specific are non ideal, then R is :
Resistance Using Meter Brige & R
Post Office + Potentiometer A

(EMF & Int. Res.) V

41. In the given circuit the current flowing through the (A) 5
resistance 20 ohms is 0.3 ampere while the (B) less than 5
ammeter reads 0.8 ampere. What is the value of R1 ? (C) greater than 5
R1 (D) between 4 & 5
20
A 46. In the given potentiometer circuit, the resistance of
the potentiometer wire AB is R0. C is a cell of internal
15
resistance r. The galvanometer G does not give zero
(A) 30 ohms (B) 40 ohms deflection for any position of the Jockey J. Which
(C) 50 ohms (D)60 ohms of the following cannot be a reason for this?
D R
+ –
42. In a balanced wheat stone bridge, current in the
galvanometer is zero. It remains zero when A B
(1) battery emf is increased r J
C
(2) all resistances are increased by 10 ohms G
(3) all resistances are made five times
(4) the battery and the galvanometer are interchanged (A) r > R0
(A) only (1) is correct (B) R >> R0
(B) (1), (2) and (3) are correct (C) emf of C > emf of D
(C) (1), (3) and (4) are correct (D) The negative terminal of C is connected A.
(D) (1) and (3) are correct
47. What will the ideal ammeter reading for the circuit
43. In the arrangement shown in figure when the switch shown here ?
S 2 is open, the galvanometer shows no
deflection for l = L/2. When the switch S2 is closed, 90
+ A
the galvanometer shows no deflection for l = 5L/
–
12. The internal resistance (r) of 6 V cell, and the
emf E of the other battery are respectively. 10
10

10  20
( )

6V S2
r
G
l
(A) 0.5A (B) 45/130 A
A B (C) 45/94A (D) 9/23A
L
( )
E S1

(A) 3, 8V (B) 2, 12V

(C) 2, 24V (D) 3, 12V

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
 CURRENT 3.45

Exercise - 2 (Level-II) Multiple Correct | JEE Advanced

Section A - Definition of Current, Current 4. In the circuit shown E, F, G and H are cells of e.m.f.
Density, Drift Velocity 2V, 1V, 3V and 1V respectively and their
1. A current passes through a wire of nonuniform cross internal resistances are 2  , 1  , 3  and 1 
section. Which of the following quantities are respectively.
independent of the cross-section ? A
(A) the charge crossing in a given time interval. F E
(B) drift speed
D B
(C) current density 2
(D) free-electron density G H
C
Section B - Resistance & resistivity, Ohm's (A) VD – VB = –2/13 V
law + VI (Volt - Curr.)
(B) VD – VB = 2/13 V
Characteristics + Colour Code
+ Temp. Dependence (C) VG = 21/13 V = potential difference across G.
(D) VH = 19/13 V = potential difference across H.
2. Square copper plates of equal thickness and having,
area 1 cm2 and 1 m2, are connected in series as Section E - Electrical Power & Energy
shown in the Figure.
5. A metallic conductor of irregular cross-section is as
shown in the figure. A constant potential difference is
applied across the ends (1) and (2). Then :

(1) ×P ×Q (2)

(A) the current at the cross-section P equals the

(A) The resistance of the both the plates are equal current at the cross-section Q
(B) the electric field intensity at P is less than that at Q.
(B) The potential drop across both the plates are equal
(C) the rate of heat generated per unit time at Q is
(C) The current in both the plates are equal
greater than that at P
(D) The total heat dissipated in both the plates per (D) the number of electrons crossing per unit area
unit time are equal. of cross-section at P is less than that at Q.

Section C, D - Circuit theory, KCL & KVL, 6. The value of the resistance R in figure is adjusted
Battery, Grouping of cells such that power dissipated in the 2 resistor is
3. A battery is of emf E is being charged from a charger maximum. Under this condition
such that positive terminal of the battery is connected 8
to terminal A of charger and negative
terminal of the battery is connected to terminal B of
12V
charger. The internal resistance of the battery is r. R 2
(A) Potential difference across points A and B must
be more than E
(B) A must be at higher potential than B (A) R = 0
(B) R = 8
(C) In battery, current flows from positive terminal
(C) power dissipated in the 2 resistor is 72 W
to the negative terminal
(D) power dissipated in the 2 resistor is 8 W
(D) No current flows through battery

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
3.46 Theory and Exercise Book

7. A bulb is connected to a battery of emf 10 V so 9. A micrometer has a resistance of 100 and a full
that the resulting current is 10 mA. When the bulb scale range of 50A. It can be used as a voltmeter
is connected to 220 V mains, the current is 50 mA. or a higher range ammeter provided a resistance is
Choose the correct alternative (s) added to it. Pick the correct range and resistance
(A) In the first case, the resistance of the bulb is combination(s).
1k and in second case, it is 4.4 k (A) 50 V range with 10 kresistance in series
(B) It is not possible since ohm’s law is not followed (B) 10 V range with 200 k resistance in series
(C) the increase in resistance is due to heating of the (C) 5 mA range with 1  resistance in parallel
filament of the bulb when it is connected to 220 V (D) 10 mA range with 1 k resistance in parallel.
mains
(D) None of these 10. In a potentiometer arrangement. E 1 is the cell
establishing current in primary circuit. E2 is the cell
Section F - Electrical Instrument + Exp. to be measured. AB is the potentiometer wire and
Verifying ohm's law & Specific G is a galvanometer. Which of the following are
Resistance Using Meter Brige &
Post Office + Potentiometer the essential condition for balance to be obtained.
(EMF & Int. Res.) (A) The emf of E1 must be greater than the emf of E2
8. Mark out the correct options. (B) Either the positive terminals of both E1 and E2
(A) An ammeter should have small resistance. or the negative terminals of both E1 and E2 must be
(B) An ammeter should have large resistance. joined to one end of potentiometer wire.
(C) A voltmeter should have small resistance. (C) The positive terminals of E1 and E2 must be
(D) A voltmeter should have large resistance. joined to one end of potentiometer wire.
(D) The resistance of G must be less than the
resistance of AB.

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
 CURRENT 3.47

Exercise - 3 | Level-I Subjective | JEE Advanced

Section A - Definition of Current, Current 9. Two long straight cylindrical conductors with
Density, Drift Velocity resistivities 1 and 2 respectively are joined
1. A current of 0.50 ampere is passing through a together as shown in figure. The radius of each of
CuSO4 solution. How many Cu ++ ions will be the conductor is a. If a uniform total current I flows
deposited on cathode in 10 seconds ? through the conductors, the magnitude of the total
free charge at the interface of the two conductor is
2. A current of 5 ampere is passing through a metallic
wire of cross-sectional area 4×10 –6 m 2 . I 1 2 I
If the density of the charge carries in the wire is
5 × 1026/m3, find the drift speed of the electrons.

Section B - Resistance & resistivity, Ohm's 10. The temperature coefficient of resistance
law + VI (Volt - Curr.) of a wire is 0.00125 per degree celcius. At 300 K
Characteristics + Colour Code + its resistance is 1 ohm. The resistance of the wire
Temp. Dependence
will be 2 ohm at what temperature :–
3. A copper wire of radius 0.1 mm and resistance 1
k is connected across a power supply of 20 V. (a)
How many electrons are transferred per second Section C, D - Circuit theory, KCL & KVL,
between the supply and the wire at one end ? (b) Battery, Grouping of cells
Write down the current density in the wire.
11. A network of nine conductors connects six points
4. A wire has a length of 2.0 m and a resistance of 5.0 A, B, C, D, E and F as shown in figure. The figure
 . Find the electric field existing inside the wire if it denotes resistances in ohms. Find the equivalent
carries a current of 10 A. resistance between A and D.

5. A metal wire of resistance R is cut into three equal

A
pieces that are then connected side by side to form 2
a new wire, the length of which is equal to one third 1 1 D 1
of the original length. The resistance of this new 1
wire is :– E F
2 1 2
6. Masses of three wires of same metal are in the
B C
1
ratio 1:2:3 and their lengths in the ratio 3:2:1.
Electrical resistance of these wires will be in the 12. (a) A car has a fresh storage battery of emf 12 V and
ratio of :–
internal resistance 5.0 × 10–2 . If the starter draws
a current of 90 A, what is the terminal voltage of
7. For two wires A and B of same material and of
same mass, the radius of A is double that of B. If the battery when the starter is on ?
the resistance of wire A is 34  then that of B will be :– (b) After long use, the internal resistance of the storage
battery increases to 500 . What maximum current
(Question No. 8 to 9) can be drawn from the battery ? Assume the emf
8. The resistances of an iron wire and a copper wire
of the battery to remains unchanged.
at 20ºC are 3.9  and 4.1  respectively. At what
temperature will the resistances be equal ? (c) If the discharged battery is charged by an external
Temperature coefficient of resistivity for iron is 5.0 emf source, is the terminal voltage of the battery
× 10 –3 K–1 and for copper it is 4.0 × 10 –3 K–1. during charging greater of less than its emf 12 V ?
Neglect any thermal expansion.

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
3.48 Theory and Exercise Book

13. Find the equivalent resistance 18. For what value of R in circuit, current through 4
of the circuit between points resistance is zero.
A and B shown in figure is :
A B
(each branch is of resistance R
= 1)
4V 6V
10V
14. In the circuit shown in figure, all wires have equal
resistance r. Find the equivalent resistance between
A and B.
C
E 19. If the switches S1, S2 and S3 in the figure are arranged
such that current through the battery is minimum,
B
D find the voltage across points A and B.
F
6 3
A
6 A
S2
15. Find the current through the 10  resistor shown in
s1
figure. 1 9 1 1
10  3V S3
24 V
B
3 6
20. In given circuit determine.

4.5 V (a) The rate at which the chemical energy of the cell
is consumed

16. For the circuit shown in figure, determine the (b) The rate at which heat is generated inside the
unknown voltage drop V1. battery

+1V – (c) Electric power output

+2V –
(d) Which resistance consumes maximum power
+ + (e) Power dissipated across 4 resistance
V1
30 V I
– –
i1 8

i2 4
– 5V + – 3V +
i3 8

17. (a) Determine the potential difference between X and i

Y in the circuit shown in figure.
E = 6V, r  1
2
X + –
+ 4V 21. If a cell of constant E.M.F. produces the same
– 2V
3 – 3 5 amount of the heat during the same time in two in
+ 4V
Y dependent resistors R 1 and R2 , when they are
separately connected across the terminals of the cell,
one after the another, find the internal resistance of
(b) If intermediate cell has internal resistance r = 1 
the cell.
then determine the potential difference between X and Y.

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
 CURRENT 3.49

Section E - Electrical Power & Energy (F) The rate at which the chemical energy of the
22. Three equal resistors connected in series across a cell is consumed or increased.
source of emf together dissipate 10 watts of power. (G) Potential difference across box.
What would be the power dissipated if the same (H) Electric power output across box.
resistors are connected in parallel across the same
source of emf ?
27. Find the resistor in which maximum heat will be
produced.
23. Find the current through 25V cell & power supplied
5 5
by 20V cell in the figure shown.
10V 5V 20V 30V
25V 6
4
10 

11
5

5

2

V
24. One kilowatt electric heater is to be used with 220
V.D.C supply.
Section F - Electrical Instrument + Exp.
(a) What is the current in the heater
Verifying ohm's law & Specific
(b) What is its resistance. Resistance Using Meter Brige &
(c) What is the power dissipated in the heater. Post Office + Potentiometer
(EMF & Int. Res.)
(d) How much heat in calories is produced per second.
(e) How many grams of water at 100ºC will be 28. In the circuit shown in figure the reading of ammeter
converted per minute into steam at 100ºC with the heater. is the same with both switches open as with both
[(latent heat of vaporisation of water = 540 cal/g)] 0closed. Then find the resistance R. (ammeter is ideal)
100 
25. The efficiency of a cell when connected to a A
resistance R is 60%. What will be its efficiency if
the external resistance is increased to six times. R 50 

26. In following diagram boxes may contain resistor or + –

battery or any other element then determine in 300  1.5 V
each case
29. The resistance of the rheostat shown in figure is 30
 . Neglecting the meter resistance, find the minimum
1A=i 1A=i and maximum currents through the ammeter as the
rheostat is varied.
10 V,1 10 V,1
(A) (B)
5.5 V
(A) E.m.f of battery
A
(B) Battery is acting as a source or load
10 
(C) Potential difference across each battery.
(D) Power input to the battery or output by the battery. 30 
(E) The rate at which heat is generated inside the battery. 20 

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
3.50 Theory and Exercise Book

30. Find the current I & voltage V in the circuit shown. 34. A battery of emf 0 = 10 V is connected across a
1m long uniform wire having resistance 10/m.
5 7 Two cells of emf 1 = 2V and 2 = 4V having internal
60 V resistances 1 and 5 respectively are connected
41 7  as shown in the figure. If a galvanometer shows no
deflection at the point P, find the distance of point P
I V 0.4  from the point a.
20 V 4
8 10
2 10  0  10V
P
A B
1

31. For the circuit shown in the figure, find the voltage  1  2V G
across 10  resistor and the current passing 5
through it.
 2  4V

35. A potentiometer wire AB is 100 cm long and has a

5 10  10A 2 1 5A
current source current source total resistance of 10ohm. If the galvanometer shows
zero deflection at the position C, then find the value
of unknown resistance R :

32. A part of a circuit is shown in figure. Here reading of

ammeter is 5 ampere and voltmeter is 96V & voltmeter 10 V

resistance is 480 ohm. Then find the resistance R 40 cm

C
A B
R 5V
A G
r  1

V R

33. The ammeter shown in figure consists of a 480  36. An accumulator of emf 2 volt and negligible
coil connected in parallel to a 20  shunt. Find the internal resistance is connected across a uniform wire
reading of the ammeter. of length 10m and resistance 30. The appropriate
terminals of a cell of emf 1.5 Volt and internal
A resistance 1 is connected to one end of the wire,
10  and the other terminal of the cell is connected through
a sensitive galvanometer to a slider on the wire. What
length of the wire will be required to produce zero
deflection of the galvanometer ? How will the
20 V balancing change (a) when a coil of resistance 5 is
placed in series with the accumulator, (b) the cell of
1.5 volt is shunted with 5 resistor ?

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
 CURRENT 3.51

Exercise - 3 | Level-II Subjective | JEE Advanced

Section A - Definition of Current, Current Section C, D - Circuit theory, KCL & KVL,
Density, Drift Velocity Battery, Grouping of cells
1. The area of cross-section, length and density of a 6. A triangle is constructed using the wires AB, BC &
piece of a metal of atomic weight 60 are CA of same material and of resistance , 2 & 3
10–6 m2, 1.0 m and 5 × 103 kg/m3 respectively. Find respectively. Another wire of resistance /3 from
the number of free electrons per unit volume of
A can make a sliding contact with wire BC. Find
every atom contributes one free electron. Also find
the maximum resistance of the network between
the drift velocity of electrons in the metal when a
current of 16 A passes through it. points A and the point of sliding wire with BC.
(Given: Avogadro number 6 × 1023/ mol)
7. What will be the change in the resistance of a circuit
consisting of five identical conductors if two similar
Section B - Resistance & resistivity, Ohm's
conductors are added as shown by the dashed line
law + VI (Volt - Curr.)
Characteristics + Colour Code + in figure
Temp. Dependence
2. (a) The current density across a cylindrical
conductor of radius R varies according to the
 r
equation J  J0 1  R  , where r is the distance from
8. A piece of resistive wire is made up into two squares
the axis. Thus the current density is a maximum J0
with a common side of length 10 cm. A current enters
at the axis r = 0 and decreases linearly to zero at the
the rectangular system at one of the corners and
surface r = R. Calculate the current in terms of J0
leaves at the diagonally opposite corners. Show that
and the conductor’s cross sectional area is A = R2. the current in the common side is 1/5th of the
(b) Suppose that instead the current density is a maximum entering current. What length of wire connected
J0 at the surface and decreases linearly to zero at the between input and output terminals would have an
r equivalent effect.
axis so that J  J0 . Calculate the current.
R
3. A rod of length L and cross-section area A lies along 9. A network of resistance is constructed with R1 &
the x-axis between x = 0 and x = L. The R2 as shown in the figure. The potential at the points
material obeys Ohm’s law and its resistivity varies 1,2,3,.., N and V1, V2, V3,....., Vn respectively each
along the rod according to (x) = 0e–x/L. The end of having a potential k time smaller than previous one.
the rod at x = 0 is at a potential V0 and it is zero at x = L. Find
(a) Find the total resistance of the rod and the R1 R2
current in the wire. (i) R 2 and R 3 in terms of k
(b) Find the electric potential in the rod as a function of x.
V0 R1 V1 R1 V2 R1 V3 VN–1 R1 VN
4. A resistance R of thermal coefficient of resistivity
=  is connected in parallel with a resistance = 3R,
having thermal coefficient of resistivity = 2. Find V0 = kV1 R2 R2 R2 R2 R3
the value of eff.

5. The length of a given cylindrical wire is increased

by 100%. Due to the consequent decrease in
diameter the change in the resistance of the wire (ii) current that passes through the resistance R 2
will be :– nearest to the V0 in terms V0, k & R3.

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
3.52 Theory and Exercise Book

10. In the circuit shown in figure, calculate the 14. A person decides to use his bath tub water to
following generate electric power to run a 40 watt bulb. The
(i) Potential difference between points a and b when bath tube is located at a height of 10m from the
switch S is open. ground & it holds 200 litres of water. If we install a
(ii) Current through S in the circuit when S is closed. water driven wheel generator on the ground, at what
rate should the water drain from the bath tube to
36v
light bulb ? How long can we keep the bulb on, if
the bath tub was full initially. The efficiency of
generator is 90%.(g = 10m/s–2)
a S b
15. The circuit shown in figure is made of a
homogeneous wire of uniform cross-section. ABCD
is a square. Find the ratio of the amounts of heat
liberated per unit time in wire A-B and C-D.
D C
11. An enquiring physics student connects a cell to a
circuit and measures the current drawn from the
cell to I1. When he joins a second identical cell is A B
series with the first, the current becomes I2. When
the cells are connected are in parallel, the current
through the circuit is I3. Show that relation between
Section F - Electrical Instrument + Exp.
the current is 3 I3 I2 = 2 I1 (I2 + I3)
Verifying ohm's law & Specific
Resistance Using Meter Brige &
12. Find the potential difference V A – VB for the Post Office + Potentiometer
circuit shown in the figure. (EMF & Int. Res.)
16. An ideal cell having a steady emf of 2 volt is
1V 1V B 1V 1V connected across the potentiometer wire of length
IV IV 10 m. The potentiometer wire is of magnesium and
having resistance of 11.5 /m. An another cell gives
a null point at 6.9 m. If a resistance of 5 is put in
A series with potentiometer wire, find the new position
1V 1V 1V 1V
of the null point.
Section E - Electrical Power & Energy 17. A galvanometer having 50 divisions provided with
13. The current I through a rod of a certain metallic a variable shunt s is used to measure the current
oxide is given by I = 0.2 V5/2, where V is the when connected in series with a resistance of 90 
potential difference across it. The rod is connected and a battery of internal resistance 10 . It is
in series with a resistance to a 6V battery of observed that when the shunt resistance are 10,
negligible internal resistance. What value should the 50, respectively the deflection are respectively 9
series resistance have so that & 30 divisions. What is the resistance of the
galvanometer ? Further if the full scale deflection
(i) the current in the circuit is 0.44
of the galvanometer movement is 300 mA, find the
(ii) the power dissipated in the rod is twice that
emf of the cell.
dissipated in the resistance.
18. A voltmeter of resistance RV and an ammeter of
resistance R A are connected in series across a
battery of emf E and of negligible internal resistance.
When a resistance R is connected in parallel to
voltmeter, reading of ammeter increases to three
times while that of voltmeter reduces to one-third.
Calculate RA and RV in terms of R.

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
 CURRENT 3.53

Exercise - 4 | Level-I Previous Year | JEE Main

1. In the circuit, the galvanometer G shows zero 7. An electric bulb is rated 220 V-100 W. The power
deflection. If the batteries A and B have negligible consumed by it when operated on 110 V will be
internal resistance, the value of the resistor R will be (AIEEE 2006)
(AIEEE 2005) (A) 75 W (B) 40 W
500 (C) 25 W (D) 50 W
(A) 200  G 2V
(B) 100  A 8. The resistance of a bulb filament is 100  at a
R
(C) 500  12V B temperature of 100°C. If its temperature coefficient
of resistance be 0.005 per °C, its resistance will
(D) 1000 
become 200  at temperature of (AIEEE 2006)
2. Two sources of equal emf are connected to an (A) 300°C (B) 400°C
external resistance R. The internal resistances of the (C) 500°C (D) 200°C
two source are R 1 and R 2 (R 2 > R 1 ). If the
potential difference across the source having 9. In a Wheatstone's bridge, three resistances P, Q and
internal resistance R2, is zero, then (AIEEE 2005) R are connected in the three arms and the fourth
arm is formed by two resistances S1 and S2 connected
R2  ( R1  R2 ) in parallel. The condition for the bridge to be balanced
(A) R  (B) R  R2  R1 will be
( R2  R1 ) (AIEEE 2006)
R1 R2 R1 R2 P 2R P R(S1  S2 )
(C) R  (D) R  (A)  (B) 
( R2  R1 ) ( R2  R1 ) Q S1  S2 Q S1S2

3. A heater coil is cut into two equal parts and only P R(S1  S2 ) P R
(C)  (D) 
one part is now used in the heater. The heat Q 2S1S2 Q S1  S2
generated will now be (AIEEE 2005)
(A) doubled (B) four times
(C) one-fourth (D) halved 10. The Kirchholff's first law (i  0) and second law
(iR  E )
4. An energy source will supply a constant current into When the symbols have their usual meanings, are
the load, if its internal resistance is respectively based on- (AIEEE 2006)
(AIEEE 2005) (A) Conservation of charge, conservation of momentum
(A) equal to the resistance of the load (B) Conservation of energy, conservation of charge
(B) very large as compared to the load resistance (C) Conservation of momentum, conservation of charge
(C) zero (D) Conservation of charge, conservation of energy
(D) non-zero but less than the resistance of the load
11. The current I drawn from the 5 V source will be
5. In a potentiometer experiment the balancing with a 10
(AIEEE 2006)
cell is at length 240 cm. On shunting the cell with a
5 10 20
resistance of 2  , the balancing length becomes
120 cm. The internal resistance of the cell is
10
(AIEEE 2005) I
(A) 1 (B) 0.5  5V
+ –
(C) 4  (D) 2 
(A) 0.33 A (B) 0.5 A
6. The resistance of hot tungsten filament is about 10 (C) 0.67 A (D) 0.17 A
times the cold resistance. What will be the resistance
of 100 W and 200 V lamp, when not in use ? 12. The resistance of a wire is 5  at 50°C and 6  at
(AIEEE 2005) 100°C. The resistance of the wire at 0°C will be
(A) 40  (B) 20  (AIEEE 2007)
(A) 2  (B) 1
(C) 400  (D) 200 
(C) 4  (D) 3

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
3.54 Theory and Exercise Book

13. A material B has twice the specific resistance of (ii) Calculate field E(r) at distance ‘r’ from A by
A. A circular wire made of B has twice the using Ohm’s law E = j, where j is the current per
diameter of a wire made of A. Then for the two unit area at ‘r’.
(iii) From the ‘r’ dependence of E(r), obtain the
wires to have the same resistance, the ratio lB / l A
potential V(r) at r.
of their respective lengths must be (AIEEE 2007) (iv) Repeat (i), (ii) and (iii) for current ‘I’ leaving
(A) 1 (B) 1/2 ‘D’ and superpose results for ‘A’ and ‘D’.
(C) 1/4 (D) 2
16. V measured between B and C is
14. Shown in the figure adjacent is a meter-bridge set
up with null deflection in the galvanometer. The value l l l l
(A)  (B) 
of the unknown resistor R is (AIEEE 2008) a (a  b) a (a  b)
55  R
l l l
(C)  (D)
2 a 2 (a  b) 2 (a  b)
G
17. For current entering at A, the electric field at a
20 cm distance ‘r’ from A is
1 1
(A) (B)
8r 2 r2
(A) 13.75  (B) 220 
1 1
(C) 110  (D) 55  (C) (D)
2r 2 4 r 2
15. A 5 V battery with internal resistance 2  and a 2 V 18. Thise question contains Statement-I and Statement-
battery with internal resistance 1 are connected to II. Of the four choices given after the statements,
a10 resistor as shown in the figure. (AIEEE 2008) choose the one that best describes the two statements.
P2 Statement I : The temperature dependence of
resistance is usually given as R  R0 (1  t ). The
5V 10  2V
2 1 resistance of a wire changes from 100  to 150 
when its temperature is increased from 27°C to 227°C.
P1 This implies that   2.5  103 /  C.
The current in the 10  resistor is Statement II : R  Ri (1  T ) is valid only
(A) 0.27 A, P2 to P1 (B) 0.03 A, P1 to P2
when the change in the temperature T is small
(C) 0.03 A, P2 to P1 (D) 0.27 A, P1 to P2
and R  ( R  R0 )  R0 . (AIEEE 2009)
Directions: (A) Statement I is true, Statement II is false.
Question No. 16 and 17 are based on the following (B) Statement I is true, Statement II is true; Statement
paragraph. (AIEEE 2008) II is the correct explanation of Statement I.
Consider a block of conducting material of resistivity (C) Statement I is true. Statement II is true; Statement
‘’ shown in the figure. Current ‘I’ enters at ‘A’ and II is not the correct explanation of Statement I.
leaves from ‘D’. We apply superposition principle to (D) Statement I is false, Statement II is true.
find voltage ‘V’ developed between ‘B’ and ‘C’.
The calculation is done in the following steps: 19. Two conductors have the same resistance at 0°C
but their temperature coefficients of resistance are
1 and  2 . The respective temperature coefficients
of their series and parallel combinations are nearly
(AIEEE 2010)
1   2 1   2
(A) , 1   2 (B) 1   2 ,
2 2
1 2 1   2 1   2
(C) 1   2 , (D) ,
(i) Take current ‘I’ entering from ‘A’ and assume it 1   2 2 2
to spread over a hemispherical surface in the block.

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
 CURRENT 3.55

20. In the circuit shown below, the key K is closed at 26. The supply voltage to a room is 120 V. The resistance
t = 0. The current through the battery is of the lead wires is 6 A 60 W bulb is already
[AIEEE 2010] switched on. What is the decrease of voltage across
V K the bulb, when a 240 W heater is switched on in
parallel to the bulb? [AIEEE 2013]
L1 R1 (A) 13.3 Volt (B) 10.4 Volt
(C) zero Volt (D) 2.9 Volt
R2 27. This question has statement I and statement II. Of the
four choices given after the statement, choose the one
VR1R 2 that best decribes the two statements. [AIEEE 2013]
V
(A) at t = 0 and R at t =  Statement - I : Higher the range, greater is the
R12  R 22 2 resistance of ammeter.
V V(R1  R 2 )
Statement - II : To increase the range of ammeter,
(B) R at t = 0 and at t =  additional shunt needs to be used across it.
R1R 2
2 (A) Statement-I is true, Statement-II is false
VR1R 2 (B) Statement-I is false, Statement-II is true
V
(C) R at t = 0 and at t =  (C) Statement-I is true, Statement-II is true,
2 R12  R 22 Statement-II is the correct explanation of statement-I
(D) Statement-I is true, Statement-II is true, Statement-II
V(R1  R 2 ) V
(D) at t = 0 and R at t =  is not the correct explanation of Statement-I.
R1R 2 2
28. In a large building, there are 15 bulbs of 40 W, 5
bulbs 100 W, 5 fans of 80 W and 1 heater of 1 kW.
21. If 400  of resistance is made by adding four The voltage of the electric mains is 220 V. The
100  resistance of tolerance 5%, then the minimum capacity of the main fuse of the building
tolerance of the combination is (AIEEE 2011) will be : (JEE MAIN 2014)
(A) 20% (B) 5% (A) 12 A (B) 14 A (C) 8 A (D) 10 A
(C) 10% (D) 15% 29. When 5V potential difference is applied across a
wire of length 0.1 m, the drift speed of electrons is
22. The current in the primary circuit of a potentiometer 2.5 × 10–4 ms–1. If the electron density in the wire is
is 0.2 A. The specific resistance and cross-section 8 × 1028 m–3, the resistivity of the material is close
of the potentiometer wire are 4 × 10–7   m and to : (JEE MAIN 2015)
8 × 10–7 m2 respectively. The potential gradient will (A) 1.6 × 10–6 m (B) 1.6 × 10–5 m
be equal to (AIEEE 2011) (C) 1.6 × 10–8 m (D) 1.6 × 10–7 m
(A) 0.2 V/m (B) 1 V/m 30. In the circuit shown, the current in the 1 resistor is :
(C) 0.3 V/m (D) 0.1 V/m (JEE MAIN 2015)
(A) 0.13 A, from Q to P
23. If a wire is stretched to make it 0.1% longer, its
resistance will (AIEEE 2011) (B) 0.13 A, from P to Q
(A) increase by 0.2% (B) decrease by 0.2% (C) 1.3 A, from P to Q
(C) decrease by 0.05% (D) increase by 0.05%
(D) 0A
24. Two electric bulbs marked 25 W-220V and 100 W- 31. A galvanometer having a coil resistance of 100
220V are connected in series to a 440V gives a full scale deflection, when a current of
supply. Which of the bulbs will fuse? (AIEEE 2012) 1 mA is passed through it. The value of the
(A) Both (B) 100W resistance, which can convert this galvanometer into
(C) 25W (D) Neither ammeter giving a full scale deflection for a current
of 10 A, is : (JEE MAIN 2016)
25. Resistance of a given wire is obtained by mea suring (A) 2 (B) 0.1  (C) 3  (D) 0.01 
the current flowing in it and the voltage difference 32. The temperature dependence of resistances of Cu
applied across it. If the percentage errors in the and aundoped Si in the temperature range 300–400
measurement of the current and the voltage K, is best described by : (JEE MAIN 2016)
difference are 3% each, then errors in the value of (A) Linear increase for Cu, exponential increase for Si.
resistance of the wire is (AIEEE 2012) (B) Linear increase for Cu, exponential decrease for Si.
(A) 6% (B) zero (C) Linear decrease for Cu, linear decrease for Si.
(C) 1% (D) 3% (D) Linear increase for Cu, linear increase for Si.

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
3.56 Theory and Exercise Book

2V 2V 2V 36. The reading of the ammeter for a silicon diode

in the given circuit is : (JEE MAIN 2018)

33.

2V 2V 2V

In the above circuit the current in each resistance

is - (JEE MAIN 2017)
(A) 0 A (B) 1 A
(C) 0.25 A (D) 0.5 A (A) 13.5 mA (B) 0
(C) 15 mA (D) 11.5 mA
34. In the given circuit diagram when the current
37. Two batteries with e.m.f. 12 V and 13 V are
reaches steady state in the circuit, the charge on connected in parallel across a load resistor
the capacitor of capacitance C wil be : of 10 . The internal resistances of the two
(JEE MAIN 2017) batteries are 1 and 2 respectively. The
voltage across the load lies between :
E r (A) 11.7 V and 11.8 V (JEE MAIN 2018)
(B) 11.6 V and 11.7 V
(C) 11.5 V and 11.6 V
r1
(D) 11.4 V and 11.5 V
C
38. On interchanging, the resistances, the
balance point of a meter bridge shifts the
r2 left by 10 cm. The resistance of there series
combination is 1 k. How much was the
resistance on the left slot before
r1
(A) CE (r  r) (B) CE interchanging the resistances ? (JEE MAIN
1 2018)
(A) 910  (B) 990 
r1 r2 (C) 505  (D) 550 
(C) CE (r  r) (D) CE (r  r )
2 2
39. In a potentiometer experiment, it is found
that no current passes through the
35. which of the following statements is false ? galvanometer when the terminals of the cell
(JEE MAIN 2017) are connected across 52 cm of the
(A) Kirchhoff’s second law represent energy con- potentiometer wire. If the cell shunted by a
resistance of 5, a balance is found when
servation. the cell is connected across 40 cm of the
(B) Wheatstone bridge is the most sensitive when wire. Find the internal resistance of the cell .
all the four resistances are of the same order mag- (JEE MAIN 2018)
nitude. (A) 25  (B) 1 
(C) In a balanced Wheatstone bridge the cell and (C) 1.5  (D) 2 
the galvanometer are exchanged, the null point is
disturbed.
(D) A rheostat can be used as a potential divider.

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
 CURRENT 3.57

Exercise - 4 | Level-II Previous Year | JEE Advanced

1. A galvanometer has resistance 100  and it 5. Column-I gives some devices and Column-II
requires current 100A for full scale deflection. A gives some process on which the functioning of
resistor 0.1 is connected to make it an ammeter. these devices depend. Match the devices in
The smallest current required in the circuit to produce Column-I with the processes in Column-II and
the full scale deflection is [JEE-2005] indicate your answer by darkening appopriate
bubbles in the 4 × 4 matrix given in the ORS.
(A) 1000.1 mA (B) 1.1 mA
[JEE - 2007]
(C) 10.1 mA (D) 100.1 mA
Column-I Column-I
(A) Bimetallic strip (p) Radiation from a
2. An unknown resistance X is to be determined using hot body
resistances R1, R2 or R3. Their corresponding null points (B) Steam engine (q) Energy conversion
are A, B and C. Find which of the above will give the (C) Incandescent (r) Melting
most accurate reading and why ? [JEE-2005] lamp
(D) Electric fuse (s) Thermal expansion
of solids
(A) A - 's, q' or 'p', B - 's', C - q' or 'p' , D - 'p, r' or 'r'
(B) A - 's, r' or 's', B - 'q', C - 'p, s' or 'p' , D - 'q, p
(C) A - 's, q' or 's', B - 'q', C - 'p, q' or 'p' , D - 'q, r' or 'r'
X R (D) A - 'r, s', B - 'r', C - 'p, q' or 'p' , D - 'p, r' or 'r'

G 6. Figure shows three resistor configurations R1, R2

and R3 connected to 3V battery. If the power
A B C dissipated by the configuration R1, R2 and R3 is
R = R1 or R2 or R3 P1, P2 and P3, respectively, then [JEE - 2008]

3. Consider a cylindrical element as shown in the

3V
figure. Current flowing the through element is I and 3V
3V
resistivity of material of the cylinder is . Choose
the correct option out the following [JEE-2006]
R2
R1 R3
A B
I C (A) P1 > P2 > P3 (B) P1 > P3 > P2
4r 2r (C) P2 > P1 > P3 (D) P3 > P2 > P1

l/2 l/2 7. STATEMENT-1

In a Meter Bridge experiment, null point for an
(A) Power loss in second half is four times the power
unknown resistance is measured. Now, the unknown
loss in first half resistance is put inside an enclosure maintained at
(B) Voltage drop in first half is twice of voltage drop a higher temperature. The null point can be obtained
in second half at the same point as before by decreasing the value
(C) Current density in both halves are equal of the standard resistance. [JEE - 2008]
(D) Electric field in both halves is equal and
STATEMENT-2
4. A resistance of 2 is connected across one gap of a Resistance of a metal increases with increase in
metre-bridge (the length of the wire is 100 cm) and an temperature.
unknown resistance, greater than 2, is connected across (A) STATEMENT-1 is True, STATEMENT-2 is True;
the other gap. When these resistances are interchanged, STATEMENT-2 is a correct explanation for
STATEMENT-1
the balance point shifts by 20 cm. Neglecting any
(B) STATEMENT-1 is True, STATEMENT-2 is
corrections, the unknown resistance is
True; STATEMENT-2 is NOT a correct
[JEE-2007] explanation for STATEMENT-1
(A) 3  (B) 4  (C) STATEMENT-1 is True, STATEMENT-2 is False
(C) 5  (D) 6  (D) STATEMENT-1 is False, STATEMENT-2 is True

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
3.58 Theory and Exercise Book

8. For the circuit shown in the figure 11. To verify Ohm's law, a student is provided with a
test resistor R T. a high resistance R 1 , a small
resistance R2, two identical galvanometers G1 and
G2 and a variable voltage source V. the correct circuit
to carry out the experiment is : [JEE 2010]

G1 G1

(A) the current I through the battery is 7.5 mA R2 R1

(B) the potential difference across RL is 18 V RT
G2
R1 RT
G2
R2
(A) (B)
(C) ratio of powers dissipated in R1 and R2 is 3
(D) if R1 and R2 are interchanged, magni tude of the v v

power dissipated in RL will de crease by a factor of 9

[JEE - 2009]
R1 R2
G1 G1
9. Consider a thin square sheet of side L and thickness
G2 G2
t, made of a material of resistivity . The resistance RT RT
(C) R2
(D) R1
between two opposite faces shown by the shaded
area in the figure is : [JEE 2010] v v

12. When two identical batteries of internal resistance

1  each are connected in series across a resistor R,

t the rate of heat produced in R is J1. When the same

L batteries are connected in parallel across R, the rate is
J2. If J1 = 2.25 J2 then the value of R in  is
[JEE 2010]
(A) directly proportional to L
(B) directly proportional to t
(C) independent of L 13. A meter bridge is set-up as shown, to determine an
(D) independent of t unknown resistance 'X' using a standard 10 ohm
resistor. The galvanometer shows null point when
10. Incandenscent bulbs are designed by keeping in mind tapping-key is at 52 cm mark. The end-corrections
that the resitance of their filament increases with are 1 cm and 2 cm respectively for the ends A and
the increase in temperature. If at room temperature, B. The determined value of 'X' is [JEE 2011]
100 W, 60 W and 40 W bulbs have filament
resistances R100, R60 and R40 , respectively, the X 10

relation between these resistance is [JEE 2010]

1 1 1 C
(A) R  R  R (B) R100 = R40 + R60
100 40 60 A B

1 1 1 (A) 10.2 ohm (B) 10.6 ohm

(C) R100 > R60 > R40 (D) R  R  R
100 60 40 (C) 10.8 ohm (D) 11.1 ohm

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
 CURRENT 3.59

14. Two batteries of different emfs and different internal 18. A galvanometer gives full scale deflection with 0.006
resistances are connected as shown. The voltage A current. By connecting it to a 4990  resistance, it
across AB in volts is [JEE 2011]
can be converted into a voltmeter of range 0-30 V. If
6V
2n
connected to a  resistance, it becomes an ammeter
A B 246

of range 0 - 1.5 A. The value of n is [JEE 2014]

3V 2
19. In an aluminum (Al) bar of square cross section, a
15. For the resistance network shown in the figure,
square hole is drilled and is filled with iron (Fe) as
choose the correct option(s). [JEE 2012]
shown in the figure. The electrical resistivities of Al
I2  and Fe are 2.7 × 10–8 m and 1.0 × 10–7 m,

 respectively. The electrical resistance between the
 
two faces P and Q of the composite bar is
 [JEE Advanced 2015]


I1

(A) The current through PQ is zero

(B) l1 = 3A
(C) The potential at S is less than that at Q
(D) l2 = 2A

16. Two ideal batteries of emf V1 and

V2 and these resistances R1, R2 and
R3 are connected as shown in
the figure. The current in resistance
R2 would be zero if 2475 1875
(A)  (B) 
(A) V1 = V2 and R1 = R2 = R3 64 64
(B) V1 = V2 and R1 = 2R2 = R3
(C) V1 = 2V2 and 2R1 = 2R2 = R3 1875 2475
(C)  (D) 
(D) 2V1 = V2 and 2R1 = R2 = R3 [JEE 2014] 49 132

17. Heater of an electric kettle is made of a wire of lenght

L and diameter d. It takes 4 minutes to raise the 20. In the following circuit, the current through the
temperature of 0.5 kg water by 40 K. This heater is resistor R (=2) is I amperes. The value of I is -
replaced by a new heater having two wires of the same [JEE Advanced 2015]
material, each of length L and diameter 2d. The way R(=2) 1
these wires are connected is given in the options. Howe
2

8

much time in munutes will it take to raise the 2

6
temperature of the same amout of water by 40 K?
4

10
6.5V
(A) 4 if wires are in parallel [JEE 2014]
(B) 2 if wires are in series 12
(C) 1 if wires are in series
(D) 0.5 if wires are in parallel

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
3.60 Theory and Exercise Book

21. An infinite line charge of uniform electric charge 23. Consider two identical galvanometers and two
density  lies along the axis of an electrically identical resistors with resistance R. If the internal
conducting infinite cylindrical shell of radius R, At of the galvanometers R C < R/2, which of the
time t = 0, the space inside the cylinder is filled with following statement(s) about any one of the
a material of permittivity  and electrical conductivity galvanometer is (are) true? [JEE Advanced 2016]
. The electrical conduction in the material follows (A) The maximum voltage range is obtained when
Ohm’s law. Which one of the following graphs best all the components are contained in series
describes the subsequent variation of the (B) The maximum voltage range is obtained when
magnitude of current density j(t) at any point in the the two resistors and one galvanometer are
material? [JEE Advanced 2016] connected in series, and the second galvanometer is
connected in parallel to the first galvanometer
j( t) j( t)
(C) The maximum current range is obtained when
all the components are connected in parallel
(A) (B) (D) The maximum current range is obtained when
(0, 0) t (0, 0) t the two galvanometers are connected in series and
the combination is connected in parallel with both
j( t) j(t) the resistors
24. In the circuit shown below, the key is pressed at
(C) (D) time t = 0. Which of the following statement (s) is
(0, 0) t (0, 0) t (are) true ? [JEE Advanced 2016]
40F 25k

22. An incandesecent bulb has a thin filament of –

V
tungstgen that is heated to high temperature by +
passing an electric current. The hot filament emits
50F 20F
black - body radiation. The filament is observed to
A
break up at random location after a sufficiently long
time of operation due to non - uniform evaporation
of tungsten from the filament. If the bulb is + –
powered at constant voltage, Which of the following Key 5V
statement(s) is(are) true? [JEE Advanced 2016]
(A) The voltmeter displays –5 V as soon as the key
(A) The temperature distribution over the
is pressed, and displays +5 after a long time
filament is uniform
(B) The voltmeter will display 0 V at time t = In 2 seconds
(B) The resistance over small sections of the filament
(C) The current in the ammeter becomes 1/e of the
decreases with time
initial value after 1 second
(C) The filament emits more light at higher band of
(D) The current in the ammeter becomes zero after
frequencies before it breaks up
a long time
(D) The filament consumes less electrical power
towards the ends of the life of the bulb

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
 CURRENT 3.61

Exercise - 1 Objective Problems | JEE Main

1. D 2. B 3. C 4. C 5. C 6. D 7. C
8. C 9. D 10. B 11. B 12. B 13. D 14. D
15. B 16. A 17. B 18. B 19. B 20. D 21. C
22. D 23. A 24. C 25. B 26. D 27. D 28. C
29. C 30. A 31. A 32. C 33. C 34. C 35. A
36. B 37. B 38. C 39. C 40. A 41. B 42. D
43. C 44. C 45. A 46. D 47. A 48. A 49. B
50. A 51. C 52. B 53. A

Exercise - 2 (Level-I) Objective Problems | JEE Main

1. C 2. C 3. D 4. B 5. B 6. D 7. B
8. C 9. C 10. A 11. D 12. D 13. D 14. D
15. A 16. C 17. C 18. D 19. B 20. B 21. A
22. C 23. A 24. B 25. B 26. D 27. B 28. C
29. B 30. A 31. C 32. A 33. A 34. A 35. A
36. D 37. A 38. B 39. B 40. A 41. D 42. C
43. B 44. D 45. C 46. A 47. A

Exercise - 2 (Level-II) Multiple Correct | JEE Advanced

1. A,D 2. A,B,C,D 3. A,B,C 4. A,C,D 5. A,B,C,D
6. A,C 7. A,C 8. A,D 9. B,C 10. A,B

Exercise - 3 | Level-I Subjective | JEE Advanced

2
1. 1.5625 × 1019 2. 1.56×10-2m/s 3. 1.25 × 1017, (b) × 106 A/m2

4. 25 V/m 5. R/9 6. 27:6:1 7. 544
8. 84.5°C 9. 0 I | 1 – 2 | 10 1127K 11. 1
12. (a) 7.5 V, (b) 24 mA(c) greater than 12 V Discharging condition

22 3r
13.  14. 15. zero 16. 19 V 17. (a) 3.7 V (b) 3.7 V
35 5
18. 1 19. 1V 20. (a) 12 W (b) 4W (c) 8 W (d) 4 (e) 4W

21. R1 R 2 22. 90 watt 23. 12A, – 20 W

50 22  11
24. (a)  4.55 A (b)  48 .4  (c) 1000 W (d) 240 cal s–1 (e) 80/3 gm min-1
11 5
25. 90%
26. (a) E = 10 V each (b) (A) act as a source and (B) act as load
(c) VA = 9V, VB = 11 V (d) PA = 9 W, PB = 11 W (e) Heat rate = 1 W each
(f) 10 watt. (g) 9V, 11 V (h) –9W, 11 W

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43
3.62 Theory and Exercise Book

3 3  5 .5
27. 4 28. 600 29.  0.15 A ,  0.83 A
20 20

25 5
30. I = 2.5 A, V = 3.5 volts 31. V  2.78 V, A  0. 278 A 32. 20 ohm
9 18

50
33. A 34. 46.67 cm 35. 4 ohm 36. 7.5 m, 8.75 m
73

Exercise - 3 | Level-II Subjective | JEE Advanced

1. 5 × 1028/m3, 2 × 10–3 m/s 2. (a) J0A/3; (b) 2J0 A/3

 0L  1 V0 A  e  V ( e  x /L  e 1 )
3. R 1  ; I  ; V 0
A  e  
 0L e  1 1  e 1

5 R2 3
4.  eff   5. 300% 6. (3/11) 7. 
4 R1 5

(k  1) 2
;
k  
(k  1) /k2 V0
8. 7/5 times the length of any side of the square 9. (i) (ii)
k (k  1) R3

22
10. (i) Vab = –12 V, (ii) 3 amp from b to a 11. proved 12.  Volt
9

13. (i) 10.52 ; (ii) 0.3125  14. 4/9 kg/sec, 450 sec 15. 11  6 2

8
16. 7.2 m 17. 233.3, 144V 18. [RA = R, RV = 8R]
3

Exercise - 4 | Level-I Previous Year | JEE Main

1. B 2. B 3. A 4. C 5. D 6. A 7. C
8. B 9. B 10. D 11. B 12. C 13. D 14. B
15. C 16. C 17. C 18. D 19. D 20. B 21. B
22. D 23. A 24. C 25. A 26. B 27. B 28. A
29. B 30. A 31. D 32. B 33. A 34. D 35. C
36. D 37. C 38. D 39. C

Exercise - 4 | Level-II Previous Year | JEE Advanced

1. D 2. This is true for r1 = r2; So R2 given most accurate value 3. A
4. A 5. C 6. C 7. D 8. A,D 9. C
10. D 11. C 12. 4 13. B 14. 5 15. A,B,C,D
16. A,B,D 17. B,D 18. 5 19. B 20. 1 21. A
22. C,D 23. A,C 24. A,B,C,D

Plot no. 46, Corner Building, Rajeev Gandhi Nagar, Kota, 9214233303|43